Home

RSA3408B 8 GHz Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer User Manual

1. MEASSETUP Frequency 15 GA Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Trace 5 Normal Video filter indicator Signal Threshold dob Trace2 Off displayed when On _ dBm Marker 1 5 GHz 20 0 15 79 dBm 65 79 dBm Hz s N dem al 500k The spurious detection range Spurious is displayed in blue esl nn fo 10 Excursion dB susto SL purious marker 2 il 3 TII Scroll Table 1111111111111 Center 1 5 GHz Span 36 MHz Measurement table U
2. Tektronix RSA 34038 E Pause Meas SETUP Frequency 1 5 GHz Cancel Back Span 5 MHz Trace 1 Normal Measurement Input Att 20 dB FAIL Trace 2 Off Offset From Channel I mM Abs il Select Rel j Aun Men EL RA Ref Channel I Il Level dBm Channel I Bandwidth Hz i 1M Measurement Filter Shape Rect Center 1 5 GHz Channel Bandwidth Span 15 MHz NBW 12 527 kHz SUE Limit table Start Peak Relative Edit by Meas Setup gt Limits B Lower 1 496 GHz 1 49902 GHz 30kHz 86 46dBm 65 98 dBc S8croll Table refer to page 3 16 B Upper 150198 GHz 1504GHz 30kHz 87 62dBm 67 14 C Lower 1 48 GHz 1 496 GHz 1 MHz 77 90 dBm 57 42 dBc 1 504 GHz 1 52 GHz 1 MHz 77 28 ddm F 56 80 dBc Spectrum Analyzer SEM
3. Tekironix RSA 3408B PAUSE MEAS SETUP aa a a Ra Frequency 2 GHz RBW SO kHz Cancel Back Span I MHz Trace 1 Normal Carrier Threshold Input Att 5 dB Trace 2 Off Level dBm 30 0 Ignore Region en u III Tirestel Threshold dBc Ill 74 Excursion 10 dB dB il Symmetrical Filter On Off Carrier Tracking 100 dBm Off Center 2 GHz Span 10 8 Scroll Table deltaF Hz R atio dBc 4 556M 1 134M 1 109M 59 46 75 05 70 15 74 76 Signal Source Analysis Spurious Figure 3 88 Spurious measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Real Time Phase Noise Measures the phase noise in real time The measurement results can be displayed Measurement in
4. CJ C 390 J OIO C3 OOO CJ CO oOo CO 200000 JO D gt D Figure 1 11 Front panel power switch On Standby switch RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual When you turn on the analyzer Windows XP starts After several minutes the analyzer application starts The initial screen appears as shown in Figure 1 12 The displayed spectrum represents the noise floor of the analyzer 1 13 Installation Tektronix RSA 3408B 20 MEASURE jc I P Frequency 1 5 GHz 1 Cancel Back Span Input Att Channel Power ACPR C N OBW Carrier Frequency EBW Spurious Center 1 5 GHz Sp Measurement Off Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 1 12 Initial screen If UNCAL is displayed on top of the screen run the gain calibration routine refer to Calibrating Gain on page 1 25 CAUTION Never apply signals with a combined amplitude greater than 30 dBm to the RF INPUT connector If you exceed this input rating you can permanently damage the analyzer The RF INPUT connector is shown in Figure 1 13 2090 2 AO A RF INPUT connector Max 30 dBm AC DC 000 Figure 1 13 RF INPUT connector 1 14 R
5. Center 800 MHz Spectrogram Center 800 MHz Span 10 kHz S with Spectrogram Measurement Off Figure 3 21 Spectrum and spectrogram concurrent display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 21 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Changing Display Style 3 22 You can change display style as required 1 Press the View Define key 2 Press the View Orientation side key to select the view style Wide or Tall Wide display Tall display Displays spectrum and spectrogram Display spectrum and spectrogram in line split display side by side Figure 3 22 View orientation 3 When you display either spectrum or spectrogram only on full screen press the View Select key to select the view The selected view is surrounded by a light blue frame 4 Press the Show Views side key and select Single as shown in Figure 3 23 Single display Displays the selected view on one screen a hae Center 3oorne Figure 3 23 Single display Refer to Setting Views on page 3 203 for details RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Real Time Analysis When you select S A Real Time S A or Real Time S A with Zoom the analyzer performs the real time analysis displaying the spectrogram Refer to Spectrogram Display on page 3 21 for the display Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 27 for the zoom NOTE The Real Time S
6. Spectrogram 100 dem block Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Me S A with Spectrogram Measurement Off Figure 1 18 Spectrogram display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 19 Installation Powering Off the Analyzer 1 20 A Turn off the power switch on the front panel CAUTION When you power on or off the analyzer you must use the front panel power switch Failure to do so may cause the operating system to shut down improperly When you power on the analyzer again wait at least 10 seconds after the last power off When you press the front panel On Standby switch the analyzer starts a shutdown process including a Windows shutdown to preserve settings and then power off The LED next to the power switch changes to orange Avoid using the rear panel power switch or disconnecting the power cord to power off the analyzer To completely remove power to the analyzer perform the shutdown just described and then set the power switch on the rear panel to off NOTE Turning off the front panel power switch does not shut down the principal power supply completely To turn off the principal power supply press the principal power switch on the rear panel Turning off the principal power switch turns off the front panel LED When you do not use the analyzer for a long time or in case of emergency you should unplug the power cord RSA3408B Analyzer User M
7. Transmission power on down measurement Power on down measurements RF envelope FSK pulse measurement main view RF envelope FSK pulse measurement parameters Constellation eye diagram and symbol table main view cise sceitse estesse Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 Figure 3 88 Figure 3 89 Figure 3 90 Figure 3 91 Figure 3 92 Figure 3 93 Figure 3 94 Figure 3 95 Figure 3 96 Figure 3 97 Figure 3 98 Figure 3 99 Figure 3 100 Amplitude menu structure Figure 3 101 Setting the amplitude RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Definition of the modulation depth and index Time menu amp IQ versus Time measurement Power variance measurement Frequency CCDF calculation process CCDF single view CCDF multi view Definition of pulse characteristics Definition of pulse on off Setting for View Results For Lees Setting the View Define menu Waveform display in the subview Phase noise measurement parameters Phase noise Spurious measurement
8. 3 184 Figure 3 133 Windowing process of time domain data 3 186 Figure 3 134 Comparison display of Trace 1 and 2 3 191 Figure 3 135 Trace Avg menu structure 3 192 Figure 3 136 Displaying an averaged waveform 3 198 Figure 3 137 Compared display 3 199 Figure 3 138 Relationships between frame bin and pixel 3 201 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 139 Figure 3 140 Figure 3 141 Figure 3 142 Figure 3 143 Figure 3 144 Figure 3 145 Figure 3 146 Figure 3 147 Figure 3 148 Figure 3 149 Figure 3 150 Figure 3 151 Figure 3 152 Figure 3 153 Figure 3 154 Figure 3 155 Figure 3 156 Figure 3 157 Figure 3 158 Figure 3 159 Figure 3 160 Figure 3 161 Figure 3 162 Figure 3 163 Figure 3 164 Figure 3 165 Figure 3 166 Figure 3 167 Figure 3 168 Figure 3 169 Figure 3 170 Figure 3 171 Figure 3 172 Figure 3 173 Figure 3 174 Figure 3 175 Figure 3 176 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Compression method for displaying the waveform Setting the scale in spectrum view Setting the scale in spectrum view Scale and format settings in spectrogram view Setting the scale in time domain view Setting the scale in CCDF view Vector and constellation displays Phase multiplication display for a CP
9. IQ Frequency versus time measurement Power variance measurement Symbol table analysis Eye diagram analysis main view Setting Linear Signal Region AM AM AM PM measurement CCDF measurement PDF measurement FSK deviations measurement 4FSK Spectrogram display in the average or high resolution Signal Noise and Distortion measurement Harmonics measurement results bottom of the screen Harmonic level calculation Interval limit between harmonics Hum and Noise Ratio measurement result bottom of the screen Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 RFID waveform and measurement items Carrier measurement 3 29 3 31 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 40 3 43 3 44 3 46 3 46 3 47 3 54 3 56 3 57 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 60 3 61 3 62 3 63 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 68 3 71 3 73 3 74 3 74 3 75 3 78 3 81 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 ACPR measurements Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 parameters Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Spurious measurement Modified Miller
10. 50 26 Figure C 1 Digital IQ output connector pin assignment Table C 1 OUTPUT connector pin assignment Pin number Signal name Description 1 IQ ENABLE 10 output enable signal input Open IQ output disable Connect to GND IQ output enable 26 GND Ground 2 GND Ground 27 GND 3 output data bit 0 LVDS a 4 output data bit 1 LVDS T 5 output data bit 2 LVDS T 6 output data bit 3 LVDS s 7 GND Ground 32 GND RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual C 1 Appendix C Digital Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Table C 1 OUTPUT connector pin assignment Cont Pin number Signal name Description Signal name 8 output data bit 4 LVDS T 9 output data bit 5 LVDS 10 output data bit 6 LVDS s 11 output data bit 7 LVDS s 12 GND Ground 37 GND 13 output data bit 8 LVDS 14 output data bit 9 LVDS s 15 output data bit 10 LVDS n 16 output data bit 11 LVDS T 17 GND Ground 42 GND 18 output data bit 12 LVDS 19 output data bit 13 LVDS T 20 output data bit 14 LVDS T 21 output data bit 15 LVDS 22 GND Ground 47 GND 23 GND 48 GND C 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix C Digital Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Table C 1 OUTPUT connector pin assignment Cont Pin number Signal name Description 24 EXT IQ DAV Not used 49 EXT IQ DAV 25 EXT IQ CLK
11. Figure 3 16 Spectrum emission mask measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Editing the Measurement Limits When you select Limits in the Meas Setup menu the measurement limits editor appears see Figure 3 17 You can set up to 12 frequency zones A to L symmetrical about the center frequency Enter the pass fail conditions for each zone Follow these steps to set the limit mask 1 Press the Select column to edit side key 2 Turn the general purpose knob or press the arrow keys to select the column A to L to edit 3 Press the Enable side key to enable or disable use of the limits for the zone 4 Setthe other items as appropriate refer to Table 3 3 5 When you press the Rescale Graph side key the graph is rescaled to match the set limits To restore the scale press the Return To Original Scale side key Tekironix RSA 3408B 3 8 PAUSE LIMITS Cancel Back Frequency 1 5 GHz Zone A Zone A else cal enn E C B C to edit 284 EU A Re jjj Enable abs m T Rel Yes No II i T TIER IL DAMM MANAA la dB MIN Frequency Hz iM 200 Ending Frequency Center 1 5 GHz Span 10 MHz Hz 2M1 Yes No No Measurement 2 MHz 3 MHz 0Hz Bandwidth Hz _ 3 MHz 5 MHz pok 30 kHz 30 kHz 20 kHz Offset from Both Both Both i Upper Lo
12. M M 1 Frequency 50 MHz RBW 50 kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level 4 Input Att 0 dB Trace 2 Off dBm Figure 3 102 Overrange indicator NOTE If Overrange increase RefLev or Atten is displayed it indicates that the A D converter in the subsequent part of the downconverter inside this instrument is overloaded In this case data display is distorted and the measurement is not accurate If a signal larger than the reference level set value by 20 dB or more is applied continuously however the limiter of the IF amplifier in the downconverter is automatically activated to prevent large level signals from passing through the A D converter Even if a signal exceeding the reference level is applied therefore Overrange increase RefLev or Atten may not be displayed Auto Leveling the signal can usually eliminate all overload conditions Take sufficient care about the input signal level The overflow indicator is updated at every physical frame acquisition When a high level signal is applied under a setting that uses multiple physical frames for one scan Overrange increase RefLev or Atten may be displayed for a moment and then turned off immediately When a single high level signal is applied under a setting using one physical frame in one scan the same phenome non may be observed RSA3408B Analyzer User Man
13. 100 100 180 dea 10 20 45 deg 100 270 Lg PP nn S 96 deq Start 1 11875 ms Scale 90 5525 p Start 1 080625 ms Scale 85 75 us Start 1 07875 ms Scale 85 75 Lis EVM display Magnitude error display Phase error display Figure 3 148 EVM magnitude and phase error displays NOTE OQPSK modulated signal only When you select OQPSK in Modula tion Type of the Meas Setup menu and set Q Data Half Symbol Shift refer to page 3 53 of the View Define menu to 0 zero only EVM is available in Measurement Content You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing System gt Instrument Setup gt Angular Units 3 216 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views See Figure 3 149 for EVM Mag Error and Phase Error The figure is an example of the constellation view in 1 4nQPSK modulation The cross marks referred to as symbols and indicate phase positions of the ideal signal amplitude is fixed in this case In this modulation the bit pattern is determined by movements from each position For example if the actual signal has shifted from the ideal symbol position to the position you can evaluate vector signal quality as magnitudes of error in radius direction amplitude error in phase direction and total error vector These three types of errors correspond to the three types of views in the EVM view m EVM RMS Root mean square value of EVM Error Vector Magnitude m
14. Subview 1 100 mW p 100 10 M pw pw 0 0 wW 12 056405 ms 12 049609 ms Pulse 309 Pulse 0 A Single Pulse All Pulses Shows the measurement result and Shows the measurement results for waveform for a specified pulse all pulses with the horizontal axis representing the pulse number Figure 3 83 Setting for View Results For Displayed Measurement Determines whether to show the measurement result in the main view for each measurement item Select On to show the result For the measurement items refer to page 3 109 NOTE You must select at least one measurement item in Displayed Measurement If you turn all items off an error message One or more measurement items must be selected will appear on the bottom of the screen Display Time Range Selects how to display a pulse in the subview m Adaptive Default Adjusts the horizontal scale for each pulse to fit the pulse width to the subview m Max Adjusts the horizontal scale to fit the maximum pulse width in the analysis range to the subview 3 114 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Guidelines Determines whether to display the guidelines in the subview On Default Displays the guidelines in the subview m Off Hides the guidelines in the subview For the guidelines refer to Definition of Pulse On Off Time on page 3 110 Menu Off Turns off the side menu to expand the measurement results and waveform view
15. 112 m gt Number Of Averages Tracen Freeze Off Reset Average Trace n Type Normal Trig Display Detection Average Number Of Traces to Hold Load Trace n MaxHold Reset Max Hold gy Save MinHold un Number Of Traces to Hold p DPX Spectrum only Reset Min Hold Bitmap 33 Trace Peak gt Intensity Avg Peak Dot Persistence Off Variable Infinite Persistence Value Max Min Max Min Reset Bitmap 7 Load From File menu Refer to Saving a File on page 3 254 Save To File menu Refer to Loading a File on page 3 259 Real Time S A mode Trace Type Normal Average Number Of Averages Audio Measurements Option 10 Trace Normal Average Hi Res Number Of Averages Trace Type Average Extenden Resolution Trace Type Hi Res Demod and Time modes except Audio Measurements Average Off On Average Count Average Term Control Expo Repeat Figure 3 135 Trace Avg menu structure 3 192 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function S A Mode The Trace Avg menu has the following controls in the S A mode except Except Real Time S A Real Time S A Select Trace Selects the trace to control trace 1 or 2
16. 495 deq s 22 153873 Us Figure 3 152 Eye diagram view 3 220 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views AM AM View Setting Option 21 Only The AM AM view shows non linearity characteristics of a device under test DUT such as an RF amplifier representing reference amplitude along the horizontal axis and measured signal amplitude along the vertical axis Refer to Measurement on page 3 61 View Scale Menu The Scale menu for the AM AM view contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects a vector or dot display see Figure 3 153 Vector Displays yellow lines between the dots default m Dot Displays the calculated result as a series of red dots By default the measurement results are displayed with the horizontal and vertical axes scaled automatically to fit the graph to the screen Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis to expand the graph Range The initial minimum value left edge to the maximum value right edge Vertical Start Shows the minimum value bottom of the vertical axis not settable Equal to the Horizontal Start value Vector display Dot display 5 5 dBm dBm P 55 Brn A dBm x Vertical Start gt 465 Bm 5 dBm 65 dBm 5 dBm Horizontal Start Figure 3 153 Vector and dot displays for AM AM view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 221 Se
17. Frame 2 Frame 3 e e Lem FFT FFT Start Point Overlap 1024 points gt Figure 3 131 FFT overlap RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 183 FFT and RBW FFT Points Limit on the FFT Points 3 184 The number of FFT points is normally set automatically by the RBW setting The value is basically 1024 It can be set in powers of 2 from 64 to 8192 This value is the number of points in one physical frame in the time and frequency domains If the number of points is reduced the frame period is shortened and more spectrum variations can be observed in the spectrogram view If the number of the points is increased S N ratio and frequency resolution are improved NOTE Setting the number of FFT points greater than the limit 8192 causes the noise floor to go down and occasionally causes spurious signals to appear see Figure 3 132 It cannot be determined whether the spurious signal comes from the input signal or the instrument The number of FFT points is normally limited to 8192 internally to avoid displaying internally generated spurious signals However you can remove this restriction and set the number of FFT points up to 65536 using the following steps 1 Display the measurement signal on the screen Press the RBW FFT key on the front panel 2 3 Press the RBW FFT side key to select FFT 4 Press the Extended Res side key to select On 5 Press
18. Spectrum Analyzer ACPR Main Channel Bandwidth kHz 2 Figure 3 6 Example of ACPR measurement Measures Carrier to Noise ratio C N Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the C N measurement contains the following controls see Figure 3 7 Offset Frequency Sets the offset frequency from carrier to noise Range Span 2 to Span 2 Noise Bandwidth Sets the noise bandwidth Carrier Bandwidth Sets the carrier bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Selects a filter shape from these types m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Enters rolloff ratio when Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter is selected Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 7 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 8 OBW Measurement Carrier Bandwidth Noise Bandwidth gt Figure 3 7 C N measurement band power markers Figure 3 8 shows an example of the C N measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B 2 9 MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Offset Input Att 20 cB Trace 2 Off Hz E m 0 Carrier dBm BEER Bandwidth Hz 2k Noise Bandwidth Hz 2k Measurement Filter Shape a Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 0 5 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz C N 74 25 dB Offset Frequency 5 kHz Noise Bandwidth 2 kHz C No 107 26 dB Hz Carrier
19. 0 em Indicates the amplitude correction is on Figure 3 108 Amplitude correction setup display The analyzer automatically saves the correction data in use when it is powered down The data will be erased when you press these keys Amplitude gt Corrections gt Edit Table gt Clear Table B Preset RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual SEE Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters You can adjust the length of various time parameters and the relationship between them in the Real Time S A Demod and Time modes using the Acquisition Analysis menu NOTE The Acquisition Analysis menu is not available in the S A mode except Real Time S A Acquisition Analysis Menu Figure 3 109 shows the Acquisition Analysis menu structure Span Frequency Real Time S A mode Channel Amplitude Acauisition Analysis Acquisition Length Spectrum Offset Real Time S A with Zoom mode Acquisition Length Acquisition History Analysis Length Analysis Offset Frequency Center Frequency Width Demod and Time modes Acquisition Length Acquisition History Spectrum Length Spectrum Offset Analysis Length Analysis Offset Output Trigger Indicator Figure 3 109 Acquisition Analysis menu structure RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 157 Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters Parameters in Demod and Time Modes 3 158 The Acquisition Analysis menu in Demod modul
20. Signal Noise amp Distortion Harmonics Harmonics Ignore Region Non Harmonics Threshold Excursion Hum amp Noise Ratio Save as Ref RFID Measurements Option 21 only Carrier gt Analyze Counter Resolution Power Ratio for the OBW dB Power Ratio for the OBW Amplitude Offset Bandwidth Ch Power Spurious gt Same as Spurious in the S A mode I RF Envelope FSK Pulse Constellation Eye Diagram Symbol Table Measurement Off Power On Down T gt Analyze Baseband AM FM None C Message CCITT 3kHz 15kHz 30kHz 80kHz LPF None 50Hz 300Hz 400Hz HPF None 25us 50us 75us 750us ACPR gt Main Channel Bandwidth Adjacent Channel Bandwidth Chan Spacing Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Root Nyquist Scroll Table Standard Type 18000 4 1 18000 6 A 18000 6 B 18000 6 C 18000 7 14443 2 A 14443 2 B Link Modulation Type Decoding Format Auto Bit Rate Bit Rate Tari Settling Error Width Lower Threshold Higher Threshold Interpolation Points 1 18092 494k 15693 2 COG1 C1G1 Manual nterrogator Tag ASK DSB ASK SSB ASK PR ASK FSK OOK Subcarrier OOK Subcarrier BPSK Manchester Miller Miller M 2 M 4 or M 8 Modified Miller PIE Type A or C
21. 58 3 2 Spectrum Analysis E E een 3 4 DPX Spectrum Display 3 18 Spectrogram Display nennen nen 3 21 Real Time Analysis 0222238 ERBE ides 3 23 Zoom PUNCH OM 732 RE REN 3 27 Modulation Analysis Demod 3 31 Measurement Screen Layout 3 33 Analog Modulation Analysis 3 41 Digital Modulation Analysis Option 21 3 48 Audio Measurements Option 10 3 67 RFID Analysis Option 21 3 77 Time Analysis Time Mode 3 99 Measurement Screen Layout 58 3 99 Time Variation Measurement sese 3 100 Measurement a N M eR EROR 3 104 Pulse Measurements redu ea qu ER ARAN 3 109 Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only 3 119 Setting Frequency and 3 135 Frequency and Span Setting 3 136 Using the Channel Table 3 138 Using the Marker and Peak Search 3 139 Frequency Setting Range 3 140 V
22. Trace 2 Green averaged waveform On Freeze Off Trace 2 Type fi Average Number Of Averages 20 dE Reset Average Display Detection Max Load Trace 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Save Trace Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 2 42 Comparison display with averaged waveform 7 Press the Trace 2 Type side key again and select Off to remove Trace 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 45 Tutorial Displaying DPX Spectrum The DPX spectrum measurement records data occurrences for each pixel on screen to show the bitmap trace with color grading according to the density l Press the DPX key on the front panel to display the DPX spectrum In am Scale Two traces are displayed by default with Trace 1 as Bitmap and Trace 2 as Peak The Bitmap trace indicates high density in red and low in blue See Figure 2 43 Frequency 100 MHz RRL ann 237 Hz Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Bitmap N Persistence 1 Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 4PeakY 0 an Type of Trace 1 and 2 10 dB 100 dam T Signal Density O96 i 100 Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Figure 2 43 DPX spectrum display Changing the Trace Type Change the Trace 1 type 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select 1 Trace 1 2 46 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial 3 Press the Trace 1 Type side key to select the trace type For exam
23. a gt On time Off time Time Slope 1 Slope 2 Slope 3 rise time fall time rise time Duty cycle On width Period The vertical axis represents frequency shift in the FSK pulse measurement Figure 3 71 RF envelope FSK pulse measurement parameters You can save the measurement table to a file csv by Save Save Table For file operations refer to page 3 251 3 94 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Changing the View The contents of the view can be changed in the next item by pressing the View Define key The next items are the same as the carrier measurement Refer to page 3 81 Show Views Overview Content Subview Content Selects the information displayed in the subview m Spectrum m Power versus Time m Frequency versus Time Zoomed Spectrum Spectrum for a zoomed area in the Zoom display m Envelope Waveform same as the RF envelope in the main view m Constellation Waveform same as the constellation in the main view m Eye Diagram Waveform same as the eye diagram in the main view m Symbol Table Same as the symbol table in the main view Refer to page 3 27 for the zoom function Refer to page 3 82 for setting the view scale Burst Selects the burst number to be measured Refer to page 3 94 Figure 3 71 The setting range is limited as follows default 0 Burst setting Edge setting 20000 for Edge ref
24. Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 12 ms Cancel Back Span 500 kHz Auto Carrier Input Att 20 dB On Off 4 Frequency Error dBm Hz 1 428k 5 Threshold dB dB 100 54 dem Timing Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 100 MHz Span 500 kHz Main view 400 kHz Measurement results 388544974 kHz From the top Peak Peak 2 194272487 kHz Peak to peak frequency deviation Peak 194313387 kHz 20 Peak to peak frequency deviation 2 Peak 194 231587 kHz kHz Positive peak frequency deviation RMS 135 393144 kHz Negative peak frequency deviation p RMS frequency deviation Frequency deviation variation kHz Start 12 8 ms Scale 640 us Analog Demod Demod Figure 3 40 demod measurement 3 44 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode PM Demod Measurement Demodulates and measures a PM signal Figure 3 41 shows an example The main view displays the phase error versus time graph Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the PM demod measurement contains the following controls Auto Carrier Determines whether to detect the carrier automatically m On Default Automatically detects the carrier for every frame For the center frequency set by pressing Frequency Channel gt Center Freq there is a relation Carrier frequency Center frequency Frequency offset The carrier frequency is indicated in the Carrie
25. Max Ar Load Trace 100 rn Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Save Irace Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Number Of Averages 64 Figure 2 41 Averaging a waveform 5 Press the Reset Average side key to restart averaging 2 44 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Comparison Display You can display two different types of traces concurrently on the screen In this procedure you will display the currently acquired waveform and an averaged waveform for comparison l Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Make sure that 1 Trace 1 is selected in the Select Trace menu item 3 Press the Trace Type side key and select Normal to define Trace 1 as the currently acquired waveform 4 Press the Select Trace side key to select 2 Trace 2 5 Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select Average to define Trace 2 as the averaged waveform 6 Press the Run Stop key on the front panel to acquire a waveform The currently acquired waveform Trace 1 in yellow is displayed with the averaged waveform Trace 2 in green See the display in Figure 2 42 Tektronix RSA 3408B x 2 TRACE AVG Jr Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Select Trace Input Att 15 cB Trace 2 Average 20 20 Select Trace EN gt Selects the trace to be operated Trace 1 Yellow currently acquired waveform Trace 2
26. Scrolls the display down Scrolls the display up Scrolls the display down Scrolls the display to the left Scrolls the display to the right Accepts the selection and displays the corresponding content eae Back Refresh Print Pig Locate Select the topic centenis search from the contents Eg User Manual 9 28 Spectrum Analysis 5 2 5 88 Analysis De 9 28 Time Analysis Time M Setting Frequency and ocedure Using the Channe E Using the Marker E Setting Range S Vector Span H E Setting Amplitude FFT and RBW Acquisiton Analysis Par rigger Trace Comparison Disp Display Line 2 1 Marker Operation and I 88 File Operations 3 Connecting External De E Screen Hardcopy H 6 Using Windows XP ni F t E F Basic Procedure Use the folowing steps to set a frequency and span 1 Press the Frequency Channel key on the front panel Set the center frequency with the Center Freq side key The following two items are available in the S A mode Start Freq sets the minimum value of the frequency axis Stop Freq sets the maximum value of the frequency axis 3 Press the Span key on the front panel 4 Select the span with the Span side key With the general purpose knob the span can be set in the 1 2 5 sequence With the numeric keypad the span can
27. PDF graph Yellow line Measurement line Green line Recovered reference line Blue center line Average power Figure 3 55 PDF measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual NOTE The reference line is displayed in the PDF graph when the subview content is AM AM or AM PM 3 65 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode FSK Deviations Measurement Measurement result readout m Frequency deviation error RMS m Frequency deviation error peak m Symbol timing error RMS m Calculated symbol rate bom Measurement table Indicates the maximum minimum and average frequency deviation for each symbol value 3 66 Measures the frequency deviation error when Modulation Type in the Meas Set up menu is set to GFSK FSK 4FSK 8FSK or 16FSK For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 49 Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum select by View Define Subview Content Tektronix RSA 3408B PAUSE Modulation Param SS P M Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 16 jus Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Symbol Rate Input Att 10 dB Symbols Sec 10k 0 Measurement dem Filter None 10 Reference dB Filter Gaussian 100 Filter Parameter dem 0 3 Start 38 4 ms Scale 3 84 ms Os 99 966582 Us ERE Auto Frequency Max Avg Deviation RMS FSK Err 867 96 867 96 Symbol Timing Err 0 017 46 On Off Peak FSK Err 20 1
28. Starting Acronis Loader press F5 for Acronis Startup Recovery Manager Repeatedly press the F5 key until the Acronis True Image Tool opens There is a three second time period from when the message appears until the instrument proceeds with the normal instrument startup If the instrument does not open the Acronis application power off the instrument then power on the instrument and try again Click Restore In the Confirmation dialog box click Yes to restore the instrument operating system or No to exit the restore process The restore process takes approximately 30 minutes the actual time depends on the instrument configuration E 1 Appendix E Restoring the Instrument Operating System E 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual EUNDO AEN Appendix F Inspection and Cleaning A Inspecting the Exterior Inspect and clean the exterior of the instrument as often as operating conditions require Dirt acts as an insulating blanket preventing efficient heat dissipation Regular cleaning may prevent instrument malfunction and enhance reliability WARNING To avoid personal injury unplug the power cord from line voltage before cleaning the instrument To avoid getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the applicator Inspect the outside of the instrument for damage wear and missing parts using Table F 1 as a guide Instruments that appear to have been dropped o
29. 3 178 Use the external trigger input and output connectors on the rear panel see Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 to synchronize the operation of the analyzer with an external instrument By synchronizing two or more analyzers you can acquire multiple signals in different span keeping the time correlation Figure 3 127 shows an example of two RSA3408B analyzers performing IMT2000 signal analysis One analyzer is used as a master to acquire an uplink or forward link signal and the other is used as a slave to acquire a downlink or reverse link signal The master trigger output is connected to the slave trigger input If you trigger the master with a preamble in the first PRACH signal sent from the mobile terminal then the slave starts data acquisition You can seamlessly acquire the uplink and downlink communication data in the time correlated manner for 10 seconds with 5 MHz span to analyze them TRIG OUT TRIG IN Rm 5 E Slave for analyzing uplink signal for analyzing downlink signal 7 57 Figure 3 127 Synchronous operation of two RSA3408B analyzers RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Bf Sa FFT and RBW An input signal is converted to the frequency domain data by FFT Fast Fourier Transform processing RBW Resolution Bandwidth processing is then applied for comp
30. 5 15 dBm Overview Power versus Time 1 Modulation dem 6 Type dBm 15QAM Subview AM AM ir TTA Use View Define gt Subview Content to dB Douce select the display arametergi Auto Carrier Bm mns F 44 en E o m Peak amplitude Start 10 ms Scale 1 ms 5 0dBm 6 dBm E m Average amplitude Ref requency Error Crest factor Peak 1 57 dam er Average 3 80 dBm 49 23 36 Data 77 2724213991 Crest Factor 5 77 dB TERRENCE Measurement data pata Ref Der T Gaussian i it m Peak amplitude Peak 0 79 dem aussial egion Uni Average 4 75 dBm 53 85 36 m Average amplitude ERE uad n m Crest factor Ref Data nn Pray 10 96 300dB 230dB Regon 1 44098 3 20dB CCDF measurement results Sid d SE E os X ner Deum SS Start 0 dB Scale 2dB Stop 12dB 2 Digital Demod CCDF CCDF graph NOTE The reference line is displayed in the 3 64 Yellow line Measurement line Green line Recovered reference line Blue line Gaussian line CCDF graph when the subview content is AM AM or AM PM Figure 3 54 CCDF measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode PDF Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a PDF Probability Distribution Function graph Figure 3 55 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of power level versus occurrence probability The horizontal axis represents power level re
31. 51 dB 3 196927 Rectangular 13 dB 1 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 189 FFT and RBW 3 190 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual mmm Trace Comparison Display and Average Function In the spectrum analysis S A mode you can display two traces concurrently on screen Trace 1 is displayed in yellow and Trace 2 in green see Figure 3 134 The trace can be averaged for noise reduction You can save waveform data in files and load them as Trace 1 or 2 NOTE Trace comparison display is available in the spectrum analysis S A mode except Real Time S A 93 84dBm 120 074dBm Hz a dBm Trace 1 yellow Waveform currently being acquired Marker 799 95MHz 10 div Trace 2 green Averaged waveform 100 4 dEm Center Span 100kHz Figure 3 134 Comparison display of Trace 1 and 2 The main topics in this section are Trace Avg menu m Displaying Trace 1 and 2 m Averaging waveform m Saving Loading waveform data Trace compression display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 191 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Trace Avg Menu Controls the trace display and averaging The menu items vary according to the the measurement mode S A Demod or Time Run S A mode except Real Time S A Stop Select Trace
32. 92197 7 f Negative peak AM value Total AM value p peak peak AM value 2 Modulation factor variation B Start 6 4 ms Scale 320 us Analog Demod Demod RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Figure 3 39 AM demod measurement 3 43 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode FM Demod Measurement Demodulates and measures an FM signal Figure 3 40 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the frequency deviation versus time graph Measure Show Measurements is selected in Figure 3 40 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the FM demod measurement contains the following controls Auto Carrier Determines whether to detect the carrier automatically m On Default Automatically detects the carrier for every frame The error from the center frequency is shown on the Freq Error side key m Off Sets the carrier frequency using Frequency Offset described below Frequency Offset Sets the carrier frequency when Off is selected in Auto Carrier Enter the carrier offset from the center frequency Range 30 to 30 MHz Threshold Sets the threshold level above which the input signal is determined to be a burst in time domain The burst detected first is used for the measure ment Range 100 0 to 0 0 dB Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum p NEL N ee
33. For file operations refer to page 3 251 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 115 Time Analysis Time Mode Meas Setup Menu 3 116 The Meas Setup menu for the pulse measurements contains the following controls Analyze Starts analysis on acquired data in the analysis range Detection Threshold Sets the threshold level to detect pulses in acquired data This level is shown with a green arrow in the subview see Figure 3 85 Range 100 to 0 dBc default 3 dBc Channel Bandwidth For the Channel Power measurement only Sets the measurement frequency range Range Bin bandwidth x 8 to set span Refer to Trace Compression on page 3 200 for the bin bandwidth OBW Power Ratio For the OBW measurement only Specifies the power ratio of the carrier and span regions for calculating OBW Range 80 to 99 9 default 99 as defined in T 53 or IS 95 standard EBW Meas Level For the EBW measurement only Specifies how far down from the peak level the bandwidth is measured Range 100 to 1 dB default 30 dB Counter Resolution For the Frequency Deviation measurement only Sets the frequency counter resolution It is the same as in the Carrier Frequency measurement in the S A mode refer to page 3 10 Range 1 mHz to 1 MHz in a tenfold sequence default 1 Hz P P Phase Time Offset For the Pulse Pulse Phase measurement only Sets the time offset for the measurement point The default value is 0 zero second the measur
34. OBW Power Ratio EBW Meas Level Counter Resolution P P Phase Time Offset Measurement Filter Filter Bandwidth for Gaussian filter Filter Parameter for Gaussian filter Frequency Recovery Frequency Offset None Gaussian 1st User Off Appendix A Menu Tree Mode Menu Mode m S A Spectrum Analyzer DPX Spectrum with Spectrogram Real Time S A Demod Real Time S A with Zoom lt Standard Analog Demod j Digital Demod Option 21 only M Audio Measurements Option 10 only Standard Transient CCDF Pulse Measurements Signal Source Analysis Option 21 only For details about the Standard menu refer to the optional software user manual Markers Menu Select Marker 1 2 Marker X Position Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X S A Mode DM 5 elected Marker Center Freq Marker Freq Step Size Marker X All Markers Off Assign Marker X to Trace 1 2 Demod and Time Modes except CCDF Analysis Time Marker Time S A Mode only Real Time S A with Zoom Mode Peak Search Freq Threshold Center Freq Marker Freq Analysis Uime i Demod and Time Transient Modes onl Center Zoom Marker Fre ll l y i Peak Search Hor Threshold Reference Cursor to Trigger Reference Cursor to Trigger Output Time CCDF Mode only Peak Search Hor Th
35. Option 21 Only View Scale Menu 3 224 The noisogram provides a three dimensional representation of time varying phase noise It indicates frequency along the horizontal axis frame number along the vertical axis like a spectrogram and C N by using color This view is used as the subview in the signal source analysis refer to page 3 119 The Scale menu for the Noisogram contains the following controls see Figure 3 156 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the color axis automatically to fit the noisogram to the screen Horizontal Stop Sets the maximum value right edge of the horizontal axis Range Horizontal Start x2 to Span 2 Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Range The minimum offset frequency of the analyzed data to Horizontal Stop 2 Vertical Size Sets the range of the vertical axis Range 40 to 40960 frames Vertical Start Sets the start frame number for the vertical axis Range the number of frames in the analysis range to 0 Zero 0 represents the latest frame Color Scale Sets the scale value subtracting the minimum power value from the maximum power value of the color axis The level is represented in 100 steps 100 colors from the minimum value blue to the maximum value red in the default state Range 10 to 100 dB in a 1 2 5 sequence Color Stop Sets the maximum value top of the color axis Range 70 Color Scale to 70
36. Table 3 4 Features of the real time mode Item Normal spectrum analysis Real time mode Span Up to 3 GHz arbitrary value can be set Up to 36 MHz 1 2 5 sequence Trigger Only the Repeat menu item available All the Trigger menu items available RBW FFT FFT points 64 to 8192 powers of 2 FFT points 1024 fixed RBW 1 Hz to 10 MHz RBW No RBW process FFT overlap capability No acquisition and analysis parameters Acquisition Length and Spectrum Offset can be set Basic Procedure The following steps show the basic procedure for real time spectrum analysis with spectrogram Timing 1 Press the S A key on the front panel 2 Press the Real Time S A side key The spectrum is displayed concurrently with the spectrogram 3 Display the spectrum waveform of the measurement signal NOTE For details on setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 For details on setting trigger refer to Trigger on page 3 163 a Setthe frequency by pressing the Frequency Channel key on the front panel b Setthe span by pressing the Span key on the front panel Table 3 5 shows the span setting range c Setthe amplitude by pressing the Amplitude key on the front panel d Setthe trigger by pressing the Trig key on the front panel Table 3 5 Span setting range in the real time mode Measurement band Setting range Baseband DC to 40 MHz 100 Hz to
37. Tutorial Applying the Power 1 Apply power to the signal generator 2 Turn on the principal power switch PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on the rear panel as shown in Figure 2 27 The orange LED on the front panel lights Principal power switch Figure 2 27 Principal power switch rear panel 3 Turn on the power switch On Standby on the front panel as shown in Figure 2 28 NINA Power switch LED Figure 2 28 Power switch On Standby RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 31 Tutorial The initial screen shown in Figure 2 29 appears after Windows XP starts up the background color is in white in this manual to make figures more viewable Tekironix RSA 3408B MEASURE Frequency 1 5 GHz Span 36 MHz Input Att 15 dB RBW 100 kHz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off Cancel Back Channel Power 0 dBm 10 dB 100 dem Center 1 5 GHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 2 29 Initial screen Pret PPM ayaa AE Pe Pots v t e ACPR C N Carrier Frequency EBW Span 36 MHz Measurement Off Restoring Default Settings analyzer saves the settings when it is turned off When you turn on the analyzer it starts with the se
38. Vertical Scale S This view is displayed in the PDF Probability Distribution Function measure ment in the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 65 The horizontal axis represents power level relative to the mean value at the center and the vertical axis represents occurrence probability The Scale menu for the PDF view contains the following controls see Figure 3 155 Auto Scale Sets the starting value and the scale of the vertical axis automatical ly to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis NOTE By default the horizontal axis is displayed in the range of 12 dB If the amplitude exceeds 12 dB the horizontal axis will be set automatically to fit the waveform to the screen Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Full Scale Sets the scale of the horizontal and vertical axes to each full scale value You can change the scale of the horizontal and vertical axes within these full scale values Marker 4 dB 286 907 m 5 Ref Data 500 0 h Start 12 dB Stop 12 dB A Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 155 Setting the scale in PDF view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 223 Setting Views Noisogram View Setting
39. 3 99 Time domain view setting 3 210 Time variation measurement 3 100 basic procedure 3 100 Trace comparison 3 191 displaying 3 196 menu 3 192 saving loading 3 200 Trigger 3 163 creating a mask 3 171 level 3 167 menu 3 164 Index 6 mode 3 165 position 3 166 save on trigger 3 170 slope 3 168 source 3 166 synchronous operation 3 178 trigger output indicating 3 177 trigger point indicator 3 177 Triggered trigger mode 3 165 Troubleshooting 1 21 Tutorial 2 29 U UNCAL 1 14 Unpacking 1 11 USB connectors side panel 2 7 USB flash drive using Option 06 D 1 User filter file format 3 280 menu 3 51 V Vector mode span 3 142 Vector span 3 142 Version displaying 2 26 output connector side panel 2 7 Video filter RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 83 View menu 3 204 setting 3 203 W Windows XP using 2 27 Z Zoom Acquisition Analysis menu 3 27 function 3 27 setting a zoomed area 3 28 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual
40. DSC Double Subcarrier Manual ASK DSB ASK SSB ASK 1 Default values are shown It can be set from 1 bps to 51 2 Mbps bit rate or from 1 ns to 1 s Tari NOTE The standard types of COG1 and C1G1 disable the constellation measurement Tari is the reference time interval for a data O in Interrogator to Tag signaling defined in ISO IEC 18000 6 Part A specification an abbreviation for Type A Reference Interval The period of the NRZ L decoding format 2 4 and 8 periods indicate the number of subcarrier cycles per symbol NOTE This instrument does not support one period NRZ L 3 86 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode The M values M 2 4 and 8 of the Miller decoding format indicate the number of subcarrier cycles per symbol Refer to the ISO IEC and EPCglobal documents listed in Compatible Standards on page 3 77 for details on the encoding decod ing formats except the modified Miller code illustrated in Figure 3 67 Figure 3 67 Modified Miller code Link Selects whether to measure Interrogator to Tag signaling or Tag to Interrogator signaling Interrogator Detects the interrogator preamble from a measurement signal and decodes the signal with the interrogator decoding format m Tag Detects the tag preamble from a measurement signal and decodes the signal with the tag decoding format Modulation Type Selects the modulation type Refer to Table 3 17 De
41. Demod Mode Measurement result Peak Peak m Peak to Peak phase Peak m Positive peak phase Peak m Negative peak phase BMS RMS peak phase 61 875 deg 35 082 deg 26 793 deg 13 084 deg Press Measure Show Measurements to display the measurement results Figure 3 41 PM demod measurement main view Marker 4 949121094 ms 19 84 de 250 deg 50 deg 250 deg Start 5 ms Scale 16 Lis Main view Phase deviation versus Time Outside of 180 is shaded Adjust the scale by pressing Scale Lines gt View Scale You can display the measurement results in the analysis range on the left side of the main view see Figure 3 41 by pressing Measure gt Show Measurements You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing System gt Instrument Setup gt Angular Units IQ versus Time Measurement indicated in yellow and green respectively IQ versus Time measures I and level over time Figure 3 42 shows an example The main view shows the I Q voltage versus time graph I and are The IO level measurement has no Meas Setup menu items Figure 3 42 IQ versus time measurement main view 3 46 Start 150 us Main view I Q voltage versus Time Q are indicated in yellow and green respectively Scale 8 us RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Pulse Spectrum Measur
42. Hz 0 Delete Point Deletes a line Add New Point 4 Add New Point Deletes all data in the table Done Editing Table Done Editing Table Registers the input values and adds a line Clear Table lt Clear Table Deletes all data in the table Figure 3 105 Amplitude correction data input RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual To modify input data Press the Select Point To Edit side key and turn the general purpose knob to move the cursor to the row to be modified Use the following side keys as needed m modify a frequency use the Frequency side key To modify an amplitude use the Amplitude side key W To delete a row press the Delete Point side key To delete all data in the table press the Clear Table side key Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed 3 153 Setting Amplitude 8 When you have finished the data input save the file as follows a Press the Amplitude key on the front panel b Press the Corrections side key c Press the Save Table side key to specify the save file Refer to page 3 251 for file handling For information about performing amplitude correction refer to page 3 156 3 154 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Amplitude Setting the Offset The amplitude correction function includes amplitude and frequency offset NOTE The amplitude offset is available in all the measurement modes of S A Demod and Time Amplitude Offset Subtracts th
43. It is important to set frequency and span as close to the measurement signal band as possible and finely adjust them The modulated signal will not be recognized unless frequency and span are set appropriately For information about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 a Setthe frequency by pressing the Frequency Channel key on the front panel b Setthe span by pressing the Span key on the front panel c Setthe amplitude by pressing the Amplitude key on the front panel 4 Setanalysis range by pressing the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel Refer to page 3 34 for details NOTE When the modulation type refer to page 3 49 is ASK FSK or GFSK the measurement requires at least 16 symbols in the analysis length refer to page 3 34 for setting the analysis length 5 Setthe measurement parameters by pressing the Meas Setup key on the front panel Refer to page 3 49 for the Meas Setup menu description If No Measurement Result or Waveform is Displayed on the Main View Unless the analyzer obtains valid data for the measurement neither the result nor waveform appears on the main view In this case try the following steps m Set the center frequency to the middle of the measurement signal bandwidth Set the span near the measurement signal bandwidth m Setthe data acquisition length Acquisition Analysis gt Acquisition Le
44. Press the View Select key to select the spectrogram view b Press the Marker Setup key c Press the Go to page 2 gt Marker X Vertical side key d Set the frame number by turning the general purpose knob or using the numeric keypad 7 To take a spectrum measurement press the Measure key on the front panel The measurement items and procedures are the same as in the normal spectrum analysis Refer to Spectrum Analysis on page 3 4 8 To change the display format press the Define key on the front panel The setting procedure is the same as in the normal spectrum analysis Refer to Spectrogram Display on page 3 21 NOTE In the real time mode you cannot turn on or off the spectrogram in the View Define menu RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 25 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Tektronix RSA 3408B TIMI Frequency 800 MHz Frame Length 6 4 ms Cancel Back Span 100 kHz Acquisition Input Att 20 dB Length s Acquisition Length Spectrum Length indicates the Sets the time length to acquire 0 time length to acquire one frame one block dBm E Spectrum Offset 10 Specifies the number of the dB frame to measure and display _ in the spectrum view 100 LI m P Anu pal Center 800 MERO Span 100 kHz Marker 800 MHz 32 832 dBm 62 6496 48 frame 87 ee _ _ _ 8 frame example The black line appears between
45. System menu System Menu The System menu sets system wide parameters such as the display brightness factory defaults and GPIB address Display Brightness Reset All to Factory Defaults Remote Setup Version and Installed Options Scroll Instrument Setup Option Key Change Option Key Angular Units Phase Degrees Radians Digital IQ Output On Off The System menu contains the following controls Display Brightness Adjusts the brightness of display Setting range 0 to 100 Reset All to Factory Defaults Sets all parameters for all measurements and modes to the default values Remote Setup Sets GPIB parameters Refer to the RSA3000B Series Program mer Manual for details Versions and Installed Options Displays the current versions of all standard and optional software and any third party software licenses Refer to page 2 26 for information about displaying versions and installed options Instrument Setup Sets the fundamental parameters for measurements m Angular Units Selects degree default or radian for the angular unit m Digital IQ Output Option 05 Only Turns on or off the digital IO output from the rear panel connectors RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 25 Functional Overview Displaying Versions and You can see the system versions and installed options For information on Installed Options options for the analyzer refer to Appendix Options
46. T 10 cb he vi an Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Figure 2 49 Channel power measurement Channel Bandwidth 40 kHz Measuring Carrier Carrier frequency can be measured accurately using the counter function Frequenc 4 y 1 Press the Measure key on the front panel 2 Press the Carrier Frequency side key The measurement result is displayed at the bottom of the screen see Figure 2 50 BAM dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Carrier frequency measurement result Frequency 99 999 997 MHz measured accurately with counter function Measurement Off Spectrum Analyzer Carrier Frequency Figure 2 50 Carrier frequency measurement 2 52 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Modulation Analysis This section describes how to analyze a modulated signal Settings are the same as those in the previous section center frequency of 100 MEZ span of 20 kHz and amplitude of 0 dBm Selecting Analysis Mode The analyzer functions are classified into three functional groups selected using the Mode keys Mode Mode keys Select the analysis mode SIA Demod Time m Spectrum analysis Mode S A Performs general spectrum analysis All operations in the tutorial up to this point have been performed in this mode m Modulation analysis Mode Demod Performs analog and digital optional modulation analyses m Time analysis Mode Time Perfo
47. TableA TableB TableC 1 DPX spectrum only The file extension is automatically added according to the file type NOTE The preset files are always saved in the My Documents folder on the C drive even if you select another folder a Save to TraceA ST Saves data to the preset file trace file in this example Save to TraceC J Figure 3 178 Save to the preset file lower right of the screen RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations 4 To enter a new file name a Press the Folder side key to select the destination folder using the following menu items see Figure 3 179 m Open Folder opens the selected folder m Select Folder selects a folder m Close Folder closes the selected folder m Done accepts the selected file Tektronix RSA 3408B 2 PAUSE Folder Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 50kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Folder My Computer 29 344 Floppy A Egg C 1 3 My Documents My Pictures Program Files 3 Windows D Figure 3 179 Selecting the folder RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Select Folder F i Close Folder Done Open Folder Opens the selected folder Select Folder Selects a folder using the knob Open Folder Closes the selected folder Done Accepts the selected folder After selecting the folder press the Done side key to accept it The li
48. The range is indicated by green lines 1 2 Acquisition History Press the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel Set the time length to acquire one block by pressing the Acquisition Length side key Suppose that one block contains N frames the acquisition length is calculated with this equation One block acquisition length N x One frame acquisition length One frame acquisition length is determined by span and indicated on the Spectrum Length side key For data acquired in the continuous mode Specify the number of the block to be analyzed by pressing the Acquisition History side key 0 zero represents the latest block Specify the time length of analysis range by pressing the Analysis Length side key Specify the start point of the analysis range by pressing the Analysis Offset side key Analysis Offset Y Analysis Length Overview Start 51 2 ms Scale 5 12 ms div Acquisition Length Figure 3 32 Analysis range setting in the overview 3 34 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Specifying Origin of Analysis Range Using the Marker You can also use the marker 0 in place of the Analysis Offset side key to specify the origin of analysis range Do the following steps in place of step 5 on the previous page l Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel see Figure 3 33 2 Press the Markers side key to sel
49. dB 100 dBm Timing 7 J The analysis range specified with the marker and the reference cursor Figure 3 34 Specifying the range with the marker and the reference cursor 3 36 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Specifying Analysis Range Using a Mouse You can use a USB mouse in place of the Analysis Length and the Analysis Offset side keys to set the analysis range Perform the following steps in place of steps 4 and 5 on page 3 34 For connecting the mouse refer to page 2 7 1 Click on the overview to select it 2 Move the mouse pointer to the measurement start point and then left click to put the marker on it See Figure 3 35 3 Right click to display the reference cursor 4 Move the mouse pointer to the measurement end point and then left click to put the marker on it 5 Press the Marker key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The green line resizes to the specified range Overview 1 R 20 38125 ms 9 675 dB 0 dem 1 Setthe start point 10 Left click to put the marker and dB right click to display the reference cursor 2 Setthe end point 100 Left click to put the marker dem Timing 77 3 Setthe analysis range Press Marker Analysis Time Marker Time Figure 3 35 Specifying the analysis range using the mouse RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual
50. ly to size the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Start Available when the vertical axis represents EVM Sets the minimum value bottom of the vertical axis Vertical Offset Available when the vertical axis represents magnitude or phase error Sets the center value maximum minimum 2 of the vertical axis Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value Vertical axis magnitude or phase error An example of magnitude error below 100 100 Vertical 10 Vertical 20 ee rti Scale Scale onca Offset 100 c bee gt EWtliens cake 945125 psf Stat 1 080825 ms Scale 88 75 ps a lt Horizontal Scale Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Figure 3 147 Setting the scale in EVM view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 215 Setting Views Measurement Content Selects one of the following formats for view see Figure 3 148 m EVM Displays changes of EVM Error Vector Magnitude in time series m Mag Error Displays changes of magnitude error in time series m Phase Error Displays changes of phase error in time series
51. the general purpose knob d After selecting the file press the Load File Now side key See Figure 3 182 The data is loaded from the specified file Tekironix RSA 3408B 9 02 PAUSE Load From File quu ee Frequency 200 MHz RBW SO kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal z Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Select File ie Select File Rlename sSie Tme Selects a file using the knob e Trace TRC 57KB TRC File 03 08 20 12 50 TraceB TRC 57KB TRC File 03 08 20 12 50 Load File Now Load File Now is Tracet TRC ML d Loads the data from the specified file Folder C NMy lt Folder Documents Shows the selected directory C My Documents here Figure 3 182 Load from File menu 3 260 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations Displaying the File Name on the Load Data Side Key RFID analysis Option 21 and WLAN analysis Option 29 only In the RFID and WLAN analyses when you load an iqt file the file name appears on the Load Data side key Because of the limitation of display area if the number of characters exceed the limit only the part within the allowable range will be displayed with line feed inserted at space if any see Figure 3 183 File name Example iqt Load Data Displayed normally Example iqt File name Exam
52. 0594205 0 0 0 0 0984502 0 0 623332 0 0 0405144 0 0 0062255 0 0 143898 0 0 455249 0 0 0194761 0 0 0136498 0 0 174718 0 0 286147 0 0 0 0 0209294 0 0 181776 0 0 130455 0 0 0151973 0 0 0263419 0 0 157502 0 0 0 0 0246357 0 0 0280807 0 0 0971877 0 0 0971877 0 0 0280807 0 0 0246357 0 0 0 0 157502 0 0 0263419 0 0 0151973 0 0 130455 0 0 181776 0 0 0209294 0 0 0 0 286147 0 0 174718 0 0 0136498 0 0 0194761 0 0 455249 0 0 143898 0 0 0062255 0 0 0405144 0 0 623332 0 0 0984502 0 0 0 0 0594205 0 0 774975 0 0 047715 0 0 0720253 0 0 895591 0 0 0 0 0743803 0 0 973215 0 0 0383599 0 0 063548 0 1 0 0 063548 0 Gaussian BT 0 5 Row 1 to 18 Row 19 to 36 Row 37 to 54 Row 55 to 68 Rate 0 00191127 0 0 978572 0 0 000401796 0 8 0 00390625 0 0 917004 0 0 000172633 0 Filterl FilterQ 0 00764509 0 0 822878 0 7 10E 05 0 2 33E 10 0 0 0143282 0 0 707107 0 2 80E 05 0 9 11E 10 0 0 0257149 0 0 581862 0 1 06E 05 0 3 42E 09 0 0 0441942 0 0 458502 0 3 81E 06 0 1 23E 08 0 0 0727328 0 0 345977 0 1 32E 06 0 4 21E 08 0 0 114626 0 0 25 0 4 37E 07 0 1 39E 07 0 0 172989 0 0 172989 0 1 39E 07 0 4 37E 07 0 0 25 0 0 114626 0 4 21E 08 0 1 32E 06 0 0 345977 0 0 0727328 0 1 23E 08 0 3 81E 06 0 0 458502 0 0 0441942 0 3 42E 09 0 1 06E 05 0 0 581862 0 0 0257149 0 9 11E 10 0 2 80E 05 0 0 707107 0 0 0143282 0 2 33E 10 0 7 10E 05 0 0 822878 0 0 00764509 0 0 000172633 0 0 917004 0 0 00390625 0 0 000401796 0 0 978572 0 0 00191127 0 0 000895512 0 1 0 0 000
53. 128000 points Gaussian Line Off on 100 Display 9 _ Reference Line urve green ai Store Reference Line decade Gaussian line blue Reset MSN Measurement CCDF Auto Scaling On Off Vertical line at the crest factor CCDF Scale 1e 005 N dB Start 0 dB Scale 2dB Stop 15dB 15 Peak 23 59 dBm 10 9 3 88 dB Ween Average 32 35 dBm 35 8 96 1 96 7 07 dB dBm Crest Factor 9 75 dB 0 1 8 50 dB 150 001 9 25 dB 0 001 9 72 dB 0 0001 9 74 dB Measurement results CCDF values in Peak amplitude the CCDF curve Average amplitude Crest factor Figure 3 79 CCDF single view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 107 Time Analysis Time Mode Changing the View You can change the contents of the views by pressing the View Define key with the following controls Show Views Selects the view style m Single Displays only the view selected by the View Select key m Multi Displays the overview the subview and the main view Overview Content Selects the content of the overview Spectrogram m Waveform power versus time Refer to page 3 203 for information about setting the view scale and format Figure 3 80 shows an example of the CCDF multi view Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum Te Frequ
54. 3 Select a measurement item by pressing the side key For example press the Carrier side key to perform the carrier measurement 4 Adjust the amplitude and frequency to display the measurement waveform Refer to page 3 135 for setting frequency and span Refer to page 3 143 for setting amplitude 5 Setthe analysis range in the overview This is not necessary in the spurious and ACPR measurements Refer to page 3 34 for details of the analysis range settings If you use the zoom function do these steps m Press the View Define key m Press the Overview Content side key and select Zoom Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 27 for setting the analysis area on the spectrogram with the zoom function RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 79 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 80 Carrier Measurement 6 Press the Meas Setup key and set the measurement parameters Refer to Meas Setup Menu in each measurement description 7 Press the Analyze side key and carry out the analysis It is not necessary in the spurious and ACPR measurements Measures the carrier frequency OBW Occupied Bandwidth EBW Emission Bandwidth and the maximum EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu of the carrier measurement Analyze Perform measurements for acquired data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analy
55. 3 197 Backing up user files 1 22 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Bin relation between frame bin and pixel 3 200 Block diagram 1 7 Bluetooth 3 49 Brightness adjusting 1 28 uneven 1 21 C C N measurement 3 7 C4FM 3 49 Cal menu 1 24 Calibration 1 23 Carrier frequency measurement 3 10 Carrier measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 80 Carrier tracking Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 125 Caution RF INPUT 1 14 CCDF Demod mode 3 64 Time mode 3 104 view setting 3 212 Center offset calibration 1 26 Changing overview 3 38 subview 3 38 Channel power measurement 3 5 Channel table using 3 138 Cleaning F 1 Compression trace data 3 200 Constellation measurement 3 56 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 96 view setting 3 213 Continuous trigger 3 165 Conventions xxiii Copy screen 3 283 Correction amplitude description 3 148 menu 3 149 CPM Modulation Type 3 49 symbol value 3 219 CSV file format 3 278 Index 1 Index D DC offset calibration 1 27 Decoding format RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 87 Default settings restoring 2 24 Demod mode 3 31 Digital IO output Option 05 pin assignment C 1 rear panel connectors 2 5 turning on or off 2 25 Digital modulation analysis 3 48 basic procedure 3 55 symbol mapping B 1 Display dead pixel 1 21 Display line 3 227 multi display lines Real Time S A only 3 231 operation 3 228 Documentation list xxii
56. 40 MHz 1 2 5 sequence RF 40 MHz to 8 GHz 100 Hz to 20 MHz 1 2 5 sequence and 36 MHz 3 24 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 4 Press the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel and then the Acquisition Length side key to set the time length to acquire one block Suppose that one block contains N frames the acquisition length is calculated with this equation One block acquisition length N x One frame acquisition length Where N 1 to 16000 standard or 64000 Option 02 One frame acquisition length is determined by span internally and shown with Spectrum Length in the setup display area see Figure 3 25 For the details refer to Specifications in the RSA3408B Technical Reference Waveform data is acquired and displayed on the basis of blocks For details about the time parameters refer to page 3 157 5 When you have acquired the measurement data stop the data acquisition If the analyzer is in the continuous acquisition mode press Run Stop 6 Press the Spectrum Offset side key and set the number of the frame to measure and display in the spectrum view upper view by turning the general purpose knob or using the numeric keypad Serial numbers are given to each frame regardless of the block size with Zero representing the latest frame The selected frame is indicated by the marker on the spectrogram see Figure 3 25 Alternatively the frame number can be set as follows a
57. 8192 points 7 u 100 Spectrum Offset dBm 100 s pre dm i Start 256 ms Scale 25 6 ms Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz ERES Analysis Length 5 100 32m mm Analysis Offset 5 20 24m Sf 100 Start 232 ms Scale 3 2 ms Analog Demod AM Demod Acquisition Length ms 256 Figure 2 54 Changing the acquisition length Displaying Single View Although three views are normally displayed in the Demod mode you can select and Changing Scale one view to display full screen This section describes how to display one view and change the vertical and horizontal scales using the View keys 1 Press the Run Stop key to stop data acquision and observe the waveform 2 Press the View Select key to select the main view The selected view is surrounded with a white frame keys Control the scale and format of views Scale RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 57 Tutorial 3 Press the Define key and then the Show Views side key shown in Fig ure 2 55 to select Single Only the main view is displayed with the size enlarged on the screen Tekironix RSA 3408B 20 02 PAUSE VIEW DEFINE a ee GT eee SSS SS Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 256 ms Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Show Views Input Att 15dB Show Views Singe Mult Select Single to show only the 100 Overview selected view with the size enlarged 96 Content Waveform TI
58. 9 1 0G Amplitude is expressed as a decimal number or integer such as 1 23 or 10 Do not use a space in a numeric value however you can space before and after Correct 10M 10 A space is inserted before and after Incorrect 10 M 10 A space is inserted between 10 and M 3 151 Setting Amplitude 3 152 Creating an Amplitude Correction File on a Computer Use word processing software on a computer to create a text file with the extension cor Be sure to use the correct file format refer to File Format on page 3 150 and follow the Rules for Creating an Amplitude Correction File on page 3 151 For information about performing amplitude correction refer to page 3 156 Creating Correction Data on the Analyzer Screen The procedure for entering new correction data or modifying existing data on the screen is as follows Refer also to Rules for Creating an Amplitude Correction File on page 3 151 1 Press the Amplitude key on the front panel 2 Press the Corrections side key 3 To edit an existing file Refer to page 3 251 for file handling a Press the Load Table side key to load the file b Press the Edit Table side key 4 To enter new data See Figure 3 105 a Press the Frequency side key and enter the frequency of a correction point b Press the Amplitude side key and enter the amplitude correction value at the correction point c Press the Add New Point side k
59. A gt DPX Spectrum 2 Press Trace Avg gt Select Trace to select 1 Trace 1 3 Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select the type of Trace 1 Trace 1 defaults to Bitmap m Bitmap Displays the density of acquired data The number of data points acquired at each pixel is indicated by color Pressing the Reset Bitmap side key restarts the process 3 18 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode m Peak Displays the maximum amplitude acquired at each frequency in each screen update m MaxHold Holds the maximum amplitude at each frequency Pressing the Reset MaxHold side key restarts the process m Peak Displays the minimum amplitude acquired at each frequency in each screen update MinHold Holds the minimum amplitude at each frequency Pressing the Reset MinHold side key restarts the process m Average Computes the average amplitude of the spectrum points within each frequency bin to create a trace for each screen update and then average the traces with the number set in the Number Of Averages side key to display Pressing the Reset Average side key restarts the process Refer to Trace Comparison Display and Average Function on page 3 191 for the details 4 Press Select Trace to select 2 Trace 2 5 Press the Trace 2 Type side key and select the type of Trace 2 The selections are the same as Trace 1 Trace 2 defaults to 4 Peak 6 Setthe scale as needed by pressing Scale Lines Vi
60. Demod Mode Overview Spectrogram In the RFID analysis Option 21 refer to page 3 77 you can also select Zoom spectrogram with zoom function for the overview Digital modulation analysis Option 21 only Press the Subview Content side key and select a view The subview content depends on measurement Refer to each measurement description Subview Eye diagram PAUSE LL View Define menu mum cmcc d c m i quu e UR EU u E Frequency Acquisition Cancel Back Span Show Views Input Att Marker 1 668 75ms Y Single mem 15 Overview Content lt Overview Content Spectrogram Selects an overview display 300 Subview m Content lt Subview Content Eye Diagram Selects a subview display 100 dem 15 frame Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz 05 95 238095 us FreqErr 51 855 Hz Marker wo ms Origin Offset 40 59 dB 15 Scale 31 952 mY Unit 15 2 061 Menu Off Digital Demod Constellation Figure 3 37 Changing the overview and subview RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 39 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode One View Display Three views are displayed on screen by default To display one view perform the following steps l Press the View Define key on the front panel View Select key a Define View Define key 2 Select a view to make t
61. Digital Demod Option 21 Only Performs digital modulation analysis Refer to page 3 48 for details Audio Measurements Option 10 Only Performs audio analysis Refer to page 3 67 for details m Standard Performs modulation analysis according to a communication standard For details refer to the user manual included in each option as shown in Table 3 6 For RFID analysis refer to page 3 77 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 31 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 32 Table 3 6 Standard menu in the Demod mode Menu item W CDMA UL 3GPP R5 DL 3GPP R5 UL 3GPP R6 DL 3GPP R6 UL TD SCDMA GSM EDGE cdma2000 Fwd cdma2000 Rev 1xEV DO Fwd 1xEV DO Rev IEEE802 11a b g 802 11n nx1 802 11n MIMO 2x2 RFID Option Description W CDMA uplink analysis 3GPP Release 5 downlink analysis 3GPP Release 5 uplink analysis 3GPP Release 6 downlink analysis 3GPP Release 6 uplink analysis TD SCDMA analysis GSM EDGE analysis cdma2000 forward link analysis cdma2000 reverse link analysis cdma2000 1xEV DO forward link analysis cdma2000 1xEV DO reverse link analysis WLAN 802 11a b g analysis WLAN 802 11n nx1 analysis WLAN 802 11n MIMO 2x2 analysis RFID analysis RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Measurement Screen Layout The following three views are displayed on screen by default in the Demod mode see Figure 3 31 Overview Displays all data in one acquisition block The Timing fi
62. Display Screen 2 ee sp Rb Le essen Functional Overview 555 Menu Keys coke Menu Operations s noi a T na DEN eub Sa Measurement Basies i4 AR ue a tee Setting System Parameters Usine Windows XP nl A e Ett ert tee eate dd RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual XV xvii xvii xxi xxi xxii xxiii PRR NNNRR RR SI WDR N em d stu a t ER 1 N b2 b2 b2 P2 N i P Ro b3 P3 Re NUNDA on E Table of Contents Reference dn a SCR IRE SCR RON ACA OCEAN Oy 2 29 Preparations zie ver qe iin 2 30 Displaying Spectrum e ehe er re Ra RR a 2 33 Using Markers and Peak 2 40 Using Averaging and Comparison 1 1 2 43 Displaying DPX Spectrum s rss o pai aaa ea eee ee ee eee 2 46 Displaying a Spectrogram 2 48 Spectrum Analysis ete e kh en 2 51 Modulation Analysis n 2 53 Turning Off the Power e 2 60 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 1 Measurement Screen Layout
63. For details on FFT and RBW refer to page 3 179 View Define Menu The View Define menu for the pulse measurements contains the following controls Show Views Selects a single view or multi view display m Single Displays only the view selected by the View Select key on the front panel m Multi Default Displays the overview subview and main view Overview Content Selects a view displayed in the overview m Waveform Power versus Time Spectrogram Refer to page 3 203 for information about setting views Select Measurement Selects a measurement item to display in the subview from the items selected in Displayed Measurement Select Pulse Selects a pulse to measure when you select A Single Pulse in View Results For described below 0 zero represents the most current pulse while larger negative numbers represent subsequent pulses NOTE The main view shows the measurement results for up to 1000 pulses the pulse number of 999 to 0 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 113 Time Analysis Time Mode View Results For Selects how to display the measurement results in the subview see Figure 3 83 m A Single Pulse Displays the measurement results for one pulse specified with Select Pulse m All Pulses Displays the measurement results for all pulses in the analysis range The horizontal axis represents the pulse number and the vertical axis represents the measurement results
64. Frame Sync or SOF 1 Null Interrogator Tag EOF 1 Im a ziolvo x oeo 15693 2 standard only Changing the View The view controls for the constellation eye diagram and symbol table are the same as the RF envelope measurement except for the Scroll Table side key Refer to page 3 95 3 98 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual SEE UR Time Analysis Time Mode This section describes how to perform measurements in the time analysis Time mode Mode SIA Measure menu r Transient gt Q versus Time CCDF Power versus Time Demod Pulse Measurements Frequency versus Time Signal Source Analysis gt CCDF Time Pulse Characteristics Phase Noise Spurious Real Time Phase Noise Real Time Spurious Frequency versus Time Figure 3 74 Time menu structure There are three items in the Time menu W Transient Performs time variation measurement Refer to page 3 100 for details CCDF Performs CCDF measurement Refer to page 3 104 for details m Pulse Measurements Performs pulse measurements Refer to page 3 109 for details m Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only Performs signal source analysis Refer to page 3 119 for details Measurement Screen Layout The measurement screen layout in the time analysis Time mode is the same as in the modulation analysis Demod mode Refer to Measurement Screen Layout on page 3 33 for the vie
65. FrameReverse in the file header Frame header Frame data D Frame header Frame data z Number indicated by ValidFrames Frame header Frame data Frame header Frame data J Figure 3 187 Data block Frame Header The frame header is defined by the following structure struct frameHeader st short reserved1 short validA short validP short validl short validO short bins short reserved2 short triggered short overLoad short lastFrame unsigned long ticks 5 Descriptions of the frame header items follow 3 270 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format short reserved1 Internal use only short validA validP validI validQ These parameters indicate whether data of amplitude phase I or O value converted into a two byte signed integer is written m Q Indicates that data is not written in the file m Indicates that data is written in the file There are seven combinations as listed in Table 3 42 Table 3 42 Combinations of valid A P I and Q validA short bins Shows the number of bins It is the same as Bins in the file header short reserved2 Internal use only short triggered Indicates whether the frame is before or after the trigger 0 Indicates that the frame is before the trigger pre trigger m 1 Indicates that the frame is after the trigger post trigger short overLoad Indicates whether an input overload occurred m 0 Indic
66. Gain If you want to perform all possible calibration operations together press the Calibrate side key When Auto Calibration is set to Yes they will be performed automatically any time the analyzer is in an uncal state NOTE When you run the calibration during signal acquisition the calibration starts after the acquisition is completed The gain calibration calibrates the analyzer s amplifier gain using the internal signal generator Run this internal calibration routine as required when you boot the analyzer or when UNCAL uncalibrated is displayed during operation Allow the analyzer to warm up for 20 minutes before you begin the calibration The warm up period allows electrical performance of the analyzer to stabilize During normal operation when the ambient temperature changes by more than 5 C from the temperature at the last calibration UNCAL is displayed in the yellow box at the top of the screen see Figure 1 20 If this happens run the gain calibration When UNCAL is displayed run the gain calibration UNCAL FREE RUN Frequency pan Input Att Figure 1 20 UNCAL display To run the gain calibration do the following 1 Press the CAL key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate Gain side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 25 Calibration Calibrating Center Offset When you di
67. Hertz AcquisitionBandwidth The acquisition bandwidth in Hertz Following the AcquisitionBandwidth are the data The data are pairs in Volts The acquisition data files saved in MatLab format contain the following MatLab variables InputCenter The center frequency in Hertz XDelta The sample period in seconds Y A complex array containing IO pairs InputZoom Always 1 and indicates complex data RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format Limit Mask File Format This section describes the limit mask file used in the spectrum emission mask measurement refer to page 3 14 in the S A mode The limit mask file contains the limit setting values for each zone in the CSV format The contents depends on the setting of Meas Setup Measurement Offset From Channel or Inband Spurious Figure 3 191 shows an example of settings for Zone A B and C Meas Setup Measurement is set to Offset From Channel Offset From Channel A Yes 750k 1 98M 30k Both Relative 0 0 45 45 Offset From Channel B Yes 1 98M 4M 30k Both Rel OR Abs 27 27 55 55 Offset From Channel C Yes 4M 20M 1M Both Absolute 36 36 0 0 Meas Setup gt Measurement is set to Inband Spurious Inband Spurious A Yes 1G 3G 1M Absolute 36 36 0 0 Inband Spurious B No 0 0 30k Absolute 0 0 0 0 Inband Spurious C No 0 0 30k Absolute 0 0 0 0 Figure 3 191 Limit mask file example One row consists of 11 fields Offset From Channel or 10 fields Inband Spur
68. Hz Auto Bit Rate ON Calculated Bit Rate 423 7499 kBit sec Calculated Symbol Rate 1 695 MSyrmj sec Measurement results refer to Table 3 19 Display Area setting refer to page 3 95 Marker 11 203125 ms 0 864 0 deg 2 Display Area 100 0 2 983 Marker 30 271875 ms 400 33 113 u 1 027 2 983 2 Display Area 100 0 Marker 0 sym jonooono 00110110 01101010 2 10101010 10100110 01100110 10011001 10100101 01101001 10010101 01010101 10101010 00100101 01010101 10010101 01100101 10011010 01011010 10011001 01011001 01010110 10011010 10101010 01100110 01100110 01010101 10010101 10010101 01011010 01100110 01010101 01010110 0110 50 u El Constellation Eye diagram Symbol table Figure 3 72 Constellation eye diagram and symbol table main view 3 96 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode The constellation eye diagram and symbol table are based on the digital modulation analysis function Refer to Digital Modulation Analysis on page 3 48 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the constellation eye diagram and symbol table is the same as the power on down measurement Refer to page 3 85 The measurement result display items depend on standards Meas Setup Standard Type as shown in Table 3 19 Table 3 19 Measureme
69. IQ output clock LVDS 50 EXT IQ CLK Table C 2 Q OUTPUT connector pin assignment Pin number Signal name Description 1 IQ ENABLE 10 output enable signal input Open IQ output disable Connect to GND IQ output enable 26 GND Ground 2 GND Ground 27 GND 3 Q output data bit 0 LVDS a 4 Q output data bit 1 LVDS a 5 Q output data bit 2 LVDS 6 Q output data bit 3 LVDS I 7 Ground 32 GND 8 Q output data bit 4 LVDS 9 Q output data bit 5 LVDS 10 Q output data bit 6 LVDS s 11 Q output data bit 7 LVDS RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual C 3 Appendix C Digital Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Table C 2 Q OUTPUT connector pin assignment Cont Pin number Signal name Description 12 GND Ground 13 Q output data bit 8 LVDS 14 Q output data bit 9 LVDS 15 Q output data bit 10 LVDS n 16 Q output data bit 11 LVDS 17 GND Ground 42 GND 18 Q output data bit 12 LVDS n 19 Q output data bit 13 LVDS 20 Q output data bit 14 LVDS T 21 Q output data bit 15 LVDS T 22 GND Ground T T 24 Not used T gt C 4 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix C Digital Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 Setup time Hold time 5ns 5ns gt gt Dat nex Clock EXT IQ CLK Figure C 2 Definition of the setup and hold time RSA3408B Analyzer User
70. IQData for an IQ data file Trace for a trace file Corr for a correction file Bitmap for a bitmap trace file RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations Load Menu Loads waveform data or instrument settings from a file Load State Loads the instrument settings Load Data Real Time S A Demod and Time modes only Loads waveform data IO data in the time domain NOTE The following menu items Load Trace 1 Load Trace 2 and Load Correction are available in the S A mode except Real Time S A Load Trace 1 Loads data for Trace 1 of a graph Load Trace 2 Loads data for Trace 2 of a graph Load Correction Loads a correction table of Frequency Amplitude pairs used for adjusting amplitude values Load SEM Limits Spectrum Emission Mask in the S A mode only Loads a limit mask Save Menu Saves waveform data or instrument settings to a file Save State Saves the instrument settings Save Data Real Time S A only Saves waveform data IO data in the time domain to a data file iqt Save Data Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes only Saves waveform data IO data in the time domain to a data file iqt Blocks Saves all the blocks Current Block Saves the block currently displayed Current Area Saves the data displayed in the main view Save Data CSV Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes only Saves waveform data IO data in the time domain to a file in the CSV Comma Se
71. MHz Span 36 MHz Figure 3 157 Display line This section provides these two topics m Display Line Operation Other than Real Time S A m Multi Display Lines Real Time S A Only RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 227 Display Line Display Line Operation Other than Real Time S A Controls the display line See Figure 3 158 for the Lines menu structure LE eb View Lines Show Line Horizontal Vertical ines E UI Number Of Line None 1 2 Number Of Line 1 I Line 1 Number Of Line 2 I Line 1 Line 2 Delta Step Size Figure 3 158 Lines menu structure other than Real Time S A Lines Menu The Lines menu in the S A mode other than the Real Time S A has the following controls Show Line Selects the display line to be controlled m Horizontal m Vertical Number Of Line Selects how many horizontal lines are displayed on the graph None Bg 2 Line 1 Sets the position of the first line Line 2 Sets the position of the second line Delta Sets the difference between the first line and the second Value of Line 2 Value of Line 1 3 228 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Display Line Horizontal Display Line 1 Press the Scale Lines key on the front panel and then press the View Lines side key 2 Press the Show Line side key to select Horizontal NOTE In the following steps use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad to m
72. MHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level Input Att O0 dB Trace 2 Off dBm Marker 100 MHz E 26 65 dBm 76 65 dBm Hz HX 30 Reference level Auto Level Atten Mixer Auto RFAtt Mixer ri o RF Att dB 0 10 Mixer Level dB dBm Nominal 15 Vertical Scale dB div parc VW YY NV 10 Vertical Units Brn dV 130 dem Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Corrections Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Ref Level dBm 30 Figure 1 17 Reference level setting and overrange indicator e Using the numeric keypad set the reference level back to 0 dBm Press 0 gt Enter in that order on the keypad 1 18 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation 6 Check the spectrogram display a Press the S A key on the front panel b Press the S A with Spectrogram side key Check that the spectrogram is displayed on the lower side of the screen see Figure 1 18 c Press the Run Stop key on the front panel to stop data acquisition Confirm that the trace display freezes and PAUSE is displayed in the status indicator at the top right of the screen Status indicator Tekironix RSA 3408B Frequency 100 MHz RBW 100 kHz Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Marker 100 MHz 21 06 dBm 71 06 dBm Hz 0 dem Center 100 MHz
73. Manual Setting Amplitude Linear or Logarithmic Log dB interpolation can be selected using the following menus Amplitude gt Corrections gt Interpolation gt Freq Interpolation Lin Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the frequency axis using a linear scale Log Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the frequency axis using a logarithmic scale Amplitude gt Corrections gt Interpolation gt Ampl Interpolation Lin Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the amplitude axis using a linear scale dB Linear interpolation of correction values is performed on the amplitude axis using a logarithmic scale Rules for Creating an Amplitude Correction File RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Create the file as a text file and save it with the extension cor The maximum number of input lines is 3000 The order of correction data input is unimportant because the file is sorted when it loads However it may be easier to follow if you enter data in the order of ascending frequency Numeric values are described without the unit of frequency or amplitude Hz dB W etc For example 5 MHz frequency is expressed as 5M Frequency can be expressed as a floating point number or with the SI unit k M or G For example the following lines show three different ways to express the same value 1000 1E 3 1k 1230000 1 23E 6 1 23M 1000000000 1 0E
74. Manual C 5 Appendix C Digital IO Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 C 6 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual m a E Appendix D Using the Removable Hard Disk Drive Option 06 Option 06 provides a removable hard disk drive user storable information including acquired signal data instrument settings screen images and calibra tion data is stored on the removable hard disk drive Remove the hard drive for storage or security Once the drive is removed from the analyzer no user data remains in the instrument Replace the hard drive using the following steps NOTE For an extra disk RSA34RHD refer to Optional Accessories on page G 3 Replacing the Hard Drive 1 CAUTION Turn off the analyzer before you replace the removable hard drive Use the steps in Figure D 1 on page D 2 to detach the removable hard drive To attach the hard drive reverse these steps Using the USB Flash Drive Option 06 also supplies a USB flash drive that includes the analyzer name serial number a copy of the factory calibration data and other information Follow these instructions for using the flash drive m Plug the USB flash drive into the USB connector on the analyzer side panel before turning on the analyzer Do not unplug the flash drive while operating the analyzer NOTE If you use a USB flash drive that includes a different serial number the error message UNCAL will be displayed in red on the scree
75. Measurement NOTE You must set the frequency and the span to display only the spectrum with the carrier you want to measure Measurement error will occur if other frequency components are displayed together Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the Carrier Frequency measurement contains the following control Counter Resolution Sets the counter resolution The measurement result is displayed on the bottom of the view with this resolution Range 1 mHz to 1 MHz in a tenfold sequence default 1 Hz Figure 3 11 shows an example of the carrier frequency measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B 2007 02 MEAS SETUP ee Je Frequency 2 GHz RBW 50 kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Counter Input Att 20 cB Trace 2 Off Resolution Hz 0 dBm 10 VIS proli Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz Carrier frequency gt Frequency 1 999 999 957 GHz measurement value Spectrum Analyzer Carrier Frequency Counter Resolution Hz Figure 3 11 Carrier frequency measurement EBW Measurement The frequency bandwidth between the maximum peak of the spectrum and the specified dB value is measured in EBW Emission Bandwidth 3 10 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the EBW measurement contains the following control Measurement Level Specifies how far down from the peak level the bandwidth is
76. Mode Figure 3 69 shows an example of the power on down measurements You can save the measurement table to a file csv by Save Save Table For file operations refer to page 3 251 Overview Zoom Subview Power vs Time 2 19 15 54 07 PAUSE MEAS SETUP mn Tr ng m Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 4 ml Caencel Back Span 10 MHz Input Att 15 dB Analyze NOTE The overview and subview ALR 238 125 kHz Marker 58 8828125 ms 11 415 dB 17 734 dBm Gef contents can be selected using the 224 ms 14 frame 0 Standard Type View Define menu Manual Link Sample rate Effective sample rate Modulation Refer to Interpolation Points 200 i m ASK on page 3 89 Center 1 GHz Span 500 kHz Start 80 4 ms Scale 2 88 ms Decoding E Sample Rate 640 k Hz Marker ag ms Format L Effective Sample Rate 32 MH 35 NRZ Measurement table gt Index Rize Fal Setting s Auto Bit Rate a Rise Fall time Settling time 2 8324 2 Of Overshoot Undershoot Off level Rise 2 9361 11 054 wj Bit Rate Bit Sec 40k Go to page 2 78 301563 ms of 2 21 71375 us RFID 18000 4 6 Power On Down Edge number selected by View Define gt Edge Figure 3 69 Power on down measurements Changing the View The contents of the view can be changed in the following item by pressing the View
77. Modulation depth m Modulation index m Frequency error m Bit rate or Tari RF envelope FSK pulse Constellation Eye diagram Symbol table Tag to Interrogator signaling response Interrogator to Tag signaling command Carrier Spurious Time ACPR Figure 3 63 RFID waveform and measurement items 3 78 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Figure 3 63 illustrates the measurement items with a typical RFID waveform The analyses are performed on the carrier in the Carrier Spurious and ACPR measurements on the transmission power on down in the Power On Down measurement and on the Interrogator to Tag or Tag to Interrogator signaling in the RF Envelope Constellation Eye Diagram and Symbol Table measurements Basic Procedure Use the following procedure to perform the RFID analysis NOTE If you use a signal input Input Signal Input Port other than RF the measurements are not guaranteed For Option 02 256 MB memory the acquisition length Acquisition Analysis gt Acquisition Length and the analysis length Acquisition Analysis gt Analysis Length are both up to 1 28 s at the maximum real time span 36 MHz The length of a burst is up to 20 ms A burst more than 20 ms is analyzed every 20 ms as one burst each The time length varies according to span settings 1 Press the Demod key on the front panel 2 Select Standard RFID using the side keys
78. Off side key The display returns to the spectrum view However the analysis mode is still in the Demod mode RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 59 Tutorial Turning Off the Power When you have completed the measurements turn off the power 1 Press the On Standby switch at the lower left of the front panel Windows XP runs the shutdown process and the power source goes to the standby state with the orange LED on 2 Turn off the signal generator You have now completed the tutorial 2 60 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Reference mIRC SSS SSS Spectrum Analysis S A Mode This section describes how to perform measurements in the spectrum analysis S A mode Mode Measure menu r Spectrum Analyzer _ gt Channel Power SIA DPX Spectrum ACPR m S A with Spectrogram C N Real Time SA OBW Real Time S A with Zoom Carrier Frequency Demod Standard EBW Spurious Time Spectrum Emission Mask 1 1 Available in Spectrum Analyzer and Real Time S A Figure 3 1 S A menu structure The S A menu has the following items m Spectrum Analyzer Performs general spectrum analysis Refer to page 3 4 for details m DPX Spectrum Performs analysis displaying the DPX Digital Phosphor spectrum view Refer to page 3 18 for details m S A with Spectrogram Performs spectrum analysis with spectrogram Refer to page 3 21 for details m Real Time
79. Option 21 only Spectrum Constellation EVM IQ Freq vs Time Symbol Table Eye Diagram AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF The content depends on the setting of Meas Setup Modulation Type RFID Measurements Option 21 only Spectrum Power vs Time Frequency vs Time Zoomed Spectrum RF Envelope Constellation Eye Diagram Symbol Table The content depends on the measurement item Signal Source Analysis Option 21 only Spectrum Noisogram C N vs Offset Freq Random Jitter vs Time Integrated Phase Noise vs Time C N vs Time The content depends on the measurement item 101 Select Pulse Pulse Width Peak Power On Off Ratio Pulse Ripple Repetition Interval Duty Cycle Pulse Pulse Phase View Results For Displayed Measurement Channel Power OBW EBW Frequency Deviation A 12 ced Time Range A Single Pulse All Pulses uidelines L OnJ Off Pulse Width Results Off Peak Power Results Off RFID Measurements Option 21 only On Off Ratio Results On Off Burst No Pulse Ripple Results On Off Envelope No Pulse Repetition Interval Results On Off Guidelines Duty Cycle Results On Off Pulse Pulse Phase Results On Off Lo Channel Powe
80. PDF xxii DPX spectrum average 3 193 displaying 3 18 marker operation 3 242 view setting 3 207 E EBW measurement 3 10 Ethernet connector side panel 2 6 EVM measurement 3 57 view setting 3 215 Extended Res 3 181 Eye diagram analysis 3 60 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 96 setting 3 219 F Features 1 1 FFT description 3 179 Extended Res 3 181 menu 3 180 overlap 3 183 points 3 184 window 3 185 File Bitmap trace file format 3 276 data file format 3 266 Index 2 entering a name 3 262 format 3 265 loading 3 254 operation 3 251 overwrite 3 258 saving 3 254 trace file format 3 274 type 3 251 Floppy disk drive side panel 2 6 using 3 254 FM signal measurement 3 44 Frame relation between frame bin and pixel 3 200 Free Run trigger mode 3 165 Frequency menu 3 136 setting 3 135 Frequency versus Time measurement 3 103 Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 133 Frequency Channel 3 136 FSK Modulation Type 3 49 note for measurements 3 55 FSK deviations measurement 3 66 Functional check 1 16 G Gain calibration 1 25 General purpose knob 2 3 GPIB rear panel connector 2 5 H Hard copy screen 3 283 Harmonics 3 73 Help menu 3 245 How to adjust center offset 1 26 DC offset 1 27 display brightness 1 28 gain 1 25 IF flatness 1 27 How to create amplitude correction files 3 151 directory 3 264 files 3 285 trigger mask 3 171 How to delete di
81. Relationships between frame and pixel There are three types of compression methods Max Min and Max Min see Figure 3 139 on page 3 202 Selecting Compression Max is the most commonly used compression method Max Min is used in the Method time domain waveform display in the DEMOD mode The compression method is always set to Max on the spectrogram view in three dimensional modes You can select the compression method using the following steps in S A mode 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 3 Press the Display Detection side key and select Max Min or Max Min NOTE Display Detection determines how to deal with data between spectrum display points The analyzer performs RMS detection using the linear A D converter regardless of the Display Detection setting RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 201 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Max Acquired data points gt Acquires the maximum value of data points corresponding to each pixel Pixel data on screen gt Min Acquired data points Acquires the minimum value of data points corresponding to each pixel Pixel data on screen Max Min Acquired data points gt Acquires the minimum and maximum values of data points corresponding to each pixel Pixel data on screen gt Figure 3 139 Compression method for displaying the waveform 3 202 RSA340
82. S A Performs real time spectrum analysis with spectrogram Refer to page 3 23 for details Real Time S A with Zoom Performs real time spectrum analysis with zoom function Refer to page 3 27 for details m Standard Performs spectrum analysis according to a communication standard For details refer to the user manual included in each option as shown in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Standard menu in the S A mode Menu item Option Description W CDMA UL W CDMA uplink analysis 3GPP R5 DL 3GPP Release 5 downlink analysis 3GPP R5 UL 3GPP Release 5 uplink analysis RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 1 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Measurement Screen Layout 3 2 Figure 3 2 shows the basic screen layout in the spectrum analysis S A mode The spectrum waveform and measurement results are displayed You can display the spectrum and the spectrogram at the same time Refer to Spectrogram Display on page 3 21 Tektronix RSA 3408B MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Channel Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Bandwidth Hz ak 0 Measurement dBm Filter Shape Nyquist Rolloff Ratio 10 Spectrum db 100 dem Center 100 MHz Een Span 20 kHz Measurement resut Channel Power 9 82 dBm Density 45 84 dBm Hz Spectrum Analyz amp amp Channel Power Channel Bandwidth kHz Measurement item Figu
83. Scale Measurement Content 1 Q Trellis Color Stop Eye Length Full Scale n Option 21 only S A Mode except Real Time S A Real Time S A Show Line Horizontal Vertical Spectrum view Number of Line None 1 2 Amplitude Line Off On Menu Off Amplitude Line Offset Amplitude Line Interval Number of Line 1 Frequency Line Off On Line 1 Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval Number of Line 2 View Lines Readout Off On p Spectrogram view Delta Time Line Off Time Line Offset Time Line Interval Frequency Line Off On Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval View Lines Readout Off On RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Display View Menu 2 of 2 S A Mode Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram Select Grid Style Off Fix Flex Spectrogram Off On Show Views Single Multi View Orientation Tall Wide Grid Style Off Fix Flex Real Time S A Show Views Single Multi View Orientation Tall Wide Demod and Time Modes Select r Show Views Single Multi Overview Content Define De Subview Content Modulation Type OQPSK Q Data Half Symbol Shift Pulse Measurements Select Measurement Spectrogram Waveform Zoom RFID Measurements only Digital Demod
84. Table 3 43 Limit mask file format 3 279 Table B 1 1 4 shift DQOPSK B 3 Table B 2 oo cece ccc creer cece eee eee nnn B 3 Table C 1 I OUTPUT connector pin assignment C 1 Table C 2 Q OUTPUT connector pin assignment C 3 Table F 1 External inspection checklist F 1 Table G 1 Power cord identification G 2 Table G 2 Standard accessories G 3 Table G 3 Optional accessories G 3 Table G 4 Accessories for optional software G 4 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual eee General Safety Summary Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures To Avoid Fire or Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and Personal Injury certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to t
85. Trace 1 2 Controls the selected trace On Turns on the selected trace m Freeze Freezes display of the selected trace m Off Turns off the selected trace Trace 1 2 Type Selects the type of processing for the selected trace This menu item appears when Trace 1 2 is set to On Table 3 32 Trace type Trace type Description Normal 1 Displays normal spectrum without averaging Average DPX spectrum Computes the average amplitude of the spectrum points within each frequency bin to create a trace for each screen update and then average the traces with the number set in the Number Of Averages side key to display Other than DPX spectrum Averages the traces with the number set in the Number Of Averages side key Max Hold Holds the maximum level at each frequency Pressing the Reset MaxHold side key restarts the process Min Hold Holds the minimum level at each frequency Pressing the Reset MinHold side key restarts the process Bitmap Displays the density of acquired data The number of data points acquired at each pixel is indicated by color Peak 2 Displays the maximum values acquired in each screen update Peak Displays the minimum values acquired in each screen update 1 Available in the S A mode except DPX spectrum 2 DPX spectrum only RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 193 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function 3 194 Number Of Averages Specifies how many traces are accumulated to create the avera
86. absence of an input signal Noise and zero pip are excluded Resolution Bandwidth RBW The width of the narrowest filter in the IF stages of a spectrum analyzer The RBW determines how well the analyzer can resolve or separate two or more closely spaced signal components Save Commit data to memory in application native format Secondary Marker The second marker displayed only in the Delta Marker mode Sensitivity Measure of a spectrum analyzer s ability to display minimum level signals expressed in volts or decibels Internal frequency IF bandwidth display mode and any other influencing factors must be given RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary Shape Factor Skirt Selectivity The ratio of the frequency separation of the two 60 dB 6 dB down points on the response curve to the static resolution bandwidth Single Sweep Operating mode in which the sweep generator must be reset for each sweep Especially useful for obtaining single examples of a signal spectrum Span Per Division Span Div Frequency difference represented by each major horizontal division of the graticule Spectrum The frequency domain representation of a signal wherein it is represented by displaying its frequency distribution Spectrum Analysis The technique or process of determining the frequency distribution of a signal Spectrum Analyzer A device for determining the frequency components of a signal Spectrum Length The amount
87. and Accessories 1 2 Tektronix RSA 3408B Span Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 50 kHz 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Press the System key on the front panel Press the Versions and Installed Options side key The screen appears as shown in Figure 2 24 Versions and Inst Cancel Back Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Scroll Scroll RSA3408B Real Time Spectrum Analvzer Copyright C Tektronix Japan Ltd All rights reserved Serial Number DINSOD1 Main System 0 05 000 Sub System 0 2 Option 03 05 06 21 24 System version Scroll the option list when there are Option Key 4 many options Option Key Change Option Key Version Description Option Key Change Option Allow you to use option if available 256 Mbyte Data Memory with Extended Trigger Present To check on the availability of option IQ Input Function Present contact your local Tektronix office Removable Hard Disk Driver 3 31550 Advanced Measurement Suite 331550 GSM EDGE MATLAB R C 1984 2006 The MathWorks Inc Python 2 0 8 Oct 16 2000 17 27 58 MSC 32 bit Inte on win32 Not Present Present Present x Figure 2 24 Displaying versions and options 2 26 The following information is shown on the screen Version m Main System Basic application software version Sub System Firmware version Option The table shows version and name of the option installed T
88. area on screen To recall the side menu press the key on the front panel When View Results For is A Single Pulse Select a pulse with Select Pulse Select a measurement item with Select Measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B PAUSE view DEFINE Frequency 1 5 GHz on Length 40 5 Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Show Views Input Att 25 dB Single Mult 0 1 Overview dem mW Content Waveform 10 Select dB 100 Measurement Peak Power 100 Select Pulse i dem Indicates the position of the pulse Deu Scale 0 10 selected with Select Pulse Start 20 ms Scale 2 ms 10 616406 ms 10 609609 ms PRI s Duty 96 550 862 62 488 6 0164 28 78 A Single Pulse 543 778 56 938 6 016 28 78 Displayed The measurement result highlighted 44 12 66 5040 6 016 28 78 Measurement in the main view is displayed in the 0544 175u 5155 70 3921 6 016 28 78 subview with the waveform 547 8391 4669 60 1821 5 93 28431 ange 548 438 42 84 59 344u 5 01601 28 78 a Adaptive 5435390 42 22 55 8791 6 01611 28 78 d S884 5415381 44 23 67 598 1 6 016 28 78 BI Y n Pulse index Select the displayed items with Displayed Measurement Figure 3 84 Setting the View Define menu You can save the measurement table to a file csv by Save Save Table
89. be set arbitrarily within the limits Figure 3 174 Online user manual Returns to the previous display Selects a character string with hyperlink Cancel Back View Front Panel Button Help View Online User Manual 4 To exit the help system press the Cancel Back top side key RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 247 Using the Online Help Using a Mouse and Keyboard You can control the help system using a mouse and a keyboard instead of the front panel keys Using a mouse click the topic in the contents window to show the description Using a keyboard select a topic or enter a search word see Figure 3 175 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor and the enter key to accept the selection Refer to Side Panel Interface on page 2 6 on connecting a USB mouse and keyboard to the analyzer B Locate Back Refresh Print Contents Search Type in the word s to search for List Topics Select lopic Enter a search word gt marrer with the keyboard UserManual Mark SA mode Zoom M UserManuial Trigg UserManual Mark UserManual 3GPP UserManual Using UserManual 3GFP Search previous resutts Match similar words Search titles only Found 8 Usi i Us ikon UserMan UserMan UserMan UserMan UserMan UserMan UserMan UserMan gm c r3 o Usin
90. considered to be the A tag can be incorporated in various objects or living beings The tag information is read by the radio wave from the Interroga tor also called Reader Writer and if necessary the data is written in the tag This instrument performs an analysis based on the ISO IEC and EPCglobal standards related to RFID Compatible Standards RFID analysis is based on the standards listed in Table 3 15 Table 3 15 Compatible RFID standards Standard ISO IEC 18000 4 ISO IEC 18000 6 ISO IEC 18000 7 ISO IEC 18092 ISO IEC 14443 2 ISO IEC 15693 2 EPCglobal C0G1 EPCglobal Gent Class0 C1G1 EPCglobal Gent Class Description Information technology Radio frequency identification for item management Part 4 Parameters for air interface communications at 2 45 GHz Mode 1 1 Information technology Radio frequency identification for item management Part 6 Parameters for air interface communications at 860 MHz to 960 MHz Type A Type B Information technology Radio frequency identification for item management Part 7 Parameters for active air interface communications at 433MHz Information technology Telecommunications and information exchange between systems Near Field Communication Interface and Protocol NFCIP 1 Identification cards Contactless integrated circuit s cards Proximity cards Part 2 Radio frequency power and signal interface Type A Type B Identificat
91. data point I and O data use 2 bytes This memory can store 16 000 frames for 1 waveform 1024 points of analysis and 64 000 frames for Option 02 For example W CDMA communication data can be captured for up to 2 5 seconds on standard and 10 seconds on Option 02 The memory is accessed from the system controller via the ISA PCI bridge DPX Processor In the DPX spectrum mode time domain data from the digital down converter Pixel Buffer Memory goes to the proprietary DPX processor that performs real time FFT over 50 000 times per second The spectrum traces are accumulated in the pixel buffer memory where a counter is incremented each time a trace writes to a point on the display A color is assigned to each display point based on the value of its counter Thus as acquisitions occur over time a color graded waveform the Bitmap develops on the display that shows the frequency of data occurrence signal density Windows Board PC system controller board has an Intel Celeron 1 2 GHz CPU It runs on Windows XP and controls menu operation from the front panel keys It is equipped with a 10 GB hard disk and 3 5 inch disk drive to store data and settings Waveforms menus and measurement results are shown on the color display which uses an 8 4 inch XGA TFT LCD module The standard analyzer has the following external interfaces m USB for a mouse keyboard printer and so on LAN Ethernet 10 100BASE T m GPIB VGA for an ext
92. domain data resulting after windowing process Frequency domain data Figure 3 133 outlines how frequency domain data is generated from time domain data The FFT window serves as a bandpass filter between time and frequency domain data The FFT frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy of each frequency component depends on the window shape Time gt Frequency Figure 3 133 Windowing process of time domain data Generally window frequency resolution is inversely proportional to the accuracy of measuring amplitude levels For ordinal measurements select the window capable of separating the desired frequency component Such a window maximizes the accuracy of measuring amplitude levels and minimizes leakage error while separating each frequency component RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual FFT and RBW Window Type To select the proper window first select the rectangular window then sequential ly switch to a window with less frequency resolution such as Hamming Hanning or Blackman Harris Use the last window that still passes the frequency component to be separated Suitable frequency resolution and amplitude accuracy are obtained by using the window immediately before the one from which the frequency component cannot be separated Consider the following characteristics when selecting a window for your purpose m Frequency resolution is improved by reducing the width of the main lobe window A
93. ent P Red 3 283 Printing Screen Copy eese hh hehe hen 3 284 Creating a File er eek oe nee n RR 3 285 Appendix A Menu Tree A 1 Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping B 1 Appendix C Digital IQ Output Connector Pin Assignment Option Od na 1 Appendix D Using the Removable Hard Disk Drive Option ec EE D 1 Replacing the Hard Drive ee D 1 Using the USB Flash Drive sesseeeeeeee III D 1 Appendix E Restoring the Instrument Operating System E 1 Restoring the Operating System from the Instrument Hard Disk E 1 Appendix F Inspection and Cleaning F 1 Inspecting the Exterior eh 1 Cleaning the Exterior nn ee ee pure ei RR ku ehe ale F 2 Eubricatiopizz u a ie Ea s E F 2 Cleaning the Interior vds e e ue RN ale F 2 Appendix Options and Accessories G 1 Sou MC Lm G 1 Standard Accessories G 3 Optional Accessories sosar a nn G 3 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Table of Contents List of Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 AC Input rear panel Figure 1 10 Principal power switch rear panel Concept of
94. gt End 100 Measurement results Carrier Frequency 2 000 000 003 GHz B Stop Carrier frequency Channel Power 11 366 dem Frequency Hz _ Channel power Integrated Phase Noise 0 15 deg RMS Averaged trace by the JM Integrated phase noise Random Jitter 01203 ps RMS Median filter yellow Max Pj Threshold Periodic Jitter 1 402 ps dB Random Jitter Maximum periodic jitter Signal Source Analysis Phase Noise 15 Figure 3 87 Phase noise measurement Selecting Trace 2 In the C N versus Offset frequency graph Trace 1 yellow represents a trace averaged by the Median filter and Trace 2 green represents a Max Min waveform by default You can change Trace 2 using the Trace Avg menu To change Trace 2 press the Trace Avg key and set the following items Trace 2 Selects Trace 2 m Max Min Default Shows the maximum and minimum C N values at alternate frequency points its advantage is its resemblance to an analog display m Reference When loaded as Trace 2 displays the waveform as the reference which has been saved using Save Trace 1 m Off Displays no waveform RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 123 Time Analysis Time Mode Load Trace 2 Loads the waveform that was saved using Save Trace 1 for Trace 2 as the reference Save Trace 1 Saves Trace 1 waveform data as a reference waveform Refer to page 3 251 for file operations Hints for Taking Measurements m Widening the spa
95. header the date and time for the last frame is not known The program therefore adds date and time data to the end of the file If you examine the file size and find the date and time at the end use them in place of DateTime in the file header Refer to DateTime on page 3 269 for the format of date and time The number of frames ValidFrames refer to page 3 269 is not known at the time the program creates the file header so the internal program temporarily writes ValidFrames 0 If the value of ValidFrames of the file header is 0 examine the file size and calculate the true value of ValidFrames In this case the correction data block the dummy header and the extended correction data block are always added The subsections below provide details on each block RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format File Header The following is an example of the file header Although Type is always written at the beginning the order of the other items is not fixed and some new items may be added 40416Type RSA3408BIOT FrameReverse Off FramePadding Before Band RF3 MemoryMode Zoom FFTPoints 1024 Bins 801 MaxInputLevel 0 LevelOffset 0 CenterFrequency 7 9G Frequency Offset 0 Span 5M BlockSize 40 ValidFrames 40 FramePeriod 160u UnitPeriod 160u FrameLength 160u DateTime 2005 01 10 13 21 16 GainOffset 82 33269 10626668 MultiFrames 1 MultiAddr 0 IOffsetz 0 0475921630859375 QOffset 0 12628173828125 The first character 4
96. indicates that the number of bytes of the file header is expressed with four characters after the second character In the preceding example Number of bytes of the file header 1 4 0416 421 The number of bytes is therefore 421 Data starts from the 422 byte Descriptions of the file header items follow RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 267 File Format Type Shows the type of data In the RSA3408B analyzer only this type is used m RSA3408BIQT The data block contains I and values in the time domain It is upward compatible with the file of the WCA300 series FrameReverse Shows the frame order This item is always Off in the RSA3408B analyzer The following parameters are provided m Off Frames are stored in the order of acquisition The last frame in the data block is the latest acquired frame m Frames are stored in the reverse order of acquisition The first frame in the data block is the latest acquired frame FramePadding The analyzer adds dummy frames when acquired frames do not fill BlockSize block size Figure 3 186 shows the dummy frames The FramePadding parameter is always set to Before in the RSA3408B analyzer m Before Adds dummy frames before valid frames but not in the first block m After Adds dummy frames after valid frames but not in the last block Before Valid frame After Valid frame Dummy frame Dummy frame Valid frame
97. jitter Integrated phase noise C N Vertical Offset Sets the center value maximum minimum 2 of the vertical axis Available when the vertical axis represents AM modulation factor FM frequency deviation PM phase deviation IO voltage Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views Vertical axis Power Random jitter Integrated phase noise or C N Power shown Vertical Stop 0 dem Vertical Scale u 100 dem Start 64 ms Scale 6 4 ms lt Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Vertical axis AM modulation factor FM frequency deviation PM phase deviation or IQ level AM modulation factor shown T 100 Vertical Scale 90 Vertical Offset 100 E Start 5 4 ms Scale 320 A lt Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 143 Setting the scale in time domain view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 211 Setting Views CCDF View Setting The CCDF view displays the CCDF measurement in the Digital Demod mode digital modulation analysis Option 21 only and the Time mode time analysis The horizontal axis indicates amplitude and the vertical axis logarithmic scale indicates CCDF Refer to page 3 104 for more information about the CCDF measurement View Scale Menu The Scale menu for the CCDF view contains the followin
98. measured see Figure 3 12 Range 100 to 1 dB default 30 dB Emission bandwidth Measurement Level Figure 3 12 EBW measurement band power markers Figure 3 13 shows an example of the EBW measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B 02 MEAS SETUP 7 Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 12 kHz Trace 1 Normal Measurement Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Level dB E Es 0 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 12 kHz Emission BandWidth 1 27199 kHz Level 30 dB Spectrum Analyzer Emission Bandwidth Measurement Level dB 30 Figure 3 13 EBW measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 11 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spurious Signal Measurement The spurious signal measurement detects up to 20 spurious signals and calculates the frequency difference and the amplitude ratio relative to the normal signal by setting the level conditions NOTE For detecting stationary spurious signals waveform averaging is effective for reducing noise Refer to page 3 191 for averaging Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the spurious signal measurement contains the following controls Signal Threshold Sets the threshold for detecting the standard signal see Figure 3 14 A signal with amplitude exceeding this threshold is regarded as a standard signal Range 100 to 30 dBm default 20 dBm Ignore Region Sets the frequency r
99. memory 256 MB optional Local bus C2 CIO Ol OOOO OC OO CO C CO COO PCI bridge Windows board PC External interface Figure 1 8 Block diagram RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 7 Product Overview 8 GHz Down Converter IF Sampling A D Converter Digital Down Converter FFT Extended Trigger Optional 1 8 Converts the RF signal applied through the front panel INPUT connector into a 76 MHz IF signal This converter processes signals up to 8 GHz by IF conver sions in three stages A 10 MHz oscillator provides a high accuracy reference for all stages of IF conversion The converter also adjusts signals for A D conversion using a low noise amplifier fine tuning attenuator and anti alias filter The output signal from the down converter is sent to the IF sampling A D converter The IF analog output from the down converter enters the A D converter through the fine tuning attenuator low noise amplifier and anti alias filter to be converted into a digital signal The sampling rate of the A D converter is 102 4 MHz with a resolution of 14 bits The I O splitter separates the real signal from the A D converter into complex I and components With Option 03 you can input I and signals from the rear panel connectors Performs center frequency and span fine tuning The digital data from the A D converter is transformed to a complex signal of maximum 20 MEZ setting
100. modes Load State Load Data S A mode except Real Time gt Load From File Menu Select File Load File Now Folder Load from XXXA Load from XXXB Load from XXXC Save State Save Trace 1 Save Trace 2 Save Correction Save SEM Limits Spectrum Emission Mask Real Time S A mode Save State Save Data Save SEM Limits Spectrum Emission Mask Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes Save State Save Data All Blocks Current Block Current Area Save Data CSV Current Block Current Area Save Data MAT Current Block Current Area Print now Save screen to file Background color Printer Black White gt Save To File Menu Filename Save File Now Overwrite Folder Save to XXXA Save to XXXB Save to XXXC Where XXX State for a state file IGData for an IQ data file Trace for a trace file Corr for a correction file Bitmap for a bitmap file MACRO MACRO ET SETUP Contact your local Tektronix distributor or sales office for installing user specific macros RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual E EE EEE Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping This section shows the symbol mapping for each digital modulation technique BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right EIEIEIEIEIEIEIEN EIEIEIEIEIEIEIEN Bcc EIEIEIEIEIEIEIEN Figure B 1 Symbol mappin
101. modes only Enables the reference cursor at the same position as the trigger in the overview Reference Cursor to Trigger Output Demod and Time modes only Enables the reference cursor at the same position as the trigger output in the overview RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 237 Marker Operation and Peak Search Using Markers This section shows some examples of marker operation NOTE If multiple views are displayed on the screen select the view to operate the markers using the View Select key on the front panel The selected view is shown with a white frame Measuring with a measure amplitude or frequency with a single marker follow these steps Single Marker Press the Maker Setup key on the front panel 2 Press the Makers side key to select Single Only Marker 1 is enabled Note that the Marker X Position menu item is already selected 3 Rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the numeric keypad to move the marker to the measurement location The marker readout is displayed in the top left portion of the screen see Figure 3 165 Tekironix RSA 3408B Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Span 15 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 2 Trace 2 Off Marker 99 999 MHz 2185 dBm 44 86 dBm Hz Marker readout dim Marker 1 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off 9 Marker X Position MHz Figure 3 165 Measur
102. of time required to acquire one frame Spurious Response A response to a spectrum analyzer wherein the displayed frequency is not related to the input frequency Vertical Scale Factor Vertical Display Factor The number of units such as dB or V represented by one vertical division of a spectrum analyzer display screen View An area or window of the display screen which contains information all of the same type such as a Spectrum View or a Power versus Time View RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Index Index A A D overflow 3 147 AC line frequency 1 12 Accessories G 1 optional G 3 standard G 3 ACPR measurement 3 6 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 84 Acquisition history 3 158 length 3 158 Acquisition Analysis menu 3 157 zoom 3 27 AM signal measurement 3 43 AM AM measurement 3 61 view setting 3 221 AM PM measurement 3 63 view setting 3 222 Amplitude correction 3 148 menu 3 143 3 144 setting 3 143 Analog modulation analysis 3 41 basic procedure 3 41 Analysis length 3 158 offset 3 158 Analysis range setting 3 34 Angular units System menu 2 25 Architecture 1 7 Arrow keys Markers menu 3 236 ASK Modulation Type 3 49 note for measurements 3 55 Audio measurements Option 10 only 3 67 Auto level 3 144 Average 3 191 Demod mode 3 196 DPX spectrum 3 193 menu 3 192 Time mode 3 196 type
103. page 3 227 for the details 3 204 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views Basic Procedure The following procedures set the scale or format the view using the View keys in single view or multiple views Procedure for Single View When you are displaying one view on screen press View Scale Lines View Scale and set the scale For the Scale menu of a specific view refer to the following pages Procedure for Multiple Views When you are displaying multiple views on the screen follow these steps 1 Select a view by pressing the View Select key The selected view is surrounded by a white frame 2 If necessary change a multiple view display to a single view display a Press the View Define key b Press the Show Views side key to select Single Only the selected view will be displayed 3 Setthe scale by pressing View Scale Lines View Scale 4 If necessary return to the multiple view display a Press the View Define key b Press the Show Views side key to select Multi Refer to page 3 38 for information about changing the overview and the subview using the Define menu RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 205 Setting Views Spectrum View Setting The spectrum view is the frequency domain representation of a signal It indicates frequency along the horizontal axis and power along the vertical axis View Scale Menu The Scale menu for the spectrum view contains the following controls see Figure 3 1
104. processor and the parameters cannot be controlled The RBW has the following controls RBW Selects whether to set RBW automatically or manually Auto Sets RBW automatically by the span setting using the Gaussian filter m Manual Sets RBW manually using the RBW Value side key RBW Value Sets the RBW when you select Manual in the RBW side key Range 1 to 1046 of the span setting rounded to the nearest settable value RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual FFT and RBW Overlapped FFT Real Time S A mode has FFT overlap capability that computes FFT while Real Time S A Mode overlapping 1024 point FFT frames by a specified number of samples to enhance time resolution The RBW FFT menu contains the following controls NOTE In the Real Time S A mode the FFT points is always 1024 and FFT processed data does not go through RBW process see Figure 3 130 on page 3 182 FFT Start Point Sets the start point of the 1024 point FFT frame by the number of samples from the previous frame see Figure 3 131 Range 1 to 1024 samples in increments of 2 FFT Overlap Displays the amount of overlap between frames used to calculate consecutive FFTs see Figure 3 131 Not settable The sum of FFT Overlap and FFT Start Point is always 1024 FFT Window Selects the FFT window window function For the window type refer to Table 3 31 on page 3 187 The default is Blackman Harris 4B Time domain data Time Frame 1
105. range RF mode gt 0 Hz Baseband When you enter an out of range value the value is limited based on these conditions In spectrum analyzer mode the out of range values are allowed but part of the trace may not be displayed because the analyzer cannot acquire that part of the waveform see Figure 3 98 3 140 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Frequency and Span Center frequency Span and frequency settings should fit within the maximum allowable span setting Maximum allowable span setting for the analyzer lt gt Set span Center frequency A part of the trace is not displayed in these two settings Not displayed Set span Center frequency Not displayed Set span Figure 3 98 Relationship between the frequency and span settings RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 141 Setting Frequency and Span Vector Span 3 142 The input signals are scanned in frame units one frame 1024 points There are two frames a physical frame to store scanned data and a logical frame to store display data as illustrated in Figure 3 99 In the baseband one logical frame is acquired at one scan regardless of the span setting You can acquire one logical frame with one scan of a span setting below 36 MHz in the RF band In larger spans one logical frame is built up by acquiring data with multiple physical frames For example when the span is 40 MHz one logical frame is co
106. region is visible Scroll Table Scrolls the coefficient table when it has many rows Overview Power versus Time Tektronix RSA 3408B Subview Constellation PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 1 6 ns 1 dB compression point gt Compression Coefficient table Index Order in best fit curve polynomial AM AM AM PM Refer to Maximum Coefficient on page 3 61 3 62 Span 1MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets Off 6 Modulation dem Type 16QAM E Modulation Parameters 94 Auto Carrier dem Timing p On Off Start 240 us Scale 24 us 1 454 1 454 Frequency Error 5 12 dBm Hz 1 3617304508 AM AM Coeff AM PM Coeff 11 __ dBm Maximum 4 517e 000 3 295e 003 Coefficients 4 128e 001 4 172e 003 8 5 00 1 221e 001 1 839e 003 3 177e 002 3 610 004 Scroll Table 2 819e 003 3 690e 005 1 261e 004 2 130e 006 EPRE 5 981e 008 5 00dB 11 dem of 2 Cancel Back AM AM distortion graph Red points Measurement points Yellow lines Measurement lines Blue line Reference line Pink line Best fit line Oblique lines Linear signal region coefficient coefficient Figure 3 52 AM AM measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode AM PM Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays an AM PM dis
107. see also Figure 3 71 Table 3 18 Details of the RF envelope FSK pulse measurement table Item Description Index Envelope Select by View Define Envelope On width Off width Pulse width for pulse on or off Period Period On width Off width Duty Duty cycle On width Period On ripple Off ripple Ripple of on time or off time Slope 1 2 and 3 Rise Fall time of slope 1 2 and 3 Slope 3 is Slope 1 of the envelope on the right 1 2 3 and T4 1 Pulse characteristic values defined in the 14443 2 A 18092 424k and 15693 2 standards 1 For the definitions of T1 T2 T3 and T4 refer to the ISO IEC 18092 14443 2 and 15693 2 standard specifications shown in Table 3 15 on page 3 77 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 93 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode o FA Slope number gt 1 2 3 1 2 dove 4 WW selected by View Define gt Burst Envelope 0 Envelope 2 The selected burst is expanded 12 3 eee 4 be Overview The envelope selected by View Define gt Envelope is displayed in the main view Voltage On ripple 10096 Higher Threshold 3 Quum Rah eee ee Beer eee nern sense e On width Middle Threshold Lower Threshold Q ie E 0 Off ripple
108. select the mode using the Trig menu Frequency Run Channel Stop Run Stop key Span Trig 4 Trig key Amplitude jd By default the analyzer is now acquiring data in the continuous mode 1 Press the Run Stop key to stop data acquisition When acquisition stops PAUSE is shown in the status indicator on screen see Figure 2 37 Status indicator Tektronix RSA 34088 x 5 gt Pause DVETE ee GT ze E Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level 4 Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off dBm E Figure 2 37 Status indicator 2 Acquire data in the single mode using the following steps a Press the Trig key on the front panel b Press the Repeat side key and select Single c Press the Run Stop key to acquire data One waveform is acquired and displayed every time you press the key 3 Press the Repeat side key again and select Continuous to return to the continuous mode When acquisition starts READY is displayed in the status indicator indicating that the analyzer is ready for trigger RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 39 Tutorial Using Markers and Peak Search Measuring with a Single Marker Tektronix RSA 3408B The markers are used to measure amplitude or frequency and also to find the peak signal One or two markers can be displayed as Marker 1 and 2 To measure an absol
109. service personnel If you need any service contact your local Tektronix representative 1 28 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Operating Basics IEEE LSS Interface Maps This section describes the controls connectors and display m Controls and connectors m Front panel m Rear panel m Side panel W Using a mouse and keyboard m Display screen m Elements of the display Status display m Front panel key lock W Setup display For using the removable hard disk drive Option 06 refer to Appendix D RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 1 Interface Maps Controls and Connectors Figures 2 1 through 2 3 on the following pages show the controls and connec tors on the front the side and the rear panels For the connector specifications refer to the RSA3408B Technical Reference N Figure 2 1 Front panel 2 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Interface Maps Front PanelInterface 1 Display LCD Liquid Crystal Display Size 21 3 cm 8 4 inch Resolution 800 x 600 dots Color 256 colors maximum 2 Side Keys Select menu items associated with menu keys 3 Menu keys Select menus Refer to page 2 15 for details Refer to page 2 18 for menu operations 4 Keypad Enters alphanumeric characters Refer to page 2 19 for entering a numeric value and page 3 262 for entering a file n
110. than 32 ms m When the modulation type is OOPSK set the span so that the sampling rate is more than three times as fast as the symbol rate The sampling rate varies according to span setting For the detail refer to the Acquisition table described in the Specifications section of the Technical Reference refer to Related Documents on page xviii Modulation Parameters Sets the following modulation parameters Symbol Rate Enters the symbol rate for demodulating digitally modulated signals The symbol rate and the bit rate are related as follows Symbol rate Bit rate Number of bits per symbol For example the number of bits per symbol is 3 for 8PSK Measurement Filter Selects a filter for demodulating a digitally modulated input signal None no filter m Root Raised Cosine User Filter Reference Filter Selects a filter for creating a reference signal None no filter m Raised Cosine m Gaussian m Half Sine User Filter Refer to Process Flow for Digitally Modulated Signals on page 3 54 for the measurement and reference filters When you select User Filter load the file using the Load User Filter Measure ment and Reference side keys before taking measurements Filter Parameter Enters an a BT value for the Measurement Filter and Reference Filter Range 0 0001 to 1 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Load User Filter Measurement Loads the user defined me
111. the frequency bandwidth of the video filter Range 1 Hz to 1 GHz The setting value may be limited by the sweep time setting Sweep Time for VBW Sets the sweep time to scan a set span Range 1 us to 100 s RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 83 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode ACPR Measurement Measurement table The channel selected by the Scroll Table side key is indicated by the red band power cursor with the waveform 3 84 The ACPR Adjacent Channel Leak Power Ratio measurement is similar to that of the S A mode refer to page 3 6 However in the ACPR measurement of the RFID analysis the adjacent channel is measured for up to 25 channels from up and down Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu of the ACPR measurement is the same as that of the S A mode except that Scroll Table is added Refer to page 3 6 Scroll Table Selects an adjacent channel 1 to 25 in the upper lower side from the measurement table displayed in the bottom of the screen Figure 3 66 shows an example of the ACPR measurement Tektronix RSA 3408A 8 051 PM PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 1 GHz RBW 16 kHz Cancel Back Span 4 MHz Main Channel Input Att 15 Bandwidth Hz E Main Adjacent channel Qu _ channel selected with Scroll Table 0 La gt Adjacent Channel dem gt Bandwidth Hz 500 Chan Spacing Hz 500 40 un Measuremen
112. the swept spectrum analyzer Sweep of resolution filter Concept of the real time spectrum analyzer Concurrent acquisition Frame acquisition DPX processing DPX spectrum display Block diagram Figure 1 11 Front panel power switch On Standby switch Figure 1 12 Initial screen Figure 1 13 RF INPUT connector Figure 1 14 Setting up the stand Figure 1 15 Spectrum of the calibration signal 100 MHz about 20 dBm Figure 1 16 Figure 1 17 Figure 1 18 Figure 1 19 Figure 1 20 Figure 1 21 Figure 1 22 Figure 1 23 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Setup display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual DC offset Front panel Rear panel Side panel Setup display Reference level setting and overrange indicator Spectrogram display Calibration menu structure UNCAL display 5 rn Center offset 22 2 an System menu Connecting USB Operation with mouse and keyboard Display screen configuration Status display eeeeeeeeee ee ntn Pre and post trigger regions Key lock display 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 12 1 13 1 13 1 14 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 11 2 11 2 12 2 13 Table of Contents vi Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12
113. to the fundamental wave dBc for the others Calculation of Harmonic Level The harmonics measurement calculation is performed assuming that the window function FFT RBW FFT Window is Blackman Harris 4B as the default setting Applying this window widens one bin line spectrum in the Rect rectangular window to 9 bins expanding by approximately 4 bins on both sides When calculating SINAD or other audio parameters 5 bins including the DC component are eliminated to search for the fundamental with the highest level The harmonic frequencies are determined by an integral multiple of the fundamental frequency The harmon ic level calculation uses the total level of 9 bins including 4 bins on both sides see Figure 3 60 For information about bin refer to Trace Compression on page 3 200 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 73 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode This example shows bins overlapping with the distance between harmonics of 7 or 8 bins To expand the waveform horizontally press Scale Lines gt View Scale gt Horizontal Scale to set a smaller value 3 74 Signal level Fundamental A a 2nd harmonic a 3 9 harmonic DC gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Frequency 5 bins 9 bins 9 bins 9 bins excluded from calculation The 9 bins are used to calculate the harmonic level Figure 3 60 Harmonic level calculation NOTE Due to the relationship between the span and the input frequen
114. traditional tools and is uniquely capable of capturing continuous intermittent or random signals with equal ease The data acquired seamlessly is analyzed in time amplitude phase and frequency domains correlating with time Furthermore DPX spectrum processing provides an intuitive understanding of time varying RF signals with color graded displays based on frequency of occurrence Features RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual DC to 8 GHz measurement frequency range 100 Hz to 3 GHz measurement span and 36 MHz vector span Real time analysis for seamless capture of time varying RF signals DPX spectrum display facilitates observation of intermittent signals Spectrogram provides a 3 D representation of time varying spectrum Spectrum analysis of power ACPR C N OBW EBW and spurious signals Analog modulation analysis of AM PM FM ASK and FSK signals Digital modulation analysis ranging from BPSK to 2560AM Option 21 m Constellation analysis m EVM analysis m AM AM and AM PM distortion analyses m RFID analysis Time characteristic analysis m Pulse measurements m Signal source analysis CCDF analysis 8 4 inch TFT color display and sturdy cabinet USB LAN and GPIB interfaces 1 1 Product Overview Application The RSA3408B can perform real time analysis for the following purposes m Signal quality analysis of analog and digital modulation Understanding frequency and spectral occupancy behavior over time m Capture and chara
115. value for the D8PSK signals Valid when D8PSK is selected as Modulation Type in the Meas Setup menu m Code Selects the code sequence that determines the symbol value by the phase difference between the current and the previous symbols using Gray code For example when the phase difference is 7 2 the symbol value is 3 m Phase Selects the phase sequence that determines the symbol value by the phase angle directly For example when the phase angle is 2 the symbol value is 2 See Figure 3 150 Phase sequence Code sequence lt 4 Figure 3 150 DBPSK symbol value 3 218 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views Symbol Value of CPM Eye Diagram Setting Option 21 Only Marker 199sym 01 0 01111010 01101110 01000101 00001010 11010011 11110110 01001001 01101111 32 11001001 10101001 10011000 00001100 01100101 00011010 01011111 11010001 64 01100011 10101100 10110011 11000111 11011101 00000110 10110110 11101100 96 00010110 10111110 10101010 00000101 00101011 11001011 10111000 00011100 128 11101001 00111101 01110101 00010010 00011001 11000010 11110110 11001101 160 00001110 11110000 11111111 10000011 11011111 00010111 00110010 00001001 192 01001110 1101008 Figure 3 151 Symbol table For information on symbol mapping refer to Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping The symbol value of the CPM Continuous Phase Modulation signal is determined by the phase difference betwe
116. whether to automatically detect or manually set the carrier frequency Default Automatically detects a carrier for every frame and displays the error from center frequency as Freq Error on the screen m Off Sets the carrier frequency using Frequency Error Frequency Offset Sets the carrier frequency when Auto Carrier is Off Enter the frequency offset from the center frequency 3 52 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Shifting Q Data for When the modulation type is OOPSK you can shift Q data by half a symbol OQPSK relative to I data by pressing View Define gt Q Data Half Symbol Shift The Data Half Symbol Shift side key has the following selections m Shifts Q data by half a symbol in the positive direction on the time axis m 0 Does not shift Q data default m Shifts Q data by half a symbol in the negative direction on the time axis This function is available in the following views m Constellation m EVM m Eye diagram versus Time NOTE When Data Half Symbol Shift is set to 0 zero the magnitude and phase errors cannot be calculated displaying for the Mag Error and Phase Error in the constellation and EVM measurement readout RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 53 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Process Flow for determine the necessary settings in digital modulation analysis you must Digitally Modulated know the digitally m
117. 01011001 01100111 10001111 128 10111010 00001101 01101101 11011000 00101101 01111101 01010100 00001010 150 01010111 10010111 01110000 00111001 11010010 01111010 11101010 00100100 192 00110011 1000018 Figure 3 49 Symbol table analysis Eye Diagram Analysis Performs digital demodulation processing and displays an eye diagram in the main view Figure 3 50 shows an example For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 49 For setting views refer to page 3 203 Marker 1 693 75ms 0 698 95 238095 us Figure 3 50 Eye diagram analysis main view You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing System gt Instrument Setup gt Angular Units 3 60 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode AM AM Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays an AM AM distortion graph for measuring non linearity characteristics of a DUT device under test such as an RF amplifier Figure 3 52 on page 3 62 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of recovered reference amplitude versus measured signal amplitude and the table of AM AM coefficients extracted from curve fitting Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the AM AM measurement contains the following controls For information about the common controls for the digital modulation analysis refer to Meas Setup Menu on page 3 49 Linear Signal Region Unit
118. 04 Voltage dips and interruptions immunity 7 EN 61000 3 2 2006 AC power line harmonic emissions EN 61000 3 3 1995 Voltage changes fluctuations and flicker European Contact RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tektronix UK Ltd Western Peninsula Western Road Bracknell RG12 1RF United Kingdom xvii Compliance Information Australia New Zealand Declaration of Conformity EMC Safety Compliance EC Declaration of Conformity Low Voltage U S Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing Canadian Certification Additional Compliances xviii This product is intended for use in nonresidential areas only Use in residential areas may cause electromagnetic interference Emissions which exceed the levels required by this standard may occur when this equipment is connected to a test object To ensure compliance with the EMC standards listed here high quality shielded interface cables should be used At the IEC 61000 4 11 Voltage Interruption Transient Immunity test at 0 for 250 cycles the EUT reboots and can take greater than 10 seconds to recover Performance degradation information for the IEC 61000 4 3 test Residual spurious signals can increase to the following levels with exposure to the disturbance levels of this test 60 dBm due to disturbance signals at the 80 1000 MHz frequency band of this test 30 dBm due to disturbance signals at the 1 4 2 0 GHz and 2 0 2 7 GHz frequency bands of thi
119. 046 default 5 Edge number selected by View Define gt Edge 0 12 3 4 y ry ry Overview The selected edge is displayed in the main view Power Settling Error Width Overshoot N 1 0 Undershoot 4 0076 POEEEE C Higher Threshold Lower Threshold Ta le a len Off level Average level below 096 the lower threshold I Settling time 7 Time Rise time Fall time Figure 3 68 Transmission power on down measurement parameters 3 88 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Lower Threshold Sets the lower threshold value for measuring the rise fall time of the pulse See Figure 3 68 Range 1 to Middle Threshold Default value 10 or 5 only for the 14443 2 A 18092 424k and 15693 2 standards Middle Threshold Sets the middle threshold value for measuring the width of the pulse See Figure 3 68 Range Lower Threshold to Higher Threshold Default value 50 or 60 only for the 14443 2 A 18092 424k and 15693 2 standards Higher Threshold Sets the higher threshold value for measuring the rise fall time of the pulse See Figure 3 68 Range Middle Threshold to 99 Default value 90 or 95 only for the 15693 2 standard Interpolation Points When the sample rate is lower than the bit rate because the data cannot be analyzed correctly the shortage of the sample ra
120. 1 Select Markers 3 236 Setting analysis range 3 34 Setup display 2 13 Shifting data OOPSK 3 53 Side keys 2 3 Side panel 2 6 Signal amplitude limit 1 14 Signal processing 1 7 Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 119 frequency versus time measurement 3 133 phase noise measurement 3 121 real time phase noise measurement 3 127 real time spurious measurement 3 131 spurious measurement 3 125 Signal Noise and Distortion 3 69 Single trigger 3 165 Single view 3 40 Span 3 137 menu 3 136 setting 3 135 vector span 3 142 Spectrogram S A with Spectrogram 3 21 view setting 3 208 Spectrum analysis S A mode 3 1 length 3 158 Index 5 Index offset 3 159 view setting 3 206 Spectrum emission mask measurement S A mode 3 14 Spurious measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 82 S A mode 3 12 Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 125 Stand setting up 1 15 Standard accessories G 3 Status display 2 11 Step size center frequency 2 22 setting 2 22 Stop and Show Results 3 166 Subview changing 3 38 modulation analysis screen 3 33 Symbol mapping B 1 Symbol table analysis 3 60 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 96 setting 3 218 Symmetrical filter Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 125 Synchronous operation external trigger 3 178 System menu 2 25 T Tari RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 86 Technical Reference related documents xxii Time analysis Time mode
121. 1 6 DPX processing RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 5 Product Overview The DPX spectrum display reveals transient signal behavior that helps you discover instability glitches and interference Here an infrequently occurring transient is seen in detail The frequency of occurrence is color graded indicating the infrequent transient event in blue and the noise background in red Figure 1 7 DPX spectrum display The screen display is generally updated at certain intervals to rewrite waveforms But the persistence mode in the DPX spectrum display enables a data point once displayed to remain visible for a decay period you specify You can adjust the persistence time to optimize display characteristics for varying signal conditions from a live RF view of dynamic signals to the discovery of single occurrences Persistence is what enables the spectrum analyzer to display events that occur only rarely 1 6 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Product Overview Architecture Figure 1 8 shows the block diagram of the signal processing system po 4 Fsampling Option Q input lt AID converter l input Nc optional AN RF input 8 GHz IF sampling Digital down converter A D converter down converter Digital IQ output optional External trigger input Trigger detection Extended trigger optional DPX processor Data memory Memory controller 64 MB standard Pixel buffer
122. 16 A330 00 Preamplifier 20 dB gain to 3 GHz 650 A900 XX RTPA2A real time probe adapter P7000 series probes recommended RSA34RHD extra 40 GB removable hard drive for use with Option 06 RSASKR rackmount kit user installable RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual G 3 Appendix G Options and Accessories G 4 Optional Software User Manuals Optional software includes the user manual listed in Table G 4 Table G 4 Accessories for optional software Accessory Part number Option 24 GSM EDGE analysis software user manual 071 2398 XX Option 25 cdma2000 analysis software user manual 071 2400 XX Option 26 1xEV DO analysis software user manual 071 2402 XX Option 28 TD SCDMA analysis software user manual 071 2404 XX Option 29 WLAN 802 11a b g n analysis software user manual 071 2405 XX Option 30 3GPP Release 99 and Release 5 uplink and downlink 071 2396 XX analysis software user manual Option 40 3GPP Release 6 HSUPA analysis software user manual 071 2060 XX RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary BEE Glossary Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition A series of time contiguous frames This is also called a Block Acquisition Time The length of time contained in one acquisition Amplitude The magnitude of an electrical signal Amplitude Modulation AM The process or result of a process in which the amplitude of a sine wave the carrier is varied in accordance with the ins
123. 2 4453 GHz Span 36 MHz Marker 4 490195312 ms 728 1099381845 kHz 4 MHz Main view Frequency vs Time gt i MHz Start 5 870117 ms Scale 288 085938 us Measurement result gt Frequency Settling Time 710 586 us Frequency settling time from Trigger 724 238 us Smoothing display with factor of 5 Signal Source Analysis Frequency vs Time Figure 3 94 Frequency versus Time measurement 3 134 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual SSS SSS Setting Frequency and Span This section describes frequency and span which are fundamental settings for observing the spectrum These items are set using the general purpose knob and the numeric input keypad You can also use the marker peak search function to set frequency RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 135 Setting Frequency and Span Frequency and Span Setting Menu 3 136 Frequency Channel Frequency Center Freq BB Start Freq Stop Freq Span Channel Channel Table Refer to page 3 138 Center Freq Step Same As C F Amplitude Center Freq Step Same As Span Step Size Acquisition Span Analysis Start Freq Stop Freq S A mode except Real Time S A only Figure 3 95 Frequency and Span menu structure Sets frequency or channel Center Freq Sets the center frequency Numeric entry field Range 0 Hz to 8 GHz Start Freq Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Numeric entr
124. 3 37 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Setting FFT Processing Range for the Subview Overview Changing the Overview 3 38 and Subview Set the FFT processing range shown in Figure 3 36 for the spectrum displayed in the subview with the following procedure using the Acquisition Analysis menu after data acquisition The range is indicated by a pink line l Press the AcquisitionAnalysis key on the front panel The Spectrum Length side key shows the time for creating the FFT available in the subview It is determined by the span internally 2 Press the Spectrum Offset side key and specify the beginning of the range using the general purpose knob or numeric input keypad Spectrum Offset gw Spectrum Length Timing T Start 25 6 ms Scale 2 56 ms div Figure 3 36 FFT processing range setting on the overview By default the overview shows the waveform representing the signal level change over time and the subview shows the spectrum waveform To change the views use the following procedure NOTE You can change the subview only in the digital modulation analysis Option 21 1 Press the View Define key on the front panel 2 Press the Overview Content side key and select the overview m Waveform Amplitude versus Time default display Spectrogram The overview displays all data in one acquisition block RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis
125. 3 7 C N measurement band power markers 3 8 Figure 3 8 Example of C N measurement 3 8 Figure 3 9 OBW measurement band power marker 3 9 Figure 3 10 OBW measurement 3 9 Figure 3 11 Carrier frequency measurement 3 10 Figure 3 12 EBW measurement band power markers 3 11 Figure 3 13 EBW measurement 3 11 Figure 3 14 Setting up spurious signal measurement 3 12 Figure 3 15 Example of spurious signal measurement 3 13 Figure 3 16 Spectrum emission mask measurement 3 15 Figure 3 17 Measurement limits editor Ls 3 16 Figure 3 18 DPX process 3 18 Figure 3 19 DPX spectrum display 3 19 Figure 3 20 Persistence display 3 20 Figure 3 21 Spectrum and spectrogram concurrent display 3 21 Figure 3 22 View orientation 3 22 Figure 3 23 Single 3 22 Figure 3 24 Difference between normal and real time modes 3 23 Figure 3 25 Real time mode 3 26 Figure 3 26 Spectrogram display in averaging 3 26 Figure 3 27 Zoom function 3 27 Figure 3 28 Zoom domain settings using the acquisition and analysis menu el
126. 36 20 136 Calculated Symbol Rate 10 0017 kSym sec Frequency The time axis is scaled by the calculated symbol rate Mlax Hz 3 389k 3 368k 10 1k Deviation Hz 9 997k when Symbol Timing Search Symbol Timing Min Hz 9 865 3 202 3 191k 9 893k isOn Search Avg Hz 10 001k 3 3k 3 295k 9 992k On Off Go to page 2 of 2 Figure 3 56 FSK deviations measurement 4FSK The RMS and peak frequency deviation errors are displayed in the measurement result readout on the screen When Symbol Timing Search in the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 52 is set to On the calculated symbol rate is indicated Also from the difference between the calculated rate C and the set rate S the symbol timing error C S S is shown The S is the value specified by the Symbol Rate side key Refer to page 3 50 When using the average function Trace Avg menu at the same time the measurement is repeated by the average count to obtain the maximum and average values which are displayed as Max and Avg in the readout When the averaging is disabled Max and Avg are the same value The measurement table on the bottom of the screen indicates the maximum minimum and average frequency deviations in the analysis range for each symbol value RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Audio Measurements Option 10 Only The audio measurement function performs traditio
127. 39 Measurement with the delta marker 5 Press the Select Marker side key top to select 2 making Marker 2 active You can also select the marker using the Markers Select key on the front panel The Markers Select key and the Select Marker side key have the same function RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 41 Tutorial 6 The Marker X Position menu item is selected Using the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad move the marker to the desired measure ment point see Figure 2 39 The difference between the two marker positions Marker 1 Marker 2 is indicated in the upper left part of the screen 7 Press the Markers side key to select Single The analyzer returns to the single marker mode Searching for the Peak Measure the frequency interval between the maximum intensity spectrum and a peak to its left by using the delta marker and peak search functions together 1 Press the Peak key on the front panel Marker 1 moves to the maximum intensity spectrum Ma rkers _ Select bd Peak Marker Marker gt v Setup Peak key Positions the marker at the maximum peak 2 Press the Markers side key to select Delta The fixed marker appears at the active marker position 3 Press the Select Marker side key to select 2 making Marker 2 active a Press the marker right key P gt to move the marker to the next signal peak to the right Try it sever
128. 40 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the vertical axis automatically to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Range 100u to 100 dB default 100 dB Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Range 100 to 100 dBm default 0 dBm Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value Vertical Stop 7 0 dBm Vertical Scale 49 100 dem Center 800 MHz Span 15 MHz f Horizontal Scale a Horizontal Start Figure 3 140 Setting the scale in spectrum view 3 206 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views DPX Spectrum View Setting The DPX Spectrum indicates frequency along the horizontal axis and power along the vertical axis The Bitmap trace displays the density of acquired data by color grading Scale Menu The Scale menu for the DPX spectrum view contains the following controls see Figure 3 141 Vertical Scale Sets the full scale of the vertical axis Setting value 20 or 100 dB default 100 dB Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Range 100 to 100 dBm default 0 dBm Bitmap Color Selects the color scheme used for the Bitmap trace Table 3 35 Bitmap c
129. 41 3 242 3 242 3 243 3 244 3 246 3 247 3 248 3 249 xi Table of Contents Xii Figure 3 177 Figure 3 178 Figure 3 179 Figure 3 180 Figure 3 181 Figure 3 182 Figure 3 183 Figure 3 184 Figure 3 185 Figure 3 186 Figure 3 187 Figure 3 188 Figure 3 189 Figure 3 190 Figure 3 191 Figure 3 192 Figure 3 193 Load Save menu structure Save to the preset file lower right of the screen Selecting the folder Save to File menu Load from the preset file lower right of the screen Load from File menu Displaying the file name on the Load Data side key Alphanumeric Data file structure Adding dummy frames Data block eser re rrr werten entes Trace file structure Bitmap trace file DPT structure Data sequence for writing to the Bitmap trace file Limit mask file example User filter file structure Print menu 5 Figure A 1 Menu Figure B 1 Symbol mapping BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM and 64QAM Figure B 2 Symbol mapping 256QAM GFSK 4FSK 8FSK and 16FSK Figure C 1 Digit
130. 4x1 up to 65536 1024x64 Use the Extended Resolution side key to specify the number of points that are FFT processed from the trigger point Number Of Averages Specifies the average count for the Trace Type of Average Setting range 1 to 1000 default 20 Extended Resolution Specifies the number of FFT points for the Trace Type of Hi Res x1 21024 x2 x4 x8 x16 x32 or x64 265536 default The Trace Avg menu has the following controls in the Demod and Time modes Average Determines whether or not to perform averaging On Off NOTE For Demod and Time modes data is always acquired without averaging Average Count Specifies the number of measurements to combine Setting range 1 to 10000 default 20 Average Term Control Specifies the action when more than Average Count measurement results are generated Expo Continues the average with an exponential weighting applied to old values m Repeat Clears average data and counter and restarts the average process Displaying Trace 1 and 2 3 196 In the S A mode except Real Time S A only Trace 1 yellow is displayed by default Use the following steps to select Trace 1 and 2 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select the trace 1 or 2 to be controlled For example to control Trace 2 select 2 3 Press the Trace 1 or 2 side key to select the display method On Freeze or OFF 4 Press t
131. 7 Compared display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 199 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Saving Loading Waveform Data Saving a Trace Loading a Trace Trace Compression Relation between Frame 3 200 Bin and Pixel You can save and load waveform data using the Save Load menu For details refer to File Operations on page 3 251 In the S A mode except Real Time S A the Trace Avg menu is also available for saving and loading data You can load the saved waveform as Trace 1 or 2 Follow these steps 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 3 Press the Save Trace side key and select the destination file For information about file operations refer to page 3 251 and subsequent pages 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the Select Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 3 Press the Load Trace side key and select the source file The trace is automatically frozen For information about file operations refer to page 3 251 and subsequent pages Trace 1 or 2 loaded switches to Freeze automatically Although waveform data are acquired as 1024 points per frame the acquired data are displayed after being compressed due to the limitation in the number of pixels on screen The compression method and the procedure to select the method are described in the following section One frame contains 1024 FFT output points Part o
132. 895512 0 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 281 File Format 3 282 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Screen Print Menu This section explains how to send a screen copy to a printer or a file Use a printer that complies with USB specifications For files data in the bitmap format BMP are created The following topics are described in this section W Print Menu W Printing a Screen Copy m Creating a File The Print menu contains the following controls Utility Help Preset Input Load Print now Cal Save Save screen to file Background color Black White 6 Printer System Print Figure 3 193 Print menu structure Print now Starts printing a copy of the analyzer screen to an attached printer Save screen to file Opens the Save menu to save a bitmap file For file operations refer to page 3 251 Background color Selects the background color for printing m Black Prints the background of screen in black m White Reverses the background of screen to white Printer Selects a destination printer RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 283 Screen Printing a Screen Copy Connecting a Printer Installing Printer Driver 3 284 Print You must connect the USB printer to the analyzer and install the printer driver before you can print Connect the USB cable of the printer to the USB port on the side pa
133. 8B Analyzer User Manual mem EMEN LSS Setting Views This section describes scaling and formatting for the following view types W Spectrum view m DPX Spectrum view m Spectrogram view m Time domain view m CCDF view For Option 21 only m Constellation view m EVM view m Symbol table W Eye diagram m AM AM view W AM PM view m PDF view Noisogram view For information on views specific to the other optional analyses refer to each user manual RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 203 Setting Views View Menu Use the following View keys on the front panel to scale and format views View DPX key Px oo 8 View Select key displays the DPX spectrum selects a view View Scale Lines key jin Define 5 View Define key ines scales the view defines the view sets the display line DPX Displays the DPX spectrum view Select Selects a view when displaying two or three views on screen The view switches each time you press this key The selected view is surrounded with a white box Define Selects a view style format and content The menu items depend on the measurement Refer to each measurement description Scale Lines Press this key and then select one of the following items m View Scale Sets the horizontal and vertical axes for the view selected using the Select key m View Lines Sets the display line for the view selected using the Select key Refer to Display Line on
134. 8B is equipped with a 102 4 MHz A D converter to analyze the spectrum by single scanning for spans up to 36 MHz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Product Overview AL al LL JA L Figure 1 5 Frame acquisition DPX Spectrum Display Along with the real time processing capability the analyzer has the proprietary DPX Digital Phosphor waveform processing technology that enhances visibility of transient phenomena and intermittent events The DPX process emulates traditional variable persistence CRTs that store waveforms on the phosphor coating by employing the proprietary DPX engine in the real time spectrum analyzer The DPX engine produces more than 50 000 FFT spectrums per second and records the data occurrences for each pixel to make a histogram which is displayed on the color graded bitmap Figure 1 6 illustrates the concept of DPX processing and Figure 1 7 shows an example of the DPX spectrum Generates the histogram to display with Produces FFT spectrums color grading by the data occurrences here 9 spectrums i i Count the data occurrences ill for each pixel 1 1 Mall 114 hal Amplitude 5 1 Amplitude n 1 5 7 1 1 Ill 7 8 3m IF Time Frequency Frequency Figure
135. 9 43 Save File Now m Save File Now 8 LODataA iqt 385KB IQT 271 07 07 13 09 43 EjIODataBigt 1536KB IQT 2 Jb 07 07 13 09 43 Stores the data to the specified file Overwrite r Overwrite Overwrites an existing file Folder C Documents Folder Shows the selected directory Figure 3 180 Save to File menu d After entering the file name press the Save File Now side key The data is saved to the specified file If the file already exists in the specified folder The message File already exists Do you want to overwrite it appears at the bottom of the screen When you overwrite the file press the Overwrite side key Otherwise go back to step c to enter another name 3 258 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations Loading a File Use the following steps to load settings or waveform from a file There are two ways to load data from a file selecting the preset file and selecting a file by name When you want to return to the previous menu press the Cancel Back side key at any time 1 Press the Load key on the front panel 2 Press one of the side keys according to the type of data to load Table 3 41 File load operation Meas mode Sidekey Load contet sss Extension SA 1 dptis only for the Bitmap trace in the DPX spectrum Spectrum emission mask in the S A mode only NOTE In the Real Time S A Demod and Time modes when you abort data acq
136. A mode has FFT overlap capability Refer to FFT and RBW on page 3 179 for detail Features of the Real Time input waveform is acquired in blocks where a block is defined as a number Mode of frames and a frame is defined as a number of FFT data points The number of frames acquired at one time is called block size In the normal spectrum analysis the instrument acquires data for the block size determined from RBW and creates one spectrum waveform In the real time mode the instrument acquires data for the block size specified with the Acquisition Analysis menu performs the FFT process and creates spectrum waveforms for each frame so that you can observe spectrum variation in time seamlessly The difference between normal and real time modes is shown in Figure 3 24 The block size determined from RBW one frame FFT points A Normal spectrum analysis Frame N 2 Frame 1 Frame 0 Time Y LL The block size specified with the Acquisition Analysis menu one frame 1024 points fixed A N Real time mode Frame N o Frame 2 Frame 1 Frame 0 Time gt NV UU EA n LL Figure 3 24 Difference between normal and real time modes RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 23 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Table 3 4 shows the features of the real time mode compared with the normal spectrum analysis
137. AM only Linear Signal Region Mask On Off CCDF PDF Horizontal Division CCDF only Display Gaussian Line On Off RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Average Median Off PDC PHS TETRA GSM CDPD Bluetooth 1 4Pl_QPSK BPSK QPSK 8PSK D8PSK 1 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM GMSK GFSK ASK FSK 4FSK 8FSK 16FSK P25_C4FM OQPSK CPM Symbol Rate None Root Raised Cosine Measurement Filter User Filter Reference Filter Filter Parameter None Raised Cosine Gaussian Load User Filter Measurement Half Sine User Filter Load User Filter Reference Modulation Type ASK Auto Modulation Depth On Off Modulation Depth Modulation Type ASK FSK GFSK Decoding Format NRZ Manchester Miller Modulation Type GFSK FSK 4FSK 8FSK 16FSK Auto Frequency Deviation On Off Frequency Deviation Modulation Type CPM Auto Modulation Index Detection On Off Modulation Index 4 16 5 16 5 16 6 16 6 16 7 16 7 16 10 16 12 16 13 16 8 16 8 16 A 7 Appendix A Menu Tree Demod Mode Measure Meas Setup The arrow indicates the Meas Setup menu corresponding to the measurement item Audio Measurements Option 10 only Harmonics Hum amp Noise Ratio Signal Noise amp Distortion gt Demod Type Audio LPF Audio HPF De emphasis
138. All Points to Maximum Set All Points to Minimum 60 dB Reset Mask to Default Y l 60 dB Figure 3 120 Filling operation for creating a mask RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Conditions for Creating a The required conditions for creating a trigger mask are as follows Mask m Measurement mode Mode Real Time S A Demod or Time m Trigger mode Trig gt Mode Triggered m Trigger source Trig gt Source Freq Mask Example of Mask Creation The procedure shows you how to create the example mask shown in Figure 3 121 Figure 3 121 Example mask 1 Before you start creating a trigger mask make sure that the requirements listed in Conditions for Creating a Mask above are satisfied 2 Stop data acquisition using the Run Stop key 3 The trigger mask is created in the spectrum view To display only the spectrum view on the screen follow these steps a Press the View Select key on the front panel to select the spectrum view b Press the View Define key on the front panel c Press the Show Views side key and select Single 4 Press the Trig key on the front panel 5 Press the Define Mask side key The default setting is for the whole area to fill w
139. Analysis Demod Mode AM Demod Measurement Demodulates and measures an AM signal Figure 3 39 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the modulation factor versus time graph Measure Show Measurements is selected in Figure 3 39 The modulation factor is defined by the following equation modulation factor Am Ao Ao Where Aq Amplitude of the modulation signal Amplitude of the carrier with no modulation 0 modulation Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the AM demod measurement contains the following control Carrier Amplitude Detection Selects how to calculate the amplitude of the carrier with no modulation Ag in the above equation m Average Default Defines Ag as the average amplitude in the analysis range m Median Defines A as the median amplitude maximum minimum 2 in the analysis range Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum H HI Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 6 4 ms Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Carrier Amplitude Input Att 20 dB Detection Average Median 4 4 NEN 5 dB 10 dB 54 em e 104 Start 6 4 ms Scale 640 us Center 100 MHz Span 1 MHz Main view 100 ot Measurement results gt 553 96 From the top AM 49 85 20 Positive peak AM value Total AMi
140. B div 10 Vertical Units dBm By Corrections Figure 2 12 Example menu item display NOTE When the setting is prohibited or is not available the item is displayed in gray 2 18 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Functional Overview Menu Item Types The different types of menu items are shown in Figure 2 13 Ref Level Numeric entry dBm E The current value of parameter is displayed To change the value press the associated side key and use the P general purpose knob up down keys or the keypad Toggle RF Atten Mixer V i You can switch selection items by pressing the associated side key Auto RFAtE Mixer Function execution The function indicated on the label is executed by pressing the associated side key In this example the Channel Power measurement is performed Channel Power Move to sub menu If the label is followed by you can move to a lower level Corrections menu by pressing the associated side key Move between pages Go to page 2 of When the number of menu items is greater than seven this menu 2 appears To move to the next page press the associated side key If you are on the last page you will return to the first page Invalid Menu items without labels do not cause any action Figure 2 13 Menu item types Numeric Input An example numeric input field is shown in Figu
141. BW measurement The number of data samples in Pulse On must be 20 to 16 384 for FFT calculation Change the span to display the results The results are not displayed in the Pulse Repetition Interval or the Duty Cycle measurement The observed pulse and the next one must be contiguous If either pulse is not recognized due to noise and so on the measurement results are not shown Error messages displayed on the bottom of the screen Message Filter bandwidth is too wide or Channel bandwidth is too wide Indicates that you set Filter Bandwidth or Channel Bandwidth inappropriate ly in the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 116 In this case change the setting of Filter Bandwidth or Channel Bandwidth until the message disappears Message Too long pulse Indicates that the number of data samples of a pulse width exceeds about 260 000 In this case change the span Message Too long repetition interval Indicates that the number of data samples of a pulse repetition interval exceeds about 260 000 In this case change the span RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode RBW FFT Menu The RBW FFT menu for the pulse measurements contains the following controls FFT Window Selects an FFT window for the channel power OBW and EBW measurements from these two m Nyquist default m Blackman Harris 4B Rolloff Ratio Sets the roll off ratio for the Nyquist window Range 0 0001 to 1 default 0 2
142. Bandwidth 2 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Carrier to Noise Ratio Offset Frequency kHz 6 Figure 3 8 Example of C N measurement The OBW Occupied Bandwidth measures the frequency bandwidth using the ratio you specify for carrier signal power power within the span setting RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the OBW measurement contains the following control Power Ratio Specifies the power ratio of the carrier and span regions for calculating OBW see Figure 3 9 The default setting is 9996 as defined in T 53 or IS 95 standard Range 80 to 99 99 Power Ratio Cp Sp x 100 Cp Power of carrier region Sp Power of span region Figure 3 9 OBW measurement band power marker Figure 3 10 shows an example of the OBW measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 12 kHz Trace 1 Normal Power Ratio Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off 8 0 0 J dBm N 10 dB 100 An dem Center 100 MHz Span 12 kHz Occupied BandWidth Frequency Error 4 48177 Hz Spectrum Analyzer Occupied Bandwidth Figure 3 10 OBW measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 04064 kHz Power Ratio Power Ratio 9 0 99 99 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Carrier Frequency Carrier frequency is accurately measured using the counter function
143. CDMA2000 PCS RL CDMA2000 NMT450 20k FL CDMA2000 NMT450 20k RL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k FL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k RL CDMA2000 SMR800 FL CDMA2000 SMR800 RL CDMA2000 TACS BAND FL CDMA2000 TACS BAND RL DCS1800 DL DCS1800 UL GSM850 DL GSM850 UL GSM900 DL GSM900 UL IEEE802 11a IEEE802 11b g NMT450 DL NMT450 UL PCS1900 DL PCS1900 UL TD SCDMA W CDMA DL W CDMA UL Auto RfAtt Mixer dBm dBuV V uV W Amplitude Offset Frequency Offset Amplitude Table Off On Edit Table 31 Interpolation Select Point To Edit Load Table Frequency Save Table Amplitude Delete Point Add New Point Done Editing Table Clear Table Freq Interpolation Ampl Interpolation RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Run Stop Trig RBW FFT Trace Avg Repeat Continuous Single RBW FFT RBW FFT Man RBW RBW Filter Shape Extended Res RBW FFT FFT FFT Points FFT Window Extended Res Auto Man FFT Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio for Nyquist and Root Nyquist Off On Parzen Welch SineLobe Hanning SineCubed SineToThe4th Hamming Blackman Rosenfield BlackmanHarris3A BlackmanHarris3B BlackmanHarris4A BlackmanHarris4B FlatTop Off On Select Tr
144. CII codes of 40000 with no line feed code RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 273 File Format Trace File Format File Structure The trace file have two blocks in the text format as shown in Figure 3 188 XNum 641 XRightLabel Span XStart 1 9995G XScale 1 0015625M XUnit Hz ZNum 1 en gt File header text format UpdateAreas 1 YUnit dBm NBW 3 13180146596413k YMiddleUnit dB YScale 100 UpdatePosition 640 100 875531204 111 253515034 101 342080442 96 7588947616 98 5946571418 101 68696219 97 8503895777 100 806522438 100 274828469 95 8906131833 97 9340093534 101 366985559 AX gt Data block text format o ooooooooooooo Figure 3 188 Trace file TRC structure File Header The file header contains the following information Required means that the item is prerequisite for displaying waveform XNum Required Represents the number of data in the data block XRightLabel Represents the label displayed on the right of the horizontal axis Span span when XLeftLabel is Center center frequency or Stop stop frequency when XLeftLabel is Start start frequency XStart Required Represents the minimum left edge of the horizontal axis XScale Required Represents the scale of the horizontal axis XUnit Represents the unit of the horizontal axis fixed to Hz ZNum Required Internal use only fixed to 1 YStart Required Represents the minimum botto
145. Channel Select is set to Man manual Range 150 to 30 dBm default 0 dBm Channel Bandwidth Defines the frequency window occupied with the reference channel see Figure 3 16 This setting is available when Ref Channel Select is set to Auto Measurement Filter Shape Selects a measurement filter shape m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian m Nyquist m Root Nyquist This setting is available when Ref Channel Select is set to Auto Rolloff Ratio Enters the roll off ratio when the Measurement Filter Shape is Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 This setting is available when Ref Channel Select is set to Auto Limits Sets the pass fail limits for the measurement Press this side key to open the limits editor For more information refer to Editing the Measurement Limits on page 3 16 Scroll Table Vertically scrolls the limit table displayed on the bottom of the screen RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Figure 3 16 shows an example of the spectrum emission mask measurement
146. Channel Stop gt Span Trig C RBW Amplitude FFT Acquisition Trace Analysis Avg Nr Figure 1 Menu keys RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual View Utility Mode DPX Select Preset Demod Seal Peine Input Load ines _ System Print J Marker __ Macro Appendix A Menu Tree Settings Menu 1 of 3 S A Mode except Real Time S A Span Frequency Channel Amplitude Acquisition A 2 Analysis Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq Channel Channel Table Center Freq Step Same As C F Center Freq Step Same As Span Step Size Span Start Freq Stop Freq Ref Level Auto Level RF Atten Mixer RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Vertical Scale Vertical Units Corrections None CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 RL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 FL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 FL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 RL CDMA2000 IMT2000 FL CDMA2000 IMT2000 RL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND FL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND RL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS FL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS RL CDMA2000 700MHz Cellular FL CDMA2000 700MHz Cellular RL CDMA2000 N A Cellular FL CDMA2000 N A Cellular RL CDMA2000 N A PCS FL
147. Define key The following items are the same as the RF carrier measurement Refer to page 3 80 Show Views Overview Content Subview Content RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 91 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RF Envelope FSK Pulse Measurement 3 92 Edge t Selects an edge number index number of the measurement table for displaying a waveform on the main screen The edge number is assigned to the rising falling edge of each pulse Refer to page 3 88 Figure 3 68 Guidelines Selects whether to display the guideline red along with the waveform in the main view m On Default Displays the guideline m Off No guideline is displayed Scroll Table Scrolls the measurement table in the main view horizontally Changing the Vertical Unit The unit is W watts by default for the vertical axis of the graph displayed in the main view You can also select dBm and V volts using View Scale Lines Scale Unit NOTE The measurement table in the main view always displays the results for waveform data with the default unit of W Selecting the unit does not affect the table contents Measures time attributes for each envelope on the Interrogator to Tag or Tag to Interrogator signaling and displays the measurement table with the amplitude versus time waveform The RF Envelope measurement switches to the FSK Pulse measurement with one of the following settings in the Meas Setup menu m Standard Type is se
148. EE802 11a CDMA2000 KOREA PCS RL IEEE802 11b g CDMA2000 700MHz Cellular FL NMT450 DL CDMA2000 N A 700MHz Cellular RL NMT450 UL CDMA2000 N A Cellular FL PCS1900 DL CDMA2000 N A Cellular RL PCS1900 UL CDMA2000 N A PCS FL TD SCDMA CDMA2000 N A PCS RL W CDMA DL CDMA2000 NMT450 20k FL W CDMA UL CDMA2000 NMT450 20k RL FL Forward link RL Reverse link UL Uplink DL Downlink 3 Press the Channel side key and select a channel number For example when selecting channel 10551 in the W CDMA downlink table the center frequency is automatically set to 2 1102 GHz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Frequency and Span Using the Marker and Peak Search You can use the search function to position the marker on the spectrum peaks and then set the center frequency to the frequency at the marker as shown in Figure 3 97 In S A Mode You can set the peak spectrum to the center frequency using the marker search functions when the measurement mode is S A spectrum analysis 1 Display the spectrum on the screen 2 Press the Peak key on the front panel The maximum peak spectrum is detected and the marker is moved to that point Use the arrow keys lt gt A V to move the marker to another peak 3 Press the Marker key and then the Center Freq Marker Freq side key The center frequency is set to the frequency at the marker position Center Freq Marker Freq Center frequency Figure 3 97 Setting th
149. FFT RBW FFT Man RBW RBW Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio for Nyquist and Root Nyquist Extended Res Off On RBW FFT FFT FFT Points FFT Window refer to page 3 185 Extended Res Off On DPX Spectrum RBW Auto Man RBW Value Real Time S A FFT Start Point FFT Overlap FFT Window refer to page 3 185 Figure 3 129 RBW FFT menu structure RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual FFT and RBW Spectrum Analyzer and RBW FFT menu has the following controls in the Spectrum Analyzer and S A with Spectrogram the S A with Spectrogram modes M odes RBW FFT Selects whether to set RBW and FFT parameters automatically or manually m Auto Sets RBW automatically with the span setting The filter shape is set to Gaussian m Man Sets RBW and selects the filter manually with the RBW and RBW Filter Shape side keys m FFT Sets the FFT points and window manually with the FFT Points and FFT Window side keys The result of FFT processing is displayed as is without RBW processing When RBWIFFT is set to Man RBW Sets RBW when Man is selected in RBW FFT Range 2 kHz to 2 MHz the default is 80 KHz RBW Filter Shape Selects the filter from the following four types when RBW FFT is set to Man m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian default m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Ente
150. Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 2 33 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figure 2 42 Figure 2 43 Figure 2 44 Figure 2 45 Figure 2 46 Figure 2 47 Figure 2 48 Menu keys Example menu item display Menu item types Numeric setting menu Changing value with the knob Changing value with the keypad Numeric keypad Step size for the center frequency Changing the step size to the predetermined values Selecting the measurement mode Starting Stopping data acquisition Restoring default settings System menu Displaying versions and options Displaying the Windows XP accessory menu Cable connection Principal power switch rear panel Power switch On Standby Initial screen Frequency span and amplitude settings Menu items for numeric value input Numeric value entry keypad Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 36 MHz Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 20 kHz Setting amplitude Reference level of 10 dBm Status indicator Measurement with a single marker Measurement with the delta marker Searching for the peak Averaging a waveform Comparison display with averaged wave
151. Frequency Span Dispersion The magnitude of the frequency band displayed expressed in hertz or hertz per division FSK Acronym for Frequency Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the frequency of the carrier is varied in accordance with the state of a digital input signal GPIB Acronym for General Purpose Interface Bus the common name for the communications interface system defined in IEEE Std 488 Graticule The calibrated grid overlaying the display screen of spectrum analyzers oscilloscopes and other test instruments Grayed Out An on screen control is grayed out if it is not adjustable Import Bring data into the application from a file of some format other than application native Input Impedance The impedance at the desired input terminal Usually expressed in terms of VSWR return loss or other related terms for low impedance devices and resistance capacitance parameters for high impedance devices Intermediate Frequency IF In a heterodyne process the sum or difference frequency at the output of a mixer stage which will be used for further signal processing Key Contacts A pattern of interlaced fingers on the front panel circuit board that form a contact closure when mated with a conductive pad under a mechanical front panel button Link Connect to a file containing settings or other data to be used by the application Maintain the connection Live Trace Any combination of the A trace
152. Indicates the center frequency All Description Indicates the span Indicates the attenuation of an input signal before it enters the internal mixer Indicates RBW Resolution Bandwidth for S A compatibility with swept spectrum analyzers Refer to FFT and RBW on page 3 179 Indicates NBW Noise Bandwidth instead of RBW when FFT processed data does not go through RBW process Indicates the Trace 1 and 2 trace type Indicates time length of a 1024 point FFT frame It is determined by the span Real Time S A Indicates time interval between FFT frames Refer to FFT Start Point on page 3 183 Demod and Time Indicates time to acquire a block of data It can be set in the Acquisition Analysis menu Interface Maps 2 14 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual uU AU Functional Overview This section provides the operating fundamentals Menu Keys Menu Keys Menu Operations Measurement Basics Setting System Parameters Using Windows XP Menu keys on the front panel shown in Figure 2 11 on page 2 16 are divided into the following five functional groups RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Settings Sets frequency amplitude and time parameters for specified measurement and controls data acquisition Mode Selects a measurement mode View Selects a view content and scales a measurement graph Markers Controls markers Utility Provides system initialization waveform storage facilities instru ment calib
153. M signal Setting the scale in EVM view EVM magnitude and phase error displays Constellation view and error vectors in 1 4x QPSK D8PSK symbol Symbol table Eye diagram view Vector and dot displays for AM AM view Vector and dot displays for AM PM view Setting the scale in PDF view Setting the scale in noisogram view Display line eee Lines menu structure other than Real Time S A Two horizontal lines Two horizontal and two vertical lines Multi display lines Real Time S A mode Lines menu structure Real Time S A 15 rc ye prev Markers menu 5 Measurement with a single marker Using the delta marker to take measurements Measurement with the reference cursor Changing the Interlocked markers Marker movement on the Bitmap trace Functions of the peak search keys Setting the minimum frequency jump Online help for the front panel key Online user 1 Word search using the keyboard Input menu structure 3 202 3 206 3 208 3 209 3 211 3 212 3 213 3 214 3 215 3 216 3 217 3 218 3 219 3 220 3 221 3 222 3 223 3 225 3 227 3 228 3 229 3 230 3 231 3 232 3 235 3 236 3 238 3 239 3 240 3 2
154. Mag Error RMS Root mean square value of magnitude error m Phase Error RMS Root mean square value of phase error Magnitude error Mag Erron Error Vector Magnitude EVM Phase error Phase Error 3 4 movement 10 3 47 movement 11 gt ge 1 4n movement 01 N 1 4 movement 00 Assumed position before movement gt Figure 3 149 Constellation view and error vectors in 1 47 QPSK RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 217 Setting Views Symbol Table Setting Option 21 Only The symbol table shows modulated symbol stream You can display this table in the symbol table analysis in the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 60 View Scale Menu The Scale menu for the symbol table contains the following controls see Figure 3 151 Radix Selects the radix for displaying the table from hexadecimal digit Hex octal digit Oct and binary digit Bin Rotate Sets the value start position The setting range is 0 to 3 This item is invalid in 1 4n QPSK and GMSK modulations because absolute coordinates have no meaning Decoding Start Position Selects the decoding start position for the ASK FSK and GFSK signals with the decoding format of Manchester or Miller Auto Determines the decoding start position automatically Q Starts decoding from the beginning of a symbol m 1 Delays the decoding start position by half a symbol Sequence Selects how to determine the symbol
155. NRZ NRZ L 2 4 or 8 periods PWM Bit Cell 1 out of 4 1 out of 256 SSC High or Low DSC High or Low On Off RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Time Mode Measure Meas Setup Transient IQ versus Time Power versus Time Frequency versus Time Measurement Off CCDF Threshold CCDF Display Gaussian Line Off On Display Reference Line Off On Store Reference Line Reset Measurement CCDF Auto Scaling On Off Phase Noise Signal Source Analysis Option 21 only gt Carrier Threshold Level Real Time Phase Noise Spurious Carrier Bandwidth C N Sideband Minimum Offset Frequency Maximum Offset Frequency Rj Start Offset Frequency Rj Stop Offset Frequency Max Pj Threshold Real Time Phase Noise only Analyze Symmetrical Filter Carrier Tracking r Carrier Threshold Level Real Time Spurious Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Symmetrical Filter Carrier Tracking Scroll Table Real Time Spurious only Analyze Carrier Bandwidth C N Sideband Frequency versus Time gt Freq Settling Threshold Smoothing Factor RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Pulse Measurements r Pulse Characteristics Analyze Upper Lower Off On Off On Off Off Upper Lower Detection Threshold Channel Bandwidth
156. RSA3408B 8 GHz Real Time Spectrum Analyzer User Manual Tektronix 071 2364 02 S User Manual Tektronix RSA3408B 8 GHz Real Time Spectrum Analyzer 071 2364 02 This document applies to firmware version 4 10 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support North America call 1 800 833 9200 m Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area End User License Agreement for Microsoft Software You have acquired a device DEVICE that includes software licensed by Tektronix Japan Ltd TJ from Microsoft Licensing Inc or its affiliates MS Those installed software products of MS origin as well as associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation SOFTWARE are protected by international intellectua
157. RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Level Sets the trigger level Available when the trigger mode is set to Triggered and the source is set to Power or External Table 3 29 shows the setting range Table 3 29 Trigger level setting range Trigger source Trigger level Power Span BW 40 to 0 dBfs in 1 dBfs steps in time domain External 1 5 to 1 5 V in 0 1 V steps Hint for the Power trigger An input signal is FFT processed every frame 1024 points However the displayed data is less than 1024 points refer to Relation between Frame Bin and Pixel on page 3 200 For example 801 bins are displayed when the span is 1 MHz The Power trigger always observes one whole frame 1024 points to determine trigger generation Note that as shown in Figure 3 116 any signal exceeding the trigger level outside the range of 1 MHz of span activates the Power trigger even if no signal exceeds the trigger level within the range of 1 MHz of span 1 MHz span 801 bins Trigger level lt One frame 1024 points Power trigger detection range Figure 3 116 Power trigger detection range Define Mask Option 02 only Creates a trigger mask when the trigger mode is set to Triggered and the source is set to Freq Mask The trigger mask is created in the spectrum view Refer to page 3 171 for details on creating a trigger mask RSA3408B Analyzer
158. Real time phase noise measurement parameters Real time phase noise measurement Settling time displayed in the subview Real time spurious measurement Frequency versus Time measurement parameters Frequency versus Time measurement Frequency and Span menu structure Setting frequency and span Setting the center frequency using Marker Relationship between the frequency and span settings Vector mode and scalar mode 3 82 3 84 3 87 3 88 3 91 3 93 3 94 3 96 3 98 3 99 3 101 3 102 3 103 3 104 3 107 3 108 3 110 3 110 3 114 3 115 3 118 3 122 3 123 3 126 3 128 3 129 3 130 3 132 3 133 3 134 3 136 3 137 3 139 3 141 3 142 3 143 3 144 Table of Contents Figure 3 102 Overrange indicator 3 147 Figure 3 103 The amplitude correction concept 3 148 Figure 3 104 Amplitude correction example 3 150 Figure 3 105 Amplitude correction data input 3 153 Figure 3 106 Amplitude offset 3 155 Figure 3 107 Frequency offset 3 155 Figure 3 108 Amplitude correction setup display 3 156 Figure 3 109 Acquisition Analysis menu structure 3 157 Figure 3 110 Acquisition and analysis parameters 3 159 Figure 3 111 Parameters in the zoom mode 3 160 Figure 3 112 Fr
159. Rolloff Ratio Enters rolloff ratio when Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter is selected Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 An example of the channel power measurement is shown in Figure 3 4 Tekironix RSA 3408B Frequency 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Input Att 20 dB RBW 200 Hz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off Cancel Back dBm Band power marker 10 dB 100 dem Center 100 MHz Integration Bandwidth Span 20 kHz Nyquist 0 5 EZ SEVA Channel Power Density 45 84 dBm Hz 9 82 dBm Channel Bandwidth 4 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Channel Power Channel Bandwidth kHz 4 Figure 3 4 Channel power measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual MEAS SETUP Channel E Bandwidth Hz Measurement Filter Shape Rolloff Ratio 3 5 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 6 ACPR Measurement The power ratio of the carrier signal to the signal appearing in its adjacent frequency band leak signal is measured in the ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio measurement Frequency ranges are set using three band power markers Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the ACPR measurement contains the following controls see Figure 3 5 Main Channel Bandwidth Sets frequency range of main channel Adjacent Channel Bandwidth Sets frequency range of adjacent channel Chan Spacing Sets a frequency interval between two adjacent channels Measurement Filter Sh
160. S A Demod or Time Save Count Limit r Level Frequency Run Channel Stop S A mode except Real Time Span Trig Repeat Amplitude m Mode Repeat Stop and Show Results Mode Triggered Source Save on Trigger Save Count Source Power External Slope Position Define Mask Slope Position Figure 3 114 Trigger menu structure 3 164 Source Freq Mask Continuous Single Real Time S A Demod and Time modes Free Run Triggered Continuous Single Power Freq Mask External Option 02 only On Off On Off Rise Fall Rise and Fall Fall and Rise Select Next Point Set Selected Point X Set Selected Point Y Delete Selected Point Insert New Point Set All Points to Maximum Set All Points to Minimum Reset Mask to Default In Out In and Out Out and In RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Mode Selects the trigger mode The trigger mode determines whether to acquire data with or without triggering Free Run Acquires and displays the waveform without triggering Press the Run Stop key to start data acquisition To stop the acquisition press the Run Stop key again Triggered Set the trigger conditions level slope and position before starting data acquisition by pressing the Run Stop key When the trigger occurs data is acquired and displayed To stop data acqui
161. SA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation Setting Up the Stand To set up the stand place the analyzer on a table Lift the front of the analyzer and pull out the stand until it is perpendicular to the analyzer j A A AY AY X X WY Aa Figure 1 14 Setting up the stand RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation Functional Check The analyzer has a built in calibration signal source with a frequency of 100 MHz and an amplitude of approximately 20 dBm Using this source perform this quick functional check to verify that your instrument is operating correctly 1 Turn on the analyzer 2 Display the spectrum of the calibration signal a Tektronix RSA 3408B Press the S A key on the front panel and then press the Spectrum Analyzer side key Press the Preset key on the front panel to reset the analyzer Press the Input key on the front panel Press the Signal Input Port side key to select Cal100M The spectrum of the calibration signal appears Check that INPUT CAL and FREE RUN are displayed in the status indicator at the upper right of the screen see Figure 1 15 4 INPUT CAL NPUT Frequency 100 MHz RBW 100 kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MH
162. SPAN Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Span Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off 0 Start Freq dBm Hz 99 99M Stop Freq Hz 100 01M 10 dB 100 f dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Span kHz 20 Figure 2 34 Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 20 kHz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Setting Up Amplitude 0 dBm 100 dBm In Figure 2 35 the vertical scale shows the spectrum view set up for 10 dB per division Ref level is the maximum value of the vertical axis and it is set to 0 dBm when the analyzer is powered on Observe the change in the waveform as you change this setting in the following procedure Ref Level setting 10 dB Figure 2 35 Setting amplitude l Press the Amplitude key on the front panel Frequency Run Channel Stop Span Trig Amplitude key Amplitude ju The Amplitude menu is displayed on the right side of the screen Notice that the Ref Level item is available for entering amplitude A Ref Level lt Indicates that the general purpose knob is available dBm v XXX me Numeric value input field RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 37 Tutorial 2 38 0 dBm reference line 2 Observe the changes in t
163. SWITCH When this switch is on the internal standby circuit is energized Refer to page 1 12 for applying power RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 5 Interface Maps 2 6 Side Panel Interface A Figure 2 3 Side panel 1 Indicator Indicates whether the disk drive is active CAUTION When this indicator is lit you must not remove the disk from the disk drive If you do so the data stored on the medium may be destroyed or an error may occur 2 Floppy disk drive A 3 5 inch 2HD 1 44MB or 2DD 720KB disk formatted for MS DOS can be used to save and load data and settings 3 LAN Ethernet connector 10 100BASE T connector When you reboot the analyzer after connecting to LAN the analyzer recognizes the network speed automatically and sets it to 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps You can share resources such as files or disks on the network NOTE The Windows XP default network settings are configured when the instrument is shipped from the factory Contact your system administrator for information about setting network parameters in your LAN For using Windows XP on the analyzer refer to page 2 27 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Interface Maps 4 output connector 15 pin D sub connector female to send the display of this instrument to another monitor NOTE
164. Select Close from the menu The analyzer system program terminates and the Windows XP desktop screen appears Switching from Windows Desktop to the Analyzer View To switch from the Windows desktop screen to the analyzer view display from the task bar select Start Program TEK RTSA The analyzer program starts When you use a mouse to move the pointer to the bottom of screen a task bar appears see Figure 2 25 The task bar contains Start and the analyzer applica tion icons Follow the Windows XP operating procedure and access Windows applications using the Start menu The screen displays the date and time managed by the Windows XP operating system You can use the Windows time setting program to set the date and time RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 27 Functional Overview Tekironix RSA 3408B Frequency 1 5 GHz Span 36 MHz Input Att 15 dB RBW 100 kHz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off 0 dem RSA icon Span 35 MHz Figure 2 25 Displaying the Windows XP accessory menu 2 28 When you move the mouse pointer to the bottom of the screen the task bar appears Task bar RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual D O Tutorial This section provides some basic procedures such as applying power displaying the results of measurements and shutting off the analyzer This section uses default setti
165. Selects the unit to set the Linear Signal Region m dB Default Specifies the Linear Signal Region with a value relative to the maximum power measured in the analysis range dBm Specifies the Linear Signal Region with an absolute power Linear Signal Region Sets a region that should have an ideal AM AM characteristic Generally signal distortion increases with amplitude Linear Signal Region sets the region where the trend is assumed to be linear see Figure 3 51 The analysis is performed with this assumption The region is indicated by blue oblique lines in the main view Range 100 to 50 dB the default is 10 dB Measured power Linear Signal Region setting Linear Signal Region Reference power Figure 3 51 Setting Linear Signal Region Maximum Coefficient Sets the maximum order of the best fit curve polyno mial The polynomial is expressed as follows n Max 15 f x ag ax aux The values of a are shown in the main view see Figure 3 52 on page 3 62 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 61 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode NOTE Constellation is selected for the subview by View Define Subview Content Display Reference Line Determines whether the reference line is visible The reference line represents an ideal AM AM trend line Display Best Fit Line Determines whether the best fit line is visible Linear Signal Region Mask Determines whether the linear signal
166. TRA 100 96 Start 232 ms Scale 3 2 ms Menu Off Analog Demod AM Demod Figure 2 55 Single view display 4 Change the scale a Press the Scale Line key in the View area b Press the View Scale side key c Press the Horizontal Scale side key and change the scale of the horizontal axis see Figure 2 56 Try several settings by turning the general purpose knob observe the changes in the display d Press the Vertical Scale side key and change the vertical axis scale Try several settings by turning the knob observe the changes in the display 2 58 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Tekironix RSA 3408B PAUSE VIEW SCALE rumip umc e ua pero UM imc c I r cup Tz el Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 255 ms Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Input Att 15 dB Auto Scale 4 Amplitude 100 Horizontal Scale m D Horizontal Start s 232m Vertical Scale 9 0 200 20 Vertical Offset Vertical Scale 0 Full Scale default scaling Start 232 ms Scale 800 Lis Horizontal Scale ms 8 lt Horizontal Scale gt Figure 2 56 Scale settings Completing the Complete the measurement with the following procedure Measurement Press the Measure key on the front panel 2 Press the Measurement
167. Use the Run Stop key on the front panel to start or stop data acquisition Frequency Run Channel Stop Span Trig Amplitude RBW Run Stop Starts or stops data acquisition Figure 2 21 Starting Stopping data acquisition If acquisition and measurements are waiting for a trigger or are paused stopped pressing this key will start the acquisition If acquisition and measurements are running pressing this key will stop acquisition and measurements aborting the current acquisition The analyzer saves the settings when it is turned off When you turn on the analyzer it starts with the settings as they were when it was shut down Help Preset EY Input Load J Cal Save Preset key restores default settings for current measurement mode System System gt Reset All to Factory Defaults N restores all default settings for the analyzer Figure 2 22 Restoring default settings m Pressing the Preset key returns the instrument settings to the factory defaults for the current measurement mode Pressing System gt Reset All to Factory Defaults sets all parameters for all measurements and modes to the default values RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Functional Overview Setting System Parameters Help Preset Input Load Cal Save C System 02 Figure 2 23
168. User Manual 3 167 Trigger Slope Selects the trigger slope when the trigger mode is Triggered and the trigger source is External m Rise The trigger occurs at the rising edge of the trigger signal m Fall The trigger occurs at the falling edge of the trigger signal m Rise and Fall The trigger occurs at the rising edge of the trigger signal to acquire the first block and at the falling edge to acquire the next block The rising and falling edges alternate at each block acquisition m Fall and Rise The trigger occurs at the falling edge of the trigger signal to acquire the first block and at the rising edge to acquire the next block The rising and falling edges alternate at each block acquisition When using a trigger mask Option 02 only When the trigger source is set to Freq Mask for using a trigger mask the following selection items are available In The trigger occurs when an input signal exits the blue area of a trigger mask and enters the black area m Out The trigger occurs when an input signal exits the black area and enters the blue area of a trigger mask m Inand Out The analyzer triggers with In to acquire the first block and Out to acquire the second In and Out alternate at each block acquisition Use the acquisition history control to view alternate In Out blocks m Out and In The analyzer triggers with Out to acquire the first block and In to acquire the second In and Out alternate at each block ac
169. User Manual 3 231 Display Line Lines Menu The Lines menu for the Real Time S A mode has different controls between the spectrum and spectrogram view The settings are shown in the lines readout at the upper right of the view see Figure 3 161 Spectrum view ga M View Lines Amplitude Line Off On Amplitude Line Offset Amplitude Line Interval Frequency Line Off Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval View Lines Readout Off On Spectrogram view Time Line Off On Time Line Offset Time Line Interval Frequency Line Off On Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval View Lines Readout Off On Figure 3 162 Lines menu structure Real Time S A 3 232 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Display Line Spectrum View Amplitude Line Determines whether to turn on or off the amplitude display lines The default is Off Amplitude Line Offset Sets the offset of the amplitude reference line Range 100 to 0 dBm the default is 0 dBm Amplitude Line Interval Sets the interval of the amplitude display lines Range 0 to 100 dB the default is 0 dB Frequency Line Determines whether to turn on or off the frequency display lines The default is Off Frequency Line Offset Sets the offset of the frequency reference line Range Center frequency Span 2 Hz The default value is the c
170. Valid frame Dummy frame Dummy frame Valid frame Valid frame Figure 3 186 Adding dummy frames 3 268 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format Band Shows the frequency band that was set when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data MemoryMode Shows the memory mode that was set when the analyzer acquired the data It is necessary only when the analyzer reloads the data FFTPoints Shows the FFT point setting that was set when the analyzer acquired the data This item is always 1024 in the RSA3408B analyzer Bins Shows the number of bins The same value is also entered in bins of each frame header of the data block refer to Frame Header on page 3 270 MaxInputLevel Shows the reference level setting in dBm when the analyzer acquired the data LevelOffset Shows the level offset setting in dB when the analyzer acquired the data CenterFrequency Shows the center frequency setting in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data FrequencyOffset Shows the frequency offset setting in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data Span Shows the span setting in Hz when the analyzer acquired the data BlockSize Shows the block size setting when the analyzer acquired the data ValidFrames Shows the number of frames in the data block This value divided by MultiFrames represents the number of frames that are scanned and synthe sized into one
171. When you use an external monitor connect a VGA cable to the analyzer and to the monitor and then turn on the monitor before you turn on the analyzer 5 USB connectors two ports Connect USB devices such as a mouse keyboard and printer You can connect the devices any time with no setup plug amp play to either or both ports You can also connect a mouse to a USB port on a keyboard see Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 Connecting USB devices RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 7 Interface Maps Using a Mouse and Keyboard Click the menu to select the item You can directly input the gt value with the keyboard You can operate the analyzer using the standard accessory mouse and keyboard instead of the side keys and the front panel keypad The mouse and keyboard operations are as follows Click the menu item instead of pressing the side keys m Ifthe menu item has arrow buttons click them to select the value Span A 2 Click the arrow buttons to adjust the value XXX Figure 2 5 Operation with mouse and keyboard Table 2 1 Key functions of the keyboard Key Purpose Function Numeric keys Numeric input Enter a numeric value in a numeric input field Left Right Caret move Moves the caret in an alpha or numeric input field arrow key
172. ace 1 2 pr gt Number Of Averages Tracen On Freeze Off Reset Average Trace n Type Normal Display Detection Average Number Of Traces to Hold Load Trace n Reset Max Hold Save Trace n MinHold 4 DPX Spectrum onl Number Of Traces to Hold Eno Reset Min Hold Peak Peak Intensity Dot Persistence Off Variable Infinite Persistence Value Max Min Max Min Reset Bitmap Load From File menu Refer to page A 14 Save To File menu Refer to page A 14 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Settings Menu 2 of 3 Real Time S A Demod and Time Modes Frequency Channel Span Amplitude Acquisition Analysis A 4 Center Freq Channel Channel Table Center Freq Step Same As C F Center Freq Step Same As Span Step Size Same as in the S A mode Refer to page A 2 Span Ref Level Auto Level RF Atten Mixer RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Vertical Scale Real Time S A Only Vertical Units Real Time S A Only dBm dBuV V uV W Corrections Amplitude Offset Auto RfAtt Mixer Real Time S A Acquisition Length Spectrum Offset Real Time S A with Zoom Acquisition Length Acquisition History Analysis Length Analysis Offse
173. ack _ View Front Panel Measure Key Button Help View Online User Manual Allows you to select a measurement from the list that is appropriate to the current measurement configuration The knob wil become unassigned when this key is pressed The Spectrum Measurements and Demodulation Measurements alow you to select standard which may add more choices to the soft key menus or change the entre soft key menu to be standard specific Top Back Figure 3 173 Online help for the front panel key m If you selected View Online User Manual Using the front panel keys listed in Table 3 37 select the topic from the contents window on screen see Figure 3 174 The key functions are different in the contents left window than in the descriptions right window 3 246 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Using the Online Help Table 3 37 Front panel key General purpose knob Up key Down key Markers 4 Markers Y Markers lt q Markers p gt Peak Marker BKSP Enter Front panel keys for online help Contents window A v Selects the next topic up Selects the next topic down Moves to the next level up Moves to the next level down Switch the window to operate the cursor Moves to the next level up Function Descriptions window Scrolls the display up or down Selects a topic on top in the window Scrolls the display up Selects a topic on bottom in the window
174. age power of a measured signal exceeds a threshold The analyzer displays the ratio of peak power to average power along the horizontal axis and the probability that the ratio is exceeded along the vertical axis This CCDF analysis function and the real time analysis function allow you to measure the time varying crest factor in the time series for code multiplexing signals such as CDMA W CDMA signals and multi carrier signals such as OFDM signals This function is useful in designing amplifiers for CDMA W CDMA and OFDM CCDF Calculation Process The CCDF analysis obtains the distribution of the amplitude of observed signals and makes a graph of accumulation from the threshold CCDF is calculated using this formula Max SP X X CCDF X SP X Average P Y dY CCDF crest factor 0 where P Probability density of amplitude Max Maximum of amplitude Average Average of amplitude The analyzer processes input signals internally using the following procedure see Figure 3 78 1 Measure the amplitude of the input signal over time 2 Determine the amplitude distribution 3 Obtain CCDF using the above formula Amplitude T PA Apte Figure 3 78 CCDF calculation process 3 104 A x Average Max CCDF A O gt Crest factor gt gt Amplitude 0 X Amplitude Average RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Basi
175. al IQ output connector pin assignment Figure C 2 Definition of the setup and hold time Figure D 1 Detaching the removable hard disk drive 3 260 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Audio measurement items Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Audio HPF Table 3 12 Table 3 13 measurement items Table 3 14 Table 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 3 18 table Table 3 19 Table 3 20 Table 3 21 Table 3 22 Table 3 23 Table 3 24 Table 3 25 Table 3 26 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Span and RBW Key functions of the keyboard Status display Setup display Menu key summary Measurement modes Standard menu in the S A mode Measurement items in the S A mode Limits Setting Menu Items Features of the real time mode Span setting range in the real time mode Standard menu in the Demod mode Communication standard and preset parameters Modulation type and available measurement item Audio LPF Audio de emphasis filter Definition of the Signal Noise amp Distortion Definition of the hum and noise ratio Compatible RFID standards Measurement items for RFID analysis Standard settings Details of the RF envelope FSK pulse
176. al times b Press the marker left key lt Q to move the marker to the next signal peak to the left Try it several times c Using the marker left or right key move the marker to the peak that you want to measure The difference between the two marker positions is shown in the upper left part of the screen see Figure 2 40 2 42 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Tektronix RSA 3408B 2 9 PAUSE SETUP ppm M Hr Frequency 100 MHz Peak value at the selected marker iol Span 20 kHz a Select Marker Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 F2 SNE 99 997 MHz e gt i 62 39 dBm 85 41 z 5190 um a Marker X Positie H 2 lt Marker 1 Peak difference ages Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X 10 dB Reference Cursor f Marker 2 gt Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X 20 an Bm Got Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz of a 2 Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 997 Figure 2 40 Searching for the peak 4 Press the Markers side key to select Off Both markers disappear Using Averaging and Comparison Displays This section describes how to use the averaging function which displays the waveform with reduced noise The averaged waveform can be displayed with the original waveform Averaging Th
177. aled to keep the size of the constellation relatively constant from one update to the next This new scale is then normalized to a unitless scale The Scale menu for the constellation view contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects vector or constellation display see Figure 3 145 m Vector Selects the vector display Signals represented by phase and amplitude such as digitally modulated signals are shown in a polar coordinate or IO diagram The red point indicates the symbol position of the measurement signal and the yellow trace indicates the locus of the signal between symbols The magnitude of the error vector is evaluated by comparing the point where yellow traces are concentrated to the red point The cross marks indicate symbol positions of the ideal signal m Constellation Selects the constellation display It is the same as the vector display except that only symbols of the measurement signal are indicated in red and the locus between symbols is not displayed Marker 1 6875 ms 747 258 m 699 635 m 2 061 Marker 1 6625 ms 698 933 m 639 286 m 15 15 2 061 2 061 Vector display Constellation display Figure 3 145 Vector and constellation displays RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 213 Setting Views 3 214 Phase Multiplication For CPM Continuous Phase Modulation only Select the multiplication constant for the phase
178. alyzer User Manual 3 197 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Averaging Example This section shows how to use averaging and the compared display in the S A mode except Real Time S A Performing Averaging Average and display Trace 1 l Display the spectrum of the measurement signal 2 Pause data acquisition to simplify the operation If you are acquiring the data in the continuous mode press the Run Stop key to stop the acquisition Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel Press the Select Trace side key to select 1 Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select Average for example Press the Number of Averages side key and set 64 for example Press the Run Stop key to acquire data 9 n aA n D Press the Reset Average side key to perform averaging again The averaged waveform is displayed on screen see Figure 3 136 The average count is indicated in the right top portion of the screen Tekironix RSA 3408B ax 35 2 TRACE AVG Frequency 100 MHz RBW 500 Hz Cancel Back Span 100 kHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Select Trace Input Att 20 dB Trace2 Off Select Trace 0 Selects Trace 1 or 2 to control 0 Average count Trece d dBm g Trace 1 or 2 Cn Freeze Off Selects the display method Trace 1 Type Trace 1 or 2 Type Average Selects the trace type Average here Number Of Averages Number of Averages 4 Sets how ma
179. ame 5 RF input connector Connects an input signal Type N type connector Input impedance 50 Q Maximum capacity of non breakdown input 30 dBm N CAUTION Do not apply a signal of more than 30dBm to do so may damage the instrument 6 Preamplifier power source Provides power source for a preamplifier optional accessory Refer to the RSA3408B Technical Reference for specifications 7 General purpose knob Changes a setting 8 Up Down keys Increases or decreases a value Refer to page 2 20 for changing a setting using the general purpose knob or the up down keys 9 Power switch On Standby Refer to page 1 12 for applying power 10 LED Green on operating orange on standby RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 3 Interface Maps o o Figure 2 2 Rear panel 2 4 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Interface Maps Rear Panel Interface 1 REF IN OUT connector A 50 BNC connector for reference signal input output to synchronize the analyzer with other instrument 2 I I INPUT connector Option 03 only A 50 Q BNC connector for I signal differential input When using one connector as a single ended input terminate the other end in 50 3 Q Q INPUT connector Option 03 only A 50 Q BNC connector for O signal differential input When using one connector as a single en
180. ame cycle 3 161 Figure 3 113 Seamless acquisition 3 161 Figure 3 114 Trigger menu structure 3 164 Figure 3 115 Trigger position 3 166 Figure 3 116 Power trigger detection range 3 167 Figure 3 117 Trigger level and slope 3 168 Figure 3 118 Acquiring and displaying data by Trigger and Repeat modes eser e eR ORI EUER RARUS 3 169 Figure 3 119 Trigger mask 3 171 Figure 3 120 Filling operation for creating a mask 3 172 Figure 3 121 Example mask 3 173 Figure 3 122 Default mask 3 174 Figure 3 123 Changing the position of Point A 3 174 Figure 3 124 Changing the position of Point B 3 175 Figure 3 125 Adding Point 3 175 Figure 3 126 Trigger point display eese 3 177 Figure 3 127 Synchronous operation of two RSA3408B analyzers 3 178 Figure 3 128 FFT and RBW process 3 179 Figure 3 129 RBW FFT menu structure 3 180 Figure 3 130 Process flow when RBW FFT FFT 3 182 Figure 3 131 FFT overlap 3 183 Figure 3 132 Generating spurious signals by increasing the number of FFT
181. an and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual a Set frequency by pressing the Frequency Channnel key on the front panel b Setspan by pressing the Span key on the front panel c Setamplitude by pressing the Amplitude key on the front panel Set analysis range by pressing the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel Refer to page 3 34 for information about setting the analysis range Set the measurement parameters by pressing the Meas Setup key on the front panel For the Meas Setup menu refer to the following sections 3 41 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode ASK FSK Modulation Analysis Basic ASK and FSK modulation analysis can be performed using Analog Modulation Analysis This analysis includes frequency deviation and depth of modulation Typical settings are as follows m ASK signal measurement Measurement item AM Demod Spal 500 KHz Acquisition Length 10 24 ms m FSK signal measurement Measurement item FM Demod Span eR ed 500 kHz Acquisition Length 10 24 ms Vertical Scale 1 6 MHz deviation scale 800 KHz The following pages show examples for each measurement item Refer to page 3 203 for information about setting scale and formatting each view Refer to page 3 38 for information about changing the overview and subview 3 42 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation
182. an instrument or component Equipment Recycling Production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product s end of life In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce the use of natural resources we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately This symbol indicates that this product complies with the applicable European Union requirements according to Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment WEEE and batteries For infor mation about recycling options check the Support Service section of the Tektronix Web site www tektronix com Mercury Nortification This product uses an LCD backlight lamp that contains mercury Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations Please contact your local authorities or within the United States refer to the E cycling Central Web page www eiae org for disposal or recycling information Perchlorate Materials This product contains one or more type CR lithium batteries According to the state of California CR lithium batteries are classified as perchlorate materials and require special handling See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate for additional informatio
183. and or the B trace when SAVE A is off RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary Load Copy settings or other data from a file but don t maintain any connection with that file Local Oscillator LO An oscillator which produces the internal signal that is mixed with an incoming signal to produce the IF signal Marker A visually identifiable point on a waveform trace used to extract a readout of domain and range values represented by that point MAX HOLD Digitally stored display mode which at each frequency address compares the incoming signal level to the stored level and retains the greater level In this mode the display indicates the peak level at each frequency after several successive sweeps MIN HOLD A spectrum analyzer feature which captures the minimum signal amplitude at all displayed frequencies over a series of sweeps Modulate To regulate or vary a characteristic of a signal Modulating Signal The signal which modulates a carrier The signal which varies or regulates some characteristic of another signal Modulation The process of varying some characteristic of a signal with a second signal Noise Unwanted random disturbances superimposed on a signal which tend to obscure it Noise Floor The self noise of an instrument or system that represents the minimum limit at which input signals can be observed The spectrum analyzer noise floor appears as a grassy baseline in the display even when no signal is
184. ange as the offset from carrier frequency Setting value 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz or 100 MHz default Rj Start Offset Frequency Sets the random jitter measurement start frequency as the offset from carrier frequency Setting range 10 Hz to Rj Stop Offset Frequency set value default 10 Hz Rj Stop Offset Frequency Sets the random jitter measurement stop frequency as the offset from carrier frequency Setting range Rj Start Offset Frequency set value to 100 MHz default 100 MHz NOTE The integrated phase noise and random jitter will be calculated if the frequency range from Rj Start Offset Frequency to Rj Stop Offset Frequency is within the range from Minimum Offset Frequency to Maximum Offset Frequency RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 121 Time Analysis Time Mode Max Pj Threshold Sets the threshold level to determine periodic jitter by using the C N value averaged by the Median filter the yellow trace in the lower view as the reference A signal whose C N value dBc Hz is larger than the threshold is regarded as a periodic jitter The maximum periodic jitter in the analysis range is shown in the measurement results see Figure 3 87 Setting range 1 to 50 dB default 10 dB Power Carrier Bandwidth Maximum Minimum Minimum Maximum Offset Offset Offset Offset Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Upper view D lt gt C N Sideband C N Sideband Lower Upper Frequ
185. ange centered at the carrier standard signal peak in which spurious signals are not to be detected to avoid false recognition of spurious signals see Figure 3 14 Range 0 to Span 2 Hz default 0 Hz Spurious Threshold Sets the threshold for detecting spurious signals see Figure 3 14 Enter the value relative to the peak of standard signal Range 200 to 30 dBc default 70 dBc Excursion Sets the deviation amount of amplitude that is considered to be spurious see Figure 3 14 If a signal with amplitude larger than the Excursion exceeds the Spurious Threshold it is considered to be spurious Range 0 to 30 dB default 3 dB Scroll Table Horizontally scrolls the spurious table displayed in the lower part of the screen Up to 20 spurious signals are displayed Ignore Region r Standard signal peak Signal Threshold Spurious Threshold Excursion Normal signal Spurious signal Figure 3 14 Setting up spurious signal measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Figure 3 15 shows an example of spurious signal measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B 2 2 MEAS SETUP Tr s P Frequency 2 GHz RBW Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Signal Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off dBm Ignore Region dBm p LJ Spurious Threshold dB 80 Excursion dB Scr
186. annot be seen on a swept spectrum analyzer A DPX Spectrum indicates how traces change in two ways First it uses color grading to show how often a particular signal occurs Second it uses persistence to keep events visible in the display allowing newer events to be compared to older events The DPX Spectrum display works by using a two dimensional array to accumu late data points for the display As shown in the Figure 3 18 input signal data after A D conversion go through the proprietary DPX engine to compute more than 50 000 FFTs per second These results are written to the pixel buffer memory Each time a trace writes to a point on the display a counter in the array is incremented A color is assigned to each point in the display based on the value of its counter Thus as acquisitions occur over time a colored waveform the Bitmap develops on the display that shows how frequently a display point has been addressed DPX engine Time domain data gt after A D conversion gt FFT gt buffer gt Display color grading memory Pixel histogram 50 000 spectrums per second Figure 3 18 DPX process flow Displaying the DPX Use the following steps to display the DPX spectrum Spectrum Press the DPX key on the front panel Or press S
187. anual Installation Restarting the Analyzer When the analyzer operates abnormally use the following procedure to turn the analyzer off and on again NOTE When the analyzer operates abnormally it will not be shut down by turning off the front panel power switch alone Make sure that the front panel power switch is in the turned off position Turn off the principal power switch on the rear panel Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn on the principal power switch again Eus c adc Turn on the front panel power switch When Scan Disk Appears If the analyzer was not shut down properly Windows Scan Disk may run when you turn on the analyzer When the Scan Disk screen appears wait until the Scan Disk is completed If an error is detected refer to the Windows manual for treatment For more information on accessing Windows on the analyzer refer to Using Windows XP on page 2 27 When the Display It is a characteristic of the LCD Liquid Crystal Display panel to sometimes Brightness Is Not Even have uneven brightness dead pixels dots that never turn on or stuck pixels dots that always stay on This is neither a malfunction nor a defect and not a cause for repair or exchange Restoring the Instrument Refer to Appendix E Restoring the Instrument Operating System Operating System RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 21 Installation Backing Up User Files Using LAN You should back up your user files on a reg
188. any center frequency to 0 Hz A decimating filter composed of FIR Finite Impulse Response filters changes the span by effectively reducing the sampling rate It allows extremely accurate filtering with minimal spurious emissions The data streams from the digital down converter are then divided into frames and saved in the data memory Option 05 provides the digital IO data output from the rear panel connectors to store and analyze on an external PC Option 02 provides a real time digital trigger function that monitors the frequency spectrum for the occurrence of specific events A trigger mask is used to set conditions for trigger The FFT processor performs high speed calculations to create extended trigger signals The FFT processor performs 1024 point complex FFT at high speed to create extended trigger signals The FFT processor consists of an input buffer FFT calculation DSP output buffer and timing control circuit Performing a 1024 point complex FFT at 10 times per second allows the trigger to operate in real time in spans up to 36 MHz Because the trigger comparator is continuously operating at the maximum rate no events will be missed The pre trigger and post trigger positions can be set as needed events before and after the trigger event can be measured RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Product Overview Data Memory high speed 64 MB standard SDRAM stores spectrum data It is expanded to 256 MB with Option 02 For each
189. ape Selects a filter shape from these types m Rect Rectangular m Gaussian m Nyquist m Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Enters rolloff ratio when Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter is selected Range 0 0001 to 1 default value 0 5 Lower3 Lower2 Lower Main Upperi Upper2 Upper3 a Main Chan Bandwidth gt gt gt cc gt gt Adj Chan Bandwidth Adj Chan Bandwidth gt gt e gt lt gt Chan Spacing Figure 3 5 ACPR measurement band power markers Figure 3 6 shows an example of the ACPR measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode C N Measurement Tektronix RSA 3408B 0 MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Main Channel Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Bandwidth Hz 2k 0 Adjacent Channel dBm Bandwidth Hz Fr 3 Chan Spacing 2 8k 10 cal dB Measurement Filter Shape 1 Nyquist Rolloff Ratio d pV wnd Ee Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Main Chan BW 2 kHz Main Chan Power 9 84 dBm Adj Chan BW 2 kHz Chan Spacing 2 8 kHz Lowerl ACPR 66 01 dB Upperi ACPR 70 15 dB Lower2 ACPR 75 08 dB Upper2 ACPR 75 66 dB Lower3 ACPR 75 13 dB Upper3 ACPR 75 5 dB
190. aracter ABC DEF s Unlock 7 8 9 GHz P GHI JKL MNO ms 4 5 6 MHz PQRS TUV WXYZ us 1 2 3 kHz amp Lock msidBm Next 0 p Hz Caps Lock key and are not available Figure 3 184 Alphanumeric keypad 3 262 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations Procedure To enter a new name SAMPLE use the following steps 1 Press the Filename side key The cursor appears on the left end in the text box Filename I Press the PQRS key on the keypad four times to enter S Filename 5 Press the ABC key on the keypad once to enter Filename SAI Press the MNO key on the keypad once to enter M Filename SAMI Enter the remaining characters in the same way Filename SAMPLE1 If you make a mistake you can correct it any time before pressing the Enter key by repeatedly pressing BKSP the backspace key until the incorrect character disappears and then typing the correct value If you want to restart from the beginning press the Cancel Back top side key You can also move the insertion cursor using the general purpose knob or up down keys RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 263 File Operations Deleting a File You can delete a file using Windows but not using the analyzer menu Refer to page 2 27 for information about using Windows on the analyzer Refe
191. asurement filter from the file Load User Filter Reference Loads the user defined reference filter from the file NOTE For the user defined filter file refer to page 3 280 The parameters for the modulation type refer to page 3 49 of ASK only Auto Modulation Depth Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the modulation depth used to distinguish between the two states of an ASK signal m On Default Automatically calculates the modulation depth for the analysis range and displays the value in the Modulation Depth side key m Off Sets the modulation depth using the Modulation Depth side key Modulation Depth Sets the modulation depth when Auto Modulation Depth is Off Range 0 to 100 The parameters valid for the modulation type refer to page 3 49 of ASK FSK and GFSK Decoding Format Selects the method used to decode data bits from each symbol m NRZ default m Manchester m Miller The parameters valid for the modulation type refer to page 3 49 of GFSK FSK 4FSK 8FSK and 16FSK Auto Frequency Deviation Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the frequency deviation used to distinguish between the digital values of a signal On Default Automatically calculates the frequency deviation for the analysis range and displays the value in the Frequency Deviation side key m Off Sets the frequency deviation using the Frequency Deviation side key Frequenc
192. ata from a file Save Trace 1 2 Saves trace data to a file Refer to File Operations on page 3 251 for details on saving loading data to from a file Real Time S A Mode The Trace Avg menu has the following controls in the Real Time S A mode Trace Type Selects the trace type from the following two m Normal Displays spectrum normally m Average Displays averaged spectrum trace Use the Number Of Averages side key to specify the average count In each acquisition of a block of data the analyzer takes traces as many as specified with Number Of Averages from the trigger point to perform the RMS averaging Number Of Averages Specifies the average count Setting range 1 to 1000 default 20 Audio Measurements The Trace Avg menu has the following controls in the audio measurements Option 10 Only Trace Type Selects the trace type from the following three m Normal Displays spectrum normally m Average Displays averaged spectrum trace Use the Number Of Averages side key to specify the average count For each acquisition of a block of data the analyzer takes traces as many as specified with Number Of Averages from the trigger point to perform the RMS averaging RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 195 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Demod and Time Modes Except Audio Measure ments m Hi Res Selects the high resolution FFT which allows you to set the number of FFT points from the basic 1024 102
193. ate 10 Filterl FilterQ 0 97321 0 01947 0 89559 0 04051 0 77497 0 05942 0 62333 0 07202 0 45524 0 07438 IQ pairs 1 to 1024 of the filter coefficient in time domain 0 2861 4 0 06354 gt Oversampling rate of the filter samples symbol 0 13045 0 01947 2 Figure 3 192 User filter file structure The filter file contains the following variables Rate Specifies the oversampling rate the number of samples per symbol The filter coefficient data will be interpolated by the specified rate FilterI FilterQ Specifies IO pairs 1 to 1024 of the filter coefficient in time domain Rules for Creating a Filter File W Aline beginning with is a comment line W Enter a positive value for the oversampling rate m A decimal number can be expressed by fixed point or floating point For example 0 01 and 1 0E 2 are both valid m 0 zero and 0 comma zero can be omitted For example 1 5 0 1 5 and 1 5 are equivalent Lines with only a comma and blank lines are skipped 3 280 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format Example Filters For your reference two example filters Raised Cosine and Gaussian are shown here both containing 65 data points with the oversam pling rate of 8 Raised Cosine 0 3 Row 1 to 18 Row 19 to 36 Row 37 to 54 Row 55 to 68 Rate 0 0383599 0 0 973215 0 0 0743803 0 8 0 0 0 895591 0 0 0720253 0 Filterl FilterQ 0 047715 0 0 774975 0 0
194. ates that the MaxInputLevel value in the file header was correct m 1 Indicates that the MaxInputLevel value in the file header was too low short lastFrame The analyzer can divide its memory into 100 frames x 40 blocks for example LastFrame indicates the last frame in a block Q Indicates that the frame is not the last in the block m Indicates that the frame is the last in the block unsigned long ticks Shows a time stamp using UnitPeriod in the file header not FramePeriod as a unit time RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 271 File Format Frame Data Calculation of Data 3 272 A frame contains 1024 pairs of I and O data in the time domain in order of data acquisition Definition of Bin The bin is defined by the following structure struct iqBin st short q short i Definition of Frame The frame is defined by the following structure struct iqFrame1024 st struct 19 st iq 1024 IE All the data of amplitude phase I and are transformed to 2 byte signed integers and then written in the file Amplitude The amplitude is calculated using i and q in the IOT file using these formulas i i Offset q q OOffset Amplitude 10 In i i q q In 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel LevelOffset dBm Phase The phase is calculated using i and q in the IQT file using these formulas i i Offset q q QOffset Phase atan2 q i 180 Pi degree l Q I an
195. atibility with measurement data from conventional swept spectrum analyzers see Figure 3 128 Moreover the Real Time S A mode has FFT overlap capability NOTE You can set the FFT and RBW parameters in the S A spectrum analysis mode In the Demod modulation analysis and Time time analysis modes the number of FFT points is always 1024 and the window is always Blackman Harris 4B type However for the pulse measurements in the Time mode you can select Nyquist or Blackman Harris 4B refer to RBW FFT Menu on page 3 113 The Demod and Time modes have no RBW process The adjustable parameters for FFT are m FFT points m FFT window m FFT start point Real Time S A only The adjustable parameters for RBW are m Resolution bandwidth RBW m Filter shape m Roll off ratio for the Nyquist or Root Nyquist filter Frequency domain Time domain data data Measurement after A D conversion i RBW and display Parameters Parameters e FFT points RBW FFT window Filter shape FFT start point e Roll off ratio FFT points is normally set automatically with the RBW setting RBW is normally set automatically with the span setting Figure 3 128 FFT and RBW process RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 179 FFT and RBW RBWIFFT Menu 3 180 Figure 3 129 shows the RBW FFT menu structure Run Stop Trig RBW FFT Trace Avg Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram RBW FFT Auto Man
196. ation analysis and Time time analysis modes contains the following items see Figure 3 110 Acquisition Length Sets the time length to acquire one block M frames The acquisition length is calculated using this equation One block acquisition length M x One frame acquisition length where M is the number of frames in a block One frame acquisition length is determined by span internally For details refer to Specifications in the RSA3408B Technical Reference Acquisition History Specifies the number of the block to display and analyze The latest block is number zero Older blocks have larger negative numbers In most cases the analyzer retains previous acquisitions You can view previous acquisitions by selecting the acquisition history by block number Spectrum Length Displays the time length for FFT processing of the spectrum displayed in the subview It is equivalent to one frame acquisition length determined by Span RBW and FFT points setting Spectrum Offset Sets the beginning of Spectrum Length with respect to the trigger output point Analysis Length Sets the time length of the analysis range in the block specified by Acquisition History Analysis Offset Sets the beginning of Analysis Length with respect to the trigger output point Output Trigger Indicator Determines whether to display the output trigger indicator on the overview Refer to Trigger Point Indicator on page 3 177 For procedur
197. axis Frequency Vertical axis Time Frame No This is like a spectrogram except that the color axis represents C N in dBc Hz C N vs Offset Freq This is the same as the main view in the real time phase noise measurement see Figure 3 90 on page 3 129 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Frequency versus Time Measures changes in frequency A running average of the frequency versus time Measurement waveform is displayed in the main view and the frequency settling time is obtained However the measurement signal must meet the following conditions m The frequency shift does not exceed the threshold at the start and end of the analysis range Frequency hopping occurs only once within the analysis range NOTE The frequency versus time measurement requires at least 2048 samples If the analysis length is set to less than 2046 an error message Analysis Length is too short is displayed Also 1024 samples stable in frequency are required at both the start and end of the analysis range to calculate the average frequency Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for the frequency versus time measurement Freq Settling Threshold Sets the threshold for judging the frequency settling time see Figure 3 93 When frequency deviation exceeds this value hopping is considered to have occurred Setting range 10 Hz to Span default 10 Hz Smoothing Factor Sets the numbe
198. bels referenced to 1 microvolt Decibel dB Ten times the logarithm of the ratio of one electrical power to another Depth of Modulation The difference between the maximum and the minimum of the RF envelope amplitude expressed as a percentage of the maximum RF envelope level Display Law The mathematical law that defines the input output function of the instru ment The following cases apply Linear A display in which the scale divisions are a linear function of the input signal voltage Square Law Power A display in which the scale divisions are a linear function of the input signal power Logarithmic A display in which the scale divisions are a logarithmic function of the input signal voltage Display Line A horizontal or vertical line on a waveform display used as a reference for visual or automatic comparison with a given level time or frequency RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary Display Reference Level A designated vertical position representing a specified input level The level may be expressed in dBm volts or any other units Distortion Degradation of a signal often a result of nonlinear operations resulting in unwanted signal components Harmonic and intermodulation distortion are common types Dynamic Range The maximum ratio of the levels of two signals simultaneously present at the input which can be measured to a specified accuracy Export Save data to a file in a format other than ap
199. c Procedure Follow these steps to perform the CCDF measurement 1 Press the Time key on the front panel 2 Press the CCDF side key 3 Display the measured waveform NOTE Make sure to set the proper frequency and span It is important to set the frequency and the span as close to the measured signal bandwidth as possible and adjust precisely If not modulated signals are not recognized correctly For details about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 a Press the Frequency Channel key on the front panel to set the frequency b Press the Span key on the front panel to set the span c Press the Amplitude key on the front panel to set the amplitude 4 Setthe analysis range by pressing the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel Refer to page 3 34 for details about setting the analysis range NOTE The CCDF measurement does not have Analysis Length and Analysis Off set controls in the Acquisition Analysis menu 5 Setthe measurement parameters described just below by pressing the Meas Setup key on the front panel Single Acquisition In single acquisition mode you can set the total number of accumulated data points with Trace Avg Maximum Points ranging from 2048 to 1055 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 105 Time Analysis Time Mode Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the CCDF measurement contains the follo
200. cal axes indicate frequency and frame number respectively and the color axis represents amplitude Display the spectrogram using the following steps 1 Press the Mode S A key Mode S Akey gt SJA Demod Time 2 Press the S A with Spectrogram side key 3 If no waveform is displayed press the Run Stop key to acquire data The spectrum and spectrogram are displayed concurrently see Figure 2 45 dBm Spectrum gt 40 100 dBm Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz 87 Spectrogram gt 100 dem 0 Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Figure 2 45 Concurrent display of spectrum and spectrogram 2 48 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial 4 Display the spectrum and spectrogram side by side a Press the View Define key SEN CENA Jj Jj Deine 4 View Define key Modifies display format b Press the View Orientation side key to select Tall Tektronix RSA 3408B Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off 0 dBm N n 10 ALL dB i HHL 100 dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz S A with Spectrogram Measurement Off Figure 2 46 Tall display of spectrum and spectrogram Press the View Orientation side key to select Wide RSA3408B Anal
201. cale fixed to dB ZNum Required Internal use only fixed to 1 XStart Required Represents the minimum left edge of the horizontal axis XScale Required Represents the scale of the horizontal axis YStart Required Represents the minimum bottom edge of the vertical axis YScale Required Represents the scale of the vertical axis NBW Specifies RBW Resolution Bandwidth Bitmap Required Indicates that the trace is the bitmap fixed to 1 ROWS Represents the number of data points along the vertical axis on the Bitmap display fixed to 201 COLS Represents the number of data points along the horizontal axis on the Bitmap display fixed to 501 Data Block The normalized number of occurrences is written in integer values for each data point in the order shown in Figure 3 190 from bottom up for each column from left to right on the Bitmap display Bitmap display amp A A 201 points lt o o 1123 501 V 2 501 points Figure 3 190 Data sequence for writing to the Bitmap trace file RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 277 File Format CSV File Format MAT File Format 3 278 The acquisition data files saved in CSV format have two sections At the top of the file is the following header information SamplingFrequency The sampling frequency in Hertz NumberSamples The number of IO samples in the file DateTime When the data was acquired Frequency The center frequency in
202. ccuracy of the amplitude levels of frequency components is improved by reducing side lobe level relative to the main lobe The analyzer supports a total of 15 windows including the major windows mentioned previously refer to Table 3 31 Table 3 31 FFT window and bandpass filter Window Bandpass filter Maximum side lobe bandwidth Equivalent noise Blackman Harris 3 sample A type i Blackman Harris 3 sample B type 1 622 71 dB 1 708538 Blackman Harris 4 sample A type 1 698 76 dB 1 793948 Blackman Harris 4 sample B type Default 1 898 92 dB 2 004353 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 187 FFT and RBW Table 3 31 FFT window and bandpass filter Cont Equivalent noise Window Bandpass filter Maximum side lobe Blackman 1 642 58 dB 1 726757 Hamming 1 302 43 dB 1 362826 Hanning 1 438 32 dB 1 5 Parzen 1 27 27 dB 1 330747 Rosenfield 48 dB 1 90989 Welch 21 dB 1 197677 Sine Lobe 23 dB 1 233702 3 188 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual FFT and RBW Table 3 31 FFT window and bandpass filter Cont Equivalent noise Window Bandpass filter bandwidth Maximum sidelobe poris ith Sine Cubed i 39 dB 1 734891 Sine to the 4 1 85 47 dB 1 944444 Flat Top
203. ccurate measurement of the frequency or accurate measurement of the amplitude of the frequency components Window Characteristics In FFT windows the frequency resolution is inversely proportional to the amplitude accuracy Select a proper window according to the measurement items and characteristics of the signal source Table 3 30 shows characteristics and usages of major windows Table 3 30 Characteristics and usage of FFT windows Rectangular m Suitable for frequency measurement but not m Transient phenomenon or burst signal levels suitable for amplitude measurement before and after the event are roughly same m Same result as measurement without a window Sinusoidal wave with little amplitude variation and stable frequency m Wide bandwidth irregular noise spectrum changes slowly Hamming Hanning m Suitable for frequency measurement m Sinusoidal wave m Inferior in accuracy of amplitude to the rectangu Repeating narrow bandwidth irregular noise lar window m Transient phenomenon or burst signal levels m Frequency resolution of Hamming is slightly before and after the event are remarkably superior to that of Hanning different Blackman Harris m Suitable for amplitude measurement but not m Signal that has one frequency ruling when a high suitable for frequency measurement order harmonic is detected RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 185 FFT and RBW 3 186 Time domain data FFT window Time
204. ces and internet information services The ten connection maximum includes any indirect connections made through other software or hardware which pools or aggregates connections Warranty 2 Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product Parts modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance replaced parts modules and products become the property of Tektronix In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not appl
205. chester NRZ 30 kbps Tag to Interrogator FMO NRZ Interrogator to Tag PIE r ype A 20 us Tari INNZ g kbps Tag to Interrogator to Interrogator FMO NRZ 188 kbps Interrogator to Tag IEEE NRZ 10 kbps Tag to Interrogator NRZ Interrogator to Tag DSB ASK PIE Type C 6 25 us Tari ATH Manchester NRZ 27 7 kbps Tag to Interrogator FMO 26 7 kbps Miller M 2 M 4 M 8 NRZ Interrogator to Tag Modified Miller NRZ 105 9375 kbps Tag to Interrogator Subcarrier OOK Manchester NRZ 105 9375 kbps Subcarrier BPSK NRZ L 4 periods 211 875 kbps NRZ L 2 periods 423 75 kbps RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 85 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Table 3 17 Standard settings Cont Tag to Interrogator Subcarrier BPSK 105 9375 kbps 211 875 kbps 423 75 kbps 180924240 E NEM 212 kbps ASK 15693 2 Interrogator to Tag to Tag 1 out of 4 tout of 4 1 outof256 1 out of 256 Not settable DSC High DSC Low InterogatortoTag ASK PWM 40kbps tat ASK 70 18 kbps 140 35 kbps Manchester FMO NRZ 40 kbps Miller Modified Miller Miller M 2 M 4 M 8 OOK PIE COD T A 20 us Tari PIE C 6 25 us Tari Manchester NRZ 9 6 kbps Miller Modified Miller Abbrev DSB Double sideband SSB Single sideband PR Phase reversal OOK On Off key PIE Pulse interval encoding PWM Pulse Width Modulation SSC Single Subcarrier
206. ck Span 200 kHz Input Att 20 dB IQ versus Time MM Power versis Time 10 Ei dB 10 requency versus dB Time 100 Bm 100 Bm fut dat d MES Start 64 ms Scale 6 4 ms Center 100 MHz Span 200 kHz dBm 10 dB 100 dem Start 64 ms Scale 2 56 ms Measurement Off Transient Power versus Time Main view Power versus Time Figure 3 76 Power variance measurement 3 102 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Frequency versus Time Observes signal frequency change over time Figure 3 77 shows an example Measurement The main view displays the frequency deviation from the center frequency versus time Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum PAUSE MEASURE a eS EE eS EY Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 12 8 ns Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Input Att 20 dB 1Q versus Time a M MM din Power versus Time 10 Bs 10 requency versus dB Time 100 em 1 100 Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 100 MHz Span 1 MHz 800 Hz 160 kHz is 12 8 ms Scale 512 ps Measurement Off Transient Frequency versus Time Main view Frequency deviation versus Time Figure 3 77 Frequency measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 103 Time Analysis Time Mode CCDF Measurement CCDF Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function represents the probability that the peak power above aver
207. coding Format Selects the decoding format Refer to Table 3 17 Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari Selects whether to set the bit rate or Tari automati cally Tari is the parameter for the PIE Type A and C decoding formats W On Detects the bit rate or Tari automatically based on the Bit Rate or Tari set value m Off Default Sets the bit rate or Tari using the Bit Rate or Tari side key NOTE The Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari can be set to On or Off for the four measurements of RF Envelope Constellation Eye Diagram and Symbol Table but it is fixed to Off for the Power On Down measurement When you run the Power On Down measurement these four measurements are also performed at the same time with the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari still set to Off If you want to turn it On to perform the measurements select On for Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari and then press the Analyze side key in each measurement Auto Bit Rate Auto Tari Bit Rate and Tari are invalid for the 15693 2 standard RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 87 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Bit Rate Sets the bit rate Range 1 bps to 51 2 Mbps Refer to Table 3 17 Tari Sets the Tari Range 1 ns to 1 s Refer to Table 3 17 NOTE You must set the bit rate or Tari manually to perform the analysis properly Refer to Setting the Bit Rate Tari on page 3 90 Settling Error Width Sets an error range for determining the settling time See Figure 3 68 Range 1 to 10
208. configuration except the power cord Refer to page G 2 for the power cord options The maximum power consumption is 350 W Refer to Specifications in the RSA3408B Technical Reference for additional information on power and environmental requirements CAUTION Use only power cords that are approved for the country of use Using non approved power cords could result in fire or shock hazard Connecting the Power 1 Plug the power cord into the AC input on the rear panel Cord AC input Figure 1 9 AC Input rear panel 2 Connect the plug of the power cord to a properly grounded outlet 1 12 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation Turning on the Analyzer 1 Turn on the principal power switch on the rear panel Principal power switch Figure 1 10 Principal power switch rear panel Power switch LED When you turn on the principal power switch a voltage is applied to the analyzer standby circuit Make sure the LED next to the power switch on the front panel lights up in orange Turn on the power switch On Standby on the lower left of the front panel The LED next to the power switch changes to green E x
209. creen as shown in Figure 3 163 Delta 2 50625 MHz Ref 97 5 MHz 70 316 dB 78 509 dB 127 54 dBm Hz C d lt Active marker Reference cursor m Lr dB div Prefer i ad M il 2100 Fixed marker Center 100 MHz Span 15 MHz Figure 3 163 Marker display m Single marker mode One marker called Marker 1 indicated by 0 moves on a waveform It is used to measure absolute values Delta marker mode Two markers called Marker 1 and 2 indicated by 0 and move on waveform O and represent an active and a fixed marker respectively They are used to measure relative values RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 235 Marker Operation and Peak Search Markers Menu The Markers menu controls the marker operation and peak search Figure 3 164 shows the menu structure Markers r Select Marker 112 Select Marker X Position Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X 4 Reference Cursor Off m Peak gt Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X S A mode only Fer 4 All Markers Off Peak Search Freq Threshold arker arker Assign Marker X to Trace 1 2 gt j v Setup Demod and Time Transient modes only Peak Search Hor Threshold Reference Cursor to Trigger S A mode L Center Freq Marker Freq R
210. cterization of undesired unknown or interfering signals m Device system design or operational diagnostic measurement m Finding answers to elusive EMI problems m VCO synthesizer design m RFID device characterization m General purpose digital modulation vector signal analysis Option Spectrum monitoring m Radar measurements Audio measurements Option m Characterization troubleshooting and verification of wireless designs Option m WLAN 802 11a b g n m 3GPP Release 5 and 6 m TD SCDMA m cdma2000 1x m cdma2000 1xEV DO m W CDMA m GSM EDGE 1 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Product Overview Real Time Analysis This section explains real time analysis with the comparison of a conventional swept spectrum analyzer and a real time spectrum analyzer Conventional Swept Figure 1 1 is a block diagram of the conventional swept spectrum analyzer Spectrum Analyzer There are two RF input signals in this example The RF signal is converted to IF intermediate frequency by the swept local oscillator IF output goes through a bandpass filter where resolution of the spectrum analyzer is defined Local oscillator Figure 1 1 Concept of the swept spectrum analyzer The filter is swept from Fstart to Fstop See Figure 1 2 Only signals within the filter bandwidth are observed at one point in time Signal A is detected first and then signal B is detected and displayed NOTE An intermitt
211. cy if the interval between two adjacent harmonics becomes less than 8 4 4 bins the harmonic waves overlap each other losing the reliability of calculation results Marker 10 kHz 122 78 dBm 139 78 dBm Hz 72 2 dem 127 8 dem Center 1 25 kHz Span 2 5 kHz Figure 3 61 Interval limit between harmonics RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Hum and Noise Ratio Measures the ratio of the modulation depth AM or the frequency deviation FM under two different conditions The conditions usually tested are with regular modulation and with modulation turned off which shows how much residual AM or FM is present when the modulation is turned off relative to when the modulation is present It is also possible to perform this on an audio non modulated signal measuring RMS voltage using before a filter and after a filter as the two conditions to calculate the ratio You can select the audio filters in the Meas Setup menu Meas Setup Menu The following items are the same as in the Signal Noise and Distortion measurement Refer to page 3 69 Demod Type Audio LPF Audio HPF De emphasis The following item is added for the Hum and Noise Ratio measurement Save as Ref Stores the reference value NOTE At the beginning of the Hum and Noise Ratio measurement input the reference signal to store the reference value by pressing the Save as Ref side key Measu
212. d Peak Search Peak Search The peak search function searches for the peak on the waveform and moves the marker to the peak position Use the Peak and marker left right up down gt A keys on the front panel for peak search Peak gt as Using the Peak Search The peak search keys have the following functions see Figure 3 171 keys y Peak Positions the marker to the highest peak signal Moves the marker lower in frequency to the next signal Moves the marker higher in frequency to the next signal A Moves the marker higher in amplitude to the next signal v Moves the marker lower in amplitude to the next signal Xil All Peak lt gt Positions the marker to the highest Moves the marker lower in frequency to Moves the marker higher in frequency to peak signal the next signal the next signal 21 1 gt I Moves the marker higher in amplitude to Moves the marker lower in amplitude to the next signal the next signal Figure 3 171 Functions of the peak search keys RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 243 Marker Operation and Peak Search 3 244 Setting the Minimum Jump of the Marker The definition of next can be set in the Marker Setup menu using the following parameters Peak Search Freq Threshold S A mode only Sets the minimum frequency jump that will be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down Peak Search Hor Threshold Demod and Ti
213. d Q are calculated using i and q in the IQT file using these formulas i i IOffset q q OOffset IQScale Sqrt Power 10 GainOffset MaxInputLevel LevelOffset 10 20 2 I i IQScale V Q q IOScale V RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format Correction and Extended Correction Data Blocks Dummy Header The correction data block contains gain and phase correction data as one frame of data block in the frequency domain The extended correction data block contains the next lower byte of the correction data When these blocks are added the amplitude and phase are calculated using the following formulas Be careful about the sign for phase correction Amplitude dBm Original data Gain correction data lt lt 8 Extended gain correction data amp 0x000000ff 128 256 Phase degrees Original data Phase correction data lt lt 8 Extended phase correction data amp 0x000000ff 128 256 Definition of Bin The bin is defined by the following structure struct apBin st short a short p Definition of Frame The frame is defined by the following structure struct apFrame1024 st struct apBin st ap 1024 Definition of Extended Correction Data Block The extended correction data block is defined by the following structure struct extendedCorrectionData_st unsigned char a 1024 unsigned char p 1024 The dummy header contains the AS
214. dBc Hz Full Scale Sets the maximum value of the color axis to 0 and the height to 100 dBc Hz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views Color Stop Ii Vertical Size Color Scale Marker 100kHz 103 3 dBe Hz 130 dBc Hz gt Vertical Start y 115 468 dBc Hz 2 956582031 ms 0 Start 100kHz End 18VIHz Horizontal Start Figure 3 156 Setting the scale in noisogram view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Horizontal Stop 3 225 Setting Views 3 226 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual rampe Display Line The analyzer provides a convenient method to determine whether a signal peak is higher or lower than a specified level or whether it falls within a specified range Use the Lines menu to control the display lines The Display Line feature displays horizontal and or vertical line s at the position you specify There are two types of lines horizontal line and vertical line as shown in Figure 3 157 In the S A mode other than Real Time S A you can display one or two of each line You can display the horizontal and vertical lines concurrently The Real Time S A mode has multi display lines function that shows multiple horizontal and vertical lines NOTE The display line is available only in the S A spectrum analysis mode 0 dBm S00MHz 30dBm Vertical line o Horizontal line def mi USE ME GLA M dBm Center 800
215. ded input terminate the other end in 50 Q For connectors 1 2 and 3 above refer to Selecting Input Source on page 3 249 to control the reference signal input output and I O input 4 TRIG IN OUT connector A 50 Q BNC connector for trigger signal input output Refer to page 3 163 for trigger 5 421 MHz IF OUT connector A 50 Q BNC connector for 421 MHz IF Intermediate Frequency output 6 GPIB connector Used to control the analyzer from an external controller Refer to the RSA3408B Programmer Manual for GPIB control 7 DIGITAL IQ OUT Option 05 only MDR 3M 50 pin connectors for generating I and data after A D conversion refer to Architecture on page 1 7 to store and analyze on an external PC For the pin assignment refer to Appendix C NOTE IQ Input option 03 and Digital IQ Output option 05 function connectors are factory installed The functions are enabled by software key code entry The required key code must be accepted by the instrument before you can use these functions Refer to Displaying Versions and Installed Options on page 2 26 for entering the key code 8 ACline connector Connect an AC power cable WARNING The instrument uses the power plug as a disconnecting device N The instrument must be installed where the plug can be easily reached by the operator When you do not use the instrument for a long time or in case of emergency you should unplug the power cord 9 PRINCIPAL POWER
216. e Hi Res Number Of Averages Trace Type Average Extenden Resolution Trace Type Hi Res Off On Expo Repeat Appendix A Menu Tree Settings Menu 3 of 3 S A Mode Measure Meas Channel Power Channel Bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio The arrow indicates the Meas Setup menu corresponding to the measurement item ACPR gt Main Channel Bandwidth Adjacent Channel Bandwidth Chan Spacing Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio C N gt Offset Frequency Carrier Bandwidth Noise Bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio OBW gt Power Ratio Carrier Frequency gt Counter Resolution EBW gt Measurement Level Spurious Signal Threshold Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Scroll Table Spectrum Emission Mask gt Measurement Offset From Channel Inband Spurious Ref Channel Select Auto Man Ref Channel Level Channel Bandwidth Measurement Filter Shape Rect Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist Rolloff Ratio Limits Select column to edit Scroll Table Enable Yes No Beginning Frequency Ending Frequency Measurement Bandwidth Offset from Carri
217. e e NNNM omens speorun anaes page 3 31 en Setting Views page 3 203 Peak Searches for peak on waveform Marker Operation and Peak Search Aya iovelhemanerioiheneapek 0983 298 Marker Sets parameters based on the marker position Input Seleetstheinputsoureee Selecting Input Source page 3 249 Cal Calibratesthe analyzer Calibration page 1 23 System Controls system parameters Setting System Parameters page 2 25 Returns settings to the factory defaults Restoring Default Settings page 2 24 File Operations I Pin Prints the screen image Screen Copy page 3 283 For installing macros contact your local Tektronix sales office RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 17 Functional Overview Menu Operations This section describes basic operations of the analyzer menus and how to select menu items and input numeric values Menu Item Information to nine soft keys can be displayed down the right side of the screen see Figure 2 12 Cancel Back is always displayed at the top and the other eight keys select menu items AMPLITUDE Cancel Back Ref Level i dBm Cancel Back always displayed Returns to the last displayed menu or cancels a partial numeric entry from the keypad Auto Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RFAtE Mixer RF Att dB 20 Mixer Level dBm Nominal 25 gt Opens a menu Vertical Scale d
218. e Free Run mode However indicates the trigger output point when the trigger source is Power and the slope is Rise and Fall Fall and Rise or when the trigger source is Freq Mask Scale 5 12 ms div Time Start 51 2 T indicates the trigger point Figure 3 126 Trigger point display You can use the trigger output to synchronize the analyzer with other instru ments In the Demod modulation analysis and Time time analysis modes O indicating the trigger output time can be also displayed in the Timing field on the overview The default status for O is off Follow these steps to display the indicator 1 Press the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel 2 Press the Output Trigger Indicator side key to select On appears on the overview The trigger output timing is determined by the analyzer hardware so that you cannot change it For the external trigger the output timing coincides with the trigger occurrence For other triggers there is no relationship between the timing of the trigger occurrence and that of the trigger output To connect the trigger output to other instruments use the TRIG OUT connector on the rear panel see Rear Panel on page 2 4 The output specification is H level gt 2 0 V L level lt 0 4V and output current lt 1 mA RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 177 Trigger Synchronous Operation with External Instruments
219. e Noise and Real Time Spurious measure ments only Selecting the Phase Unit The phase unit is set to degrees by default It is possible to select degrees or radians as the unit using the following procedure 1 Press the System key on the front panel 2 Press the Instrument Setup side key 3 Press the Angular Units side key to select degrees or radians 3 120 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Phase Noise Measurement C N Carrier to Noise ratio is measured at the offset frequency from the carrier Jitter is also calculated from the phase noise data Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for Phase Noise measurement see Figure 3 86 Carrier Threshold Level Sets the threshold for carrier detection A signal with amplitude above the threshold is detected as a carrier Setting range 100 to 30 dBm default 20 dBm Carrier Bandwidth Sets the carrier bandwidth Setting range Span 100 to Span 2 default Span 100 C N Sideband Selects the sideband for measuring phase noise m Upper Default Measures the upper sideband m Lower Measures the lower sideband Minimum Offset Frequency Sets the minimum frequency in the phase noise measurement range as the offset from carrier frequency Setting value 10 Hz default 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz or 10 MHz Maximum Offset Frequency Sets the minimum frequency in the phase noise measurement r
220. e center frequency using Marker The frequency set in this procedure may not take effect with all span settings Refer to Frequency Setting Range on page 3 140 In Demod and Time Modes The Marker key is used to set the analysis range when the measurement mode is Demod or Time modulation and time analyses Refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 34 for details In the overview of spectrogram or the subview of spectrum you can use the Center Freq Marker Freq side key as in the S A mode RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 139 Setting Frequency and Span Frequency Setting Range Frequency bands are defined as shown in Table 3 25 based on the analyzer hardware architecture The frequency band is switched automatically by a frequency setting Span setting range depends on the frequency band and the measurement mode S A Demod or Time Table 3 25 Frequency and span setting range Measurement mode Span setting range S A except real time 50 Hz to 40 MHz 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 8 sequence 50 Hz to 3 GHz 1 1 2 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 5 6 8 sequence Real Time S A 100 Hz to 40 MHz 1 2 5 sequence Demod ln 100 Hz to 20 MHz 1 2 5 sequence and 36 MHz In Demod and Time modes the frequency and span settings must meet the following conditions Center frequency Span 2 lt Upper limit of the frequency setting range mode lt 40 MHz Baseband Center frequency Span 2 gt Lower limit of the frequency setting
221. e data is not displayed RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 275 File Format Bitmap Trace File Format 3 276 File Structure File Header The Bitmap trace file have two blocks in the text format as shown in Figure 3 189 XNum 501 XUnit Hz XRightLabel Span XLeftLabel Center YUnit dBm YMiddleUnit dB ZNum 1 XStart 1482000000 0 gt File header text format XScale 36072000 0 YStart 100 0 YScale 100 0 NBW 500592 25 Bitmap 1 ROWS 201 COLS 501 2 32572 3464 0 1638 1638 1638 gt Data block text format 4914 3276 0 3276 1638 Figure 3 189 Bitmap trace file DPT structure The file header contains the following information Required means that the item is prerequisite for displaying waveform XNum Required Fixed to 501 COLS XUnit Represents the unit of the horizontal axis fixed to Hz XRightLabel Represents the label displayed on the right of the horizontal axis Span span when XLeftLabel is Center center frequency or Stop stop frequency when XLeftLabel is Start start frequency XLeftLabel Represents the label on the left of the horizontal axis Center center frequency when XLeftLabel is Span span or Start start frequency when XLeftLabel is Stop stop frequency RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format YUnit Represents the unit of the vertical axis fixed to dBm YMiddleUnit Represents the unit of the vertical axis s
222. e horizontal position EENN Peak Search es A Freq Threshold 2 Assign Marker X to another trace to Trace Assign Marker X to Trace Selects the trace to place the marker 1 2k Got 1 of Span 100 ke fe RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 241 Marker Operation and Peak Search Markers in Multiple Views When you display multiple views on one screen markers displayed in those views are locked together Figure 3 169 shows a concurrent display example of the spectrum and the spectrogram If you move the marker to the left on the spectrum the marker on the spectrogram moves to the left in accordance with that movement Conversely if you move the marker on the spectrogram to the left the marker on the spectrum moves to the left 10 dB 100 dBm EI Center 800 MHz Marker 799 99390625 MHz 27 135 dBm 05 frame Span 100 kHz Markers interlock me Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz Figure 3 169 Interlocked markers Marker Operation in the The marker operation in the DPX spectrum is the same as in the normal DPX Spectrum spectrum display But note that when a marker is on the Bitmap trace it is placed on the most popular amplitude value see Figure 3 170 The marker moves on the most popular amplitude trace as shown in white in this figure Figure 3 170 Marker movement on the Bitmap trace 3 242 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Marker Operation an
223. e key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process Calibrating IF Flatness The IF flatness calibration adjusts the IF intermediate frequency flatness using the internal signal generator It optimizes the flatness of gain and phase within the IF bandwidth automatically This calibration is recommended in digital modulation analysis To run the IF flatness calibration do the following 1 Press the Cal key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate IF Flatness side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 27 Calibration Adjusting Display Brightness Display Brightness Adjust the brightness of the display according to your environment l Press the System key on the front panel see Figure 1 23 System menu SYSTEM Cancel Back Display Brightness 100 Reset All to Factory Defaults Remote Setup Versions and Installed Options Off On Help Preset Input Load PM Cal Save System key System Print Macro Macro Setup Figure 1 23 System menu 2 Press the Display Brightness side key 3 Turn the general purpose knob to adjust the brightness The setting range is 0 to 100 Confirming Performance The electrical characteristics described in the RSA3408B Technical Reference can be checked only by our
224. e left edge c Press the Set Selected Point Y side key and set the vertical position of Point C to four divisions from the top edge see Figure 3 125 Point C Figure 3 125 Adding Point C The trigger mask is stored in the internal memory RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 175 Trigger 3 176 10 If you started with a multi view display return using the following steps a Press the View Define key on the front panel b Press the Show Views side key and select Multi 11 Set the trigger a Press the Trig key on the front panel b Set Slope and Position appropriately 12 Start data acquisition using the Run Stop key The analyzer stops data acquisition when the trigger event occurs The trigger mask is stored in the internal memory for each measurement mode of S A Real Time S A Demod Analog Demod Digital Demod Time Transient and CCDF When you press the Preset key on the front panel the instrument settings are reset to the default only for the currently active mode RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Trigger Point Indicator Overview Indicating Trigger Output In the Demod modulation analysis and the Time time analysis modes is displayed in the Timing field on the overview indicates the trigger occurrence point in the Triggered mode and is used as a reference point for setting the Timing parameters in th
225. e measurement range indicated by the green underline is specified in this view m Main view Displays the measurement result and waveform of the range specified in the overview they may be displayed in separate views In this case level changes of I and signals are displayed as the yellow and green traces respectively in the main view m Subview Displays spectrum as an auxiliary view by default You can specify the range in the overview to create the spectrum for the subview 2 54 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Setting Analysis Range Set an analysis range which will be displayed with a green underline in the overview l Press the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel Acquisition Analysis key an Ded Sets analysis range Measure beg Two vertical green lines appear indicating the analysis range shown in Figure 2 52 2 Press the Acquisition History side key to specify the number of the block to be analyzed Leave it at 0 the latest block its default value 3 Press the Analysis Length side key and specify the time length of the analysis range For example enter 32 ms using the numeric keypad 4 Press the Analysis Offset side key and specify the starting point of the range For example enter 24 ms using the numeric keypad 2 TIMING Acquisition Analysis menu Frequency d Two green vertical lines represen
226. e specified offset from the original amplitude see Figure 3 106 The offset value is set using the menu item Amplitude gt Corrections Amplitude Offset The operation varies slightly between the measurement modes as follows m In the S A mode except real time mode The amplitude offset is effective whenever the amplitude correction is turned on Amplitude Corrections gt Amplitude Table gt On even if the table is not set m Inthe other modes Real Time S A Demod and Time The amplitude offset is always effective The default value is zero If you set the offset to a non zero value a waveform shifts vertically as shown in Figure 3 106 Amplitude of a displayed waveform Amplitude of an acquired waveform Amplitude offset value Amplitude offset Figure 3 106 Amplitude offset Frequency Offset Shifts the correction range by the specified offset with the same correction table see Figure 3 107 The offset value is set using the AMPLITUDE gt Corrections gt Frequency Offset menu item Correction range specified Correction range after the in the correction table frequency offset __ 1GHz 2 GHz Frequency offset 1 GHz in this example Figure 3 107 Frequency offset RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 155 Setting Amplitude Performing Amplitude Correction Erasing Correction Data 3 156 Load an amplitude correction file and acquire input signa
227. easurement Excursion NOTE The harmonics are determined by a multiple of the fundamental wave frequency regardless those three settings The Ignore Region setting affects only the TNHD Total Non Harmonic Distortion calculation result 3 70 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Measurement Screen Figure 3 58 shows an example of the Signal Noise and Distortion measurement for an FM signal Tekironix RSA 34088 41 49 PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 1 5 GHz SpectrumLength 1 5 ms Lancel Back Span 10 MHz i Demod Type Input Att 20 dB Harmonic tag Non harmonic tag yellow red FM 0 NE a memes Audio LPF dem a a None 20 Spectrum E d Audio HPF m 120 2 None Center 125 kHz Marker 10 kHz 9 98 dBm 1 4296 s 0 frame None Harmonics Span 250 kHz De emphasis 57 frame 12 Spectrogram 0 frame Center 125 kHz Span 250 kHz S N 54 63 dB Demod Type FM SINAD 54 63 dB RMS Freq Deviation 7 08 kHz Measurement results gt THD 0 135206 57 38 dB 10 03 ste refer to Table 3 13 TNHD 0048 66 37 dB Dr ee Audio Freq 10 kHz Pk Pk 2 10 03 KHz Go to page 2 of 2 Audio Measurements Signal Noise amp Distor Figure 3 58 Signal Noise and Distortion measurement The detected harmonics and non harmonics are tagged with a colored number on
228. ect Single The marker L1 appears on the screen 3 Rotate the general purpose knob to move the marker to the measurement starting point 4 Press the Marker key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The green line resizes to the specified range Marker key Marker Setup key Figure 3 33 Marker keys RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 35 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Specifying Analysis Range Using the Marker and Reference Cursor You can use the marker and the reference cursor in place of the Analysis Length and the Analysis Offset side keys to specify the analysis range Perform the following steps in place of steps 4 and 5 on page 3 34 1 2 Overview TR 20 28125 ms Reference Cursor Marker Press the View Select key on the front panel to select the overview Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel Press the Markers side key to select Single The marker 0 appears on the screen Rotate the general purpose knob to move the marker to the measurement start point Press the Reference Cursor to Marker X side key The reference cursor appears at the marker position see Figure 3 34 Rotate the general purpose knob to move the marker to the measurement end point Press the Marker key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The green line resizes to the specified range 9 675 dB 0 dBm 10
229. ector Span quse he t e bete es eto ee bee ee precede Sues 3 142 Setting Amplitude 3 143 Amplitude Menu m Beam dream ERI OE Ie Eins 3 143 Over Voltage Input nn 3 147 Amplitude Correction AE e 3 148 Setting Acquisition and Analysis 3 157 Acquisition Analysis Menu ssesseeseee nen 3 157 Seamless Acquisition 2 0 0 0 a nme nennen nen 3 161 Trigger aa eu aw Cle da e n Mte Tel ele iu 3 163 Trigger Menu certae vue eter aca d a at Dinner 3 164 Creating a Trigger Mask Option 02 Only 3 171 Trigger Point Indicator adc mens seta secs eerie an 3 177 Synchronous Operation with External Instruments 3 178 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Table of Contents FFT and RBW ieee a ee rr err arr oe 3 179 RBW FFT Menu acu guae en IA rre b rr 3 180 EET Points a et gelten Re 3 184 PET Window tuae Bod onc nn 3 185 Trace Comparison Display and Average Function 3 191 Irace Avg Menus 2 22 0220 attt Pos e RE PONAT ER pling AR ARN ER E 3 192 Displaying Trace 1 2 seeseeeeeeee eee 3 196 Averaging the Waveform 3 197 Saving Loading Waveform Data 3 200 Trace Compr
230. ed from multiple acquired frames and the frame cycle becomes meaningless Refer to Vector Span on page 3 142 for details RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 161 Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters 3 162 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Triggers determine when the analyzer stops acquiring an input signal and displays measurement results To properly acquire data that you want to measure you need to set up the trigger conditions This section describes the following trigger parameters Mode Selects free run or triggered acquisition Repeat Determines whether to acquire data continuously or singly Source Selects a trigger signal source Level Sets a trigger level Slope Selects the rising or falling edge of a trigger signal Position Specifies a trigger position You must create a trigger mask when triggering in the frequency domain with Option 02 Refer to page 3 171 for creating a trigger mask A T mark with O optionally indicating a trigger point is displayed on the overview in the Demod and Time modes Refer to page 3 177 for information about displaying the trigger point RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 163 Trigger Trigger Menu Use the Trigger menu to set trigger conditions Press the Trig key on the front panel and set the parameters using the following menu items NOTE Except for the Repeat menu item the Trigger menu is available when the measurement mode is set to Real Time
231. eference Cursor to Trigger Output i Time CCDF mode only Demod and Time Transient modes L Peak Search Hor Threshold Analysis Time Marker Time Figure 3 164 Markers menu structure Select Marker Peak Marker Left lt q Right p gt Marker Up A Down V 3 236 Selects which marker is being controlled in the delta marker mode If markers are disabled pressing this key enables Marker 1 Sets instrument parameters based on the marker position s Center Freq Marker Freq Changes the center frequency to match the current marker position Analysis Time Marker Time Demod and Time modes only Sets the origin of an analysis range with the marker in the overview For the detail refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 34 Positions the marker to the highest peak signal Moves the marker lower or higher in frequency to the next signal respectively Moves the marker higher or lower in amplitude to the next signal respectively The definition of next can be set in the Marker Setup menu using Peak Search Freq Threshold or Hor Threshold Refer to Setting the Minimum Jump of the Marker on page 3 244 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Marker Setup Set up the behavior of the markers Select Marker Selects which marker is being controlled in the delta marker mode Same as Markers Select Marker X Position Sets the horizontal position
232. ek Gok Bob u RU ERE 3 238 Peak Search uu 202 oA DE Ae bea o Ee a Re Roe en 3 243 Using the Online 3 245 Displaying the Online Help 00 00 eee eee eh 3 245 Using a Mouse and Keyboard 3 248 Selecting Input 3 249 Menu oe ees sa pei a ds e aus vite is BRON Sh leat leet ah 3 249 File Operations vert a ae 3 251 Mv Dn 3 251 Lboad Save Menu cet eoe os e ber e er S S can 3 252 Saving and Loading 3 254 Entering a File Name 00 R RR ern 3 262 Deleting amp Eile sige ee ber e CR o pe nc ga 3 264 Making Deleting a Directory 3 264 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual iil Table of Contents Appendices Glossary Index Eile E rmat an aues SOURIS Er ee EXEAT UR ag 3 265 Data File Format un een ee 3 266 Trace File Form t he a ee te en ed d ek s 3 274 Bitmap Trace File Format ege Re res 3 276 CSV File Fotima tiee saet eoe ate eins Rent te neh 3 278 MAT File Format seice ee aeea oea een 3 278 Limit Mask File Format ois sceso acia eee a adia eee 3 279 User Filter File Format sies essee a 3 280 Screen Copy even ERE ER i ea I Sr Vu S sl 3 283 Print 2 Dh Pie Rese beet ies
233. eld at the bottom of the overview indicates the contents of the main view and the subview as well as the trigger point For information about the trigger point refer to Trigger Point Indicator on page 3 177 Main view Displays the measurement results and waveform for the range specified by the green horizontal line in the overview Some measurements show the results and waveform separately on the right and left sides of the main view Subview Displays the spectrum default The FFT processing range is indicated by the pink horizontal line shown in the overview Overview Subview The subview displays the spectrum for the range indicated by the pink horizontal line Timing indicator Timing Start 51 2 Mis T indicates a trigger point 500 m E nii TW dBm M ms div Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz The main view displays the measurement result and waveform for the range indicated by the green horizontal line Scale 643 75 pus div Start 32 3 ms Main view Figure 3 31 Demod mode screen RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 33 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Setting the Analysis The analysis is performed for the range specified in the overview see Fig Range ure 3 32 and then the measurement result and waveform are displayed in the main view Set the analysis range after data acquisition with the following procedure using the Acquisition Analysis menu
234. ement This measurement performs FFT for the analysis range specified in the overview On specifying the analysis range refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 34 Figure 3 43 shows the pulse spectrum measurement The main view shows the pulse spectrum FFT for the analysis range The pulse spectrum measurement has no Meas Setup menu items Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum Cancel Back S Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 80 Span 15 MHz Input Att 20 dB 10 dBm 10 dB 110 dem Timing Start 32 ms Scale 3 2 ms Center 1 GHz Span 5 MHz Li M aa l w Center 1 GHz Span 5 MHz Analog Demod Pulse Spectrum FE Se Main view Pulse spectrum Figure 3 43 Pulse spectrum measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual FFT for the analysis range specified in the overview MEAS SETUP 3 47 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Digital Modulation Analysis Option 21 Only 3 48 You can select the following measurement items using the Measure key when you select Digital Demod in the Demod menu Constellation EVM IO Frequency versus Time Power versus Time Symbol Table Eye Diagram AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF FSK Deviations page 3 56 page 3 57 page 3 58 page 3 59 page 3 60 page 3 60 page 3 61 page 3 63 page 3 64 page 3 65 page 3 66 Refer to Appendix B for digital demodulation symbol mapping RSA3408B A
235. ement point is at the beginning of the pulse on time Measurement Filter Selects the measurement filter applied to time domain I O data for each pulse None no filter m Gaussian Filter Bandwidth Sets the bandwidth for the Gaussian measurement filter Range Span 10 to full span default 3 6 MHz Filter Parameter Sets the o BT value for the Gaussian measurement filter Range 0 0001 to 1 0 default 0 35 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Frequency Recovery For the Pulse Pulse Phase and the Frequency Deviation measurements only Selects the frequency correction method W Ist Sets the correction value automatically using the first pulse in the analysis range The value is displayed in the Frequency Offset side key m User Sets the correction value using the Frequency Offset side key described below m Off Default Disables the frequency correction Frequency Offset Sets the frequency correction value when you select User in Frequency Recovery described above Measurement Screen The measurement waveform is displayed in the subview with the yellow lines bold lines in Figure 3 85 on page 3 118 indicating the measurement points Also the pulse detection threshold Meas Setup Detection Threshold is shown with the green arrow These guidelines can be turned on or off by View Define Guidelines RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 117 Time Analysis Time Mode detection thre
236. ement with a single marker 3 238 Span 15 kHz 99 999 MARKER SETUP Cancel Back Select Marker JN Marker X Positic is er X Posi i Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor Off Selected Marker off Step Size Marker X 15 525 Go to page 2 of 2 Marker X Position Changes the marker horizontal position using the general purpose knob or the numeric keypad Markers Enables one two or no markers Single is selected enabling marker 1 only RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Measuring with the measure differences in amplitudes or frequencies using the delta marker Delta Marker follow these steps l Press the Maker Setup key on the front panel 2 Press the Makers side key to select Delta Marker 1 and 2 are displayed with the two markers overlapping each other Select Marker is set to 1 Marker 1 by default Note that the Marker X Position menu item is already selected 3 Rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the active marker to the reference point 4 Change the active marker by pressing the Select Marker side key to select 2 5 Rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the active marker to the measurement point As shown in Figure 3 166 the marker readout is shown in the top le
237. en the current and the previous symbols as shown in Table 3 36 Table 3 36 Symbol value of CPM Phase difference Example Modulation index h h Modulation index 4 16 5 16 Symbol value 3h or 3h 12 16 x or 15 16 x 3 hy or hs 4 16 x or 5 16 x 2 h or ho 4 16 x or 5 16 x 1 3h or 3ha 112 16 x or 15 16 x 0 The eye diagram shows I or Q signal that is triggered on a clock signal aligned with the symbol rate representing time along the horizontal axis and amplitude or phase along the vertical axis You can display this diagram in the eye diagram analysis in the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 60 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 219 Setting Views View Scale Menu The Scale menu for the eye diagram contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects the vertical axis of the eye diagram see Figure 3 152 m Default Displays I signal level on the vertical axis m Q Displays Q signal level on the vertical axis m Trellis Indicates phase on the vertical axis Eye Length Sets the number of symbols displayed on the horizontal axis The time required for movement between symbols is defined as 1 one Range 1 to 16 the default is 2 Marker 164 375us 0 722 15 300 Os 22 153873 Lis Marker 164 375 5 493 859deg 95 dea 99 Trellis deg
238. ence point 4 Press the Reference Cursor to Marker X side key to display the cursor at the marker position Demod and Time modes only On the overview you can also place the reference cursor at a trigger output position with the Reference Cursor to Trigger side key 5 Press the Marker X Position side key and rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the marker to the measurement point Active marker readout relative 020 PAUSE L1 LL Frequ to the reference cursor RBW 2 Reference cursor readout Cancel Back Span Trace 1 l Select Marker Trace 2 Select Marker 2 R 3 kHz Ref 99 995 MHz i 2 i i 55 415 cB 280 49 dBm 103 5 Bm HA Selects the active marker for which E Marker X the marker readout is displayed dBm Hz Markers Marker 1 Off Single Delta Reference Cursor Reference Cursor to Marker X Enables the reference cursor 10 dB Reference Cursor A Off Reference Cursor Off DE Turns off the reference cursor Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X X cursor 15 625 22100 Se asl Bm Got 2 Center 100 MHz Span 15 kHz of Sus Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 998 Figure 3 167 Measurement with the reference cursor 3 240 RSA3408B Analy
239. ency C N measurement range displayed in the lower view CN A Rj Start Offset Rj Stop Offset Frequency Random jitter Frequency measurement range lt gt Lower view m gt Offset frequency Periodic jitter Current trace Averaged trace utl displayed in green by the Median filter displayed in yellow Max Pj Threshold Figure 3 86 Phase noise measurement parameters 3 122 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Figure 3 87 shows an example of the phase noise measurement The Integrated Phase Noise in the measurement results indicates a phase noise value obtained by integrating C N in the random jitter measurement range illustrated in Figure 3 86 The Random Jitter in the measurement results indicates a jitter value equivalent to the integrated phase noise Tektronix RSA 3408B gt PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 2 GHz RBW Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Smoothed Carrier Threshold Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Max Min Level dBm 30 0 i Carrier dem Bandwidth Hz 100k Spectrum E C N Sideband 100 htt raw Lower Upper dm I f purus oll ler rit n Meta az Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz Minimum Offset Current trace green Ara En ___ 10Hz 50 dBc Hz Maximum Offset Frequency C N versus Offset frequency gt 40 100MHz Rj Start Offset 150 Frequency Hz dBc Hz 2 5k Start 10
240. ency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 20 js Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Display Input Att 20 dB Accumulation 128000 phints Gaussian Line Off Maximum value red line gt h Display M dBm Reference Line Average blue line off On di 10 Store dB Reference Line a Reset Start 20 ms Scale 2 ms Center 2 1175 GHz Span 5 MHz CCDF Peak amplitude gt Peak 23 59 dBm Auto Scaling Average amplitude gt Average 33 35 dBm 35 8 96 100 E Off Crest factor gt Crest Factor 9 75 dB Threshold CCDF measurement results gt 10 36 3 88 dB dBm 1 90 7 07 decade 150 0 1 ar 8 50 dB 0 01 96 9 25 dB 0 001 96 9 72 dB 0 0001 96 9 74 cB D Start 0 dB Scale 2dB Stop 13dB CCDF CCDF Main view CCDF Figure 3 80 CCDF multi view 3 108 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Pulse Measurements This section describes how to perform the pulse measurements Select Time gt Pulse Measurements gt Pulse Characteristics to measure various pulse characteristics Measurement items The following lists shows the measurement items Measure menu for pulse characteristics and their definitions see Figure 3 81 m Pulse Width Measures the time from rising edge to falling edge at the level of 3 dB 50 of the mean power for the pulse on m Peak Power Measures the maximum power during the pulse on m On Off Ratio Measures the ratio of t
241. ent signal such as a burst phenomenon will not be detected unless it is present at the exact moment that the filter is being swept past it Sweep start Fstop 1 Figure 1 2 Sweep of resolution filter RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 3 Product Overview 1 4 Real Time Spectrum Analyzer The real time spectrum analyzer is conceptually equipped with a series of bandpass filters as shown in Figure 1 3 Signals passing through those filters are concurrently observed and recorded continuously Signals A and B are concur rently acquired and displayed as shown in Figure 1 4 irae Detector 1 filter 1 Resolution filter 2 Detector 2 F RF input gt D icis Resolution filter 3 Detector 3 Resolution filter N Detector N Figure 1 3 Concept of the real time spectrum analyzer Concurrent acquisition Fstart Fstop Figure 1 4 Concurrent acquisition The method used to concurrently acquire signals in a certain frequency range is not bandpass filters but FFT Fast Fourier Transformation The RSA3408B first acquires a series of frames of data in the time domain as shown in Figure 1 5 and then performs the FFT process for each frame This method enables continuous analysis of spectra and ensures the capture of real time phenomenon such as burst signals in digital mobile communication The RSA340
242. enter frequency the reference line is at center screen Frequency Line Interval Sets the interval of the frequency display lines Range 0 to full span the default is 0 Hz View Lines Readout Determines whether to turn on or off the display lines readout The default is On Spectrogram View Time Line Determines whether to turn on or off the time display lines The default is Off Time Line Offset Sets the offset of the time reference line Range 0 second maximum Zero represents the latest frame The minimum value depends on acquired data quantity Time Line Interval Sets the interval of the time display lines Range 0 second minimum The maximum value depends on acquired data quantity The other menu items Frequency Line Frequency Line Offset Frequency Line Interval and View Lines Readout are the same as the spectrum view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 233 Display Line 3 234 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search The marker moves on a waveform to measure amplitude or frequency One or two markers can be displayed on the screen You can also use the reference cursor together with the marker The marker is also used for peak search For information on the band power marker used in the spectrum analysis refer to Spectrum Analysis S A mode on page 3 1 One or two markers active and fixed and or a reference cursor can be displayed on the s
243. eq dBm Hz Figure 1 16 Setup display c Using the general purpose knob change the span setting as listed in Table 1 1 and check that the RBW is displayed correctly Table 1 1 Span and RBW Span RBW 36 MHz 100 kHz 15 MHz 80 kHz 5 MHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 500 Hz 1 kHz 20 Hz d Using the numeric keypad set the span back to 36 MHz Press 3 gt 6 gt MHz in that order on the keypad RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 17 Installation 5 Check the reference level a Press the Amplitude key on the front panel b Make sure that the reference level is set to 0 dBm with the Ref Level side key Check that 0 dBm is displayed on the upper left side of the graticule see Figure 1 17 Use the general purpose knob to set the reference level to 30 dBm d Confirm that Overrange increase RefLev or Atten is indicated in the red box at the top center of the screen Make sure that 30 dBm is displayed on the upper left side of the graticule and that the spectrum waveform is distorted as shown in Figure 1 17 Overrange indicator Reference level setting Tektronix R Overrange increase ev or Atten 1 INPUT CAL SS TG Essa RBW 100 kHz Frequency 100 MHz Span 36
244. equency deviation Pk Pk 2 Half peak peak frequency deviation RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Harmonics Detects up to 12 harmonics and 12 non harmonics to measure each frequency and level Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the Harmonics measurement is the same as Signal Noise and Distortion Refer to page 3 69 Measurement Screen Figure 3 59 shows an example of the Harmonics measure ment results displayed on the bottom of the screen THD Total Harmonic Distortion Demodulation type Baseband AM or FM THD 0 1352 57 38 dB Demod Type FM Tag number 5 1 3 Harmonic frequency and level FD Freq 20 kHz 30 kHz 40 kHz 50 kHz 60 kHz HD Harmonic Distortion gt 2 dem 62 54dBc 61 02 69 48 dBe 7149dBc 72 27 dBc Non harmonic frequency and level NHD Freq 205 kHz 225 625 kHz 125 kHz NHD Non Harmonic Distortion NHO Level 58 17 dBc 71 06 73 04 dBc Audio Measurements Harmonics Scroll horizontally by pressing Meas Setup Scroll Table Figure 3 59 Harmonics measurement results bottom of the screen The measurement table shows frequencies and levels for each order of the harmonics and for the non harmonics in descending order of amplitude corresponding to the tag number indicated on the spectrum trace The level is indicated by absolute amplitude dBm for the fundamental wave S and by relative amplitude
245. er Upper Lower Both Fail if signal exceeds Absolute Relative Rel OR Abs Rel AND Abs Baginning Abs Limit Ending Abs Limit Baginning Rel Limit Ending Rel Limit Rescale Graph Return To Original Scale Measurement Off A 6 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Demod Mode Measure Meas The arrow indicates the Meas Setup menu corresponding to the measurement item Analog Demod AM Demod gt Carrier Amplitude Detection FM Demod gt Auto Carrier Frequency Error Auto Carrier On Frequency Offset Auto Carrier Off Threshold PM Demod Threshold IQ versus Time Pulse Spectrum Measurement Off Digital Demod Option 21 only Constellation gt Parameter Presets EVM Modulation Type IQ Frequency Modulation Parameters versus Time Auto Carrier On Off Power versus Time 4 Frequency Error Auto Carrier On r Symbol Table Frequency Offset Auto Carrier Off Eye Diagram AM AM AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF AM PM Linear Signal Region Unit dB dBm CCDF Linear Signal Region PDF FSK Deviations AM PM Measurement Off Scroll Table Maximum Coefficients Display Reference Line On Off Display Best Fit Line On Off AM
246. er p ER 105 aS W on Start 20 ms Scale 2 ms Center 1 5 GHz Span 5 EE gt EVM 0 28 96 RMS Marker 10 34546875 ms ecu rron 4 65 deg 560 3126651251 MagErr 02 RMS 975 LI 0 56 96 Peak sym 241 Phase Err 0 27 deg RMS 1 69 deg Peak 431 Rho 09999 Length 536 symbols Freq Err 560 313 Hz Origin Offset 62 7 dB Scale 103 837 mW Unit Digital Demod Gonstellation P25 C4FM modulation only gt Modulation Fidelity Marker 2 2323097099 s Modulation fidelity measurement results from the top RMS error magnitude normalized by the deviation Carrier frequency offset Frequency deviation Symbol length 3 56 RMS Error Magnitude 0 274 96 m Carrier Frequency Offset 21 12 Hz Deviation 1 308 kHz Length 1227 symbols 5 966 5 966 Figure 3 45 Constellation analysis RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode EVM Measurement Measures EVM Error Vector Magnitude Figure 3 46 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results and the EVM versus time graph For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 49 For setting views refer to page 3 203 Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum aS a a ey Frequency 800 MHz Acquisition Length 12 3 ms Cancel Back Span 100 kHz Parameter Input Att 20 dB Y Presets PDC 0 0 Mod
247. er frequency Setting range The upper limit is Span 2 The lower limit is determined by the span and FFT Points for C N refer to Setting the Number of FFT Points on page 3 128 settings C N Settling Threshold Enabled when C N versus Time is displayed in the subview Sets the threshold value for obtaining the phase noise settling time Setting range 200 to 0 dBc Hz default 0 dBc Hz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 127 Time Analysis Time Mode Random jitter Subview Random Jitter vs Time Settling time gt C N A Rj Settling Subview C N vs Time Settling time al Threshold CIN Settling Threshold gt Time gt Time C N A Rj Start Offset Frequency Random jitter measurement range Rj Stop Offset Frequency Main view C N Offset Frequency gt gt Offset frequency Figure 3 89 Real time phase noise measurement parameters Setting the Number of FFT Points The real time phase noise measurement uses 3 128 1024 FFT sample points by default for the upper and lower side bands to obtain a C N versus offset frequency graph You can change the number of FFT sample points in RBW FFT gt FFT Points for C N FFT Points for C N Sets the number of FFT sample points for the C N versus offset frequency measurement Setting range 64 to 65536 21 default 1024 The more points the higher the resolution The fe
248. er to page 3 92 Envelope Selects the envelope number the index number in the RF envelope measurement table that displays the waveform in the main view Range 0 to 65536 Refer to page 3 94 Figure 3 71 Guidelines Selects whether to display the guidelines red color along with the waveform in the main view On Default Displays the guidelines m Off No guideline is displayed Scroll Table Scrolls the measurement table in the main view horizontally Display Area Valid for the constellation and the eye diagram views Sets the percentage of display area sample points from the beginning in the selected burst Range 0 1 to 100 default 100 10046 represents the whole burst RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 95 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Changing the Vertical Unit The unit for the vertical axis of the graph displayed in the main view is V volts by default You can also select dBm and W watts using View Scale Lines Scale Unit NOTE The measurement table in the main view always displays the results for waveform data with the default unit of W Selecting the unit does not affect the table contents Constellation Measures modulation attributes on the Interrogator to Tag or Tag to Interrogator Eye Diagram and signaling and displays the constellation eye diagram or symbol table see Symbol Table Figure 3 72 Modulation Depth 10 286 96 Modulation Index 5 422 Frequency Error 0
249. ere are several averaging methods select RMS Root Mean Square in this example 1 Press the Trace Avg key Span Trig Amplitude REM Acquisition Trace amp Analysis Avg Trace Avg key RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 43 Tutorial 2 Press the Trace Type side key to select Average 3 Press the Number of Averages side key to specify how many traces are accumulated to create the averaged waveform In this example enter 64 with the numeric keypad Press 6 4 Enter in order 4 Press the Run Stop key on the front panel to acquire the waveform The averaged waveform is displayed on the screen The average count is shown in the upper right part of the screen see Figure 2 41 When the waveform is acquired in the free run mode the averaging is done with exponential RMS root mean square This method continues the average with an exponential weighting applied to old values using the number of averages 64 in this example as the weighting factor Tekironix RSA 3408B 2007 19 9 30 02 TRACE AVG Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Select Trace Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off me 0 1 dBm Average count On Freeze Off Trace 1 Type Trace 1 Type Selects the type of processing Number Of 4 for the selected trace Averages Reset Average Average 10 dB Display Detection
250. ernal monitor RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 9 Product Overview 1 10 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation This section describes how to install this instrument The topics are organized as follows m Unpacking to check contents Applying the power W Setting up the stand Functional check Powering off the analyzer Restart Backing up the user file Before starting installation you should become familiar with the General Safety Summary on page xv Unpacking to Check Contents 1 This product is packed in a cardboard box for delivery Before opening the box make sure that there is no damage on the surface Open the box check that the product has no damage and that all the standard accessories are found inside For a list of accessories refer to Standard Accessories on page G 3 If you find any damaged or missing components contact your local Tektronix representative It is recommended to keep the box and packing materials You may need them to send this product to Tektronix for calibration or repair least 5 cm 2 in on both sides for proper air circulation CAUTION The analyzer has exhaust fans on the side panel Leave a space of at RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation Applying Power Power on the analyzer using the following procedure AC Power Requirements The analyzer operates from an AC line frequency of 47 63 Hz over the range of 90 250 Volts without the need for
251. es for each measurement item Refer to page 3 203 for information about setting scale and formatting each view Refer to page 3 38 for information about changing the overview 3 100 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode IQ versus Time Observes I and Q signal level over time Figure 3 75 shows an example The Measurement main view displays I O voltage versus time I and are indicated in yellow and green respectively Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum ic iger Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 64 rhs Cancel Back Span 200 kHz Input Att 20 dB IQ versus Time DIMITRI aB Power versus Time dy 10 Frequency versus cB Time 100 dm ee 100 E Start 64 ms Scale 6 4 ms Center 100 MHz Span 200 kHz 500 my Q 100 500 my Start 64 ms Scale 2 56 ms Measurement Off Transient IQ versus Time Main view I Q voltage vs Time Q waveform are displayed in yellow and green respectively Figure 3 75 IQ versus Time measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 101 Time Analysis Time Mode Power versus Time Observes signal power change over time Figure 3 76 shows an example The Measurement main view displays power level versus time Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum PAUSE MEASURE rer eee SSS eee Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 64 rhs Cancel Ba
252. es to set these parameters refer to Setting the Analysis Range on page 3 34 and Setting FFT Processing Range for the Subview on page 3 38 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters typically 101 data points One frame ror ee Time gt M frames 1 block Bu a Frame number gt M 1 M 2 2 1 0 Acquisition Length N Block number N 1 N 2 Acquisition History FFT start point M Spectrum Offset s Spectrum Length gt Demod and Time modes only G Subview display De Analysis Offset Analysis Length gt Trigger output Analysis start point Figure 3 110 Acquisition and analysis parameters Parameters in Real Time The Acquisition Analysis menu in the Real Time S A real time spectrum S A Mode analysis mode contains the following items Acquisition Length Same as in the Demod and Time modes Spectrum Offset Specifies the number of the frame in the spectrogram to display the spectrum The latest frame is number zero Older frames have larger negative numbers RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 159 Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters Parameters in Real Time Acquisition Analysis menu in the Real Time S A with Zoom mode contains S A with Zoom Mode the following items see Figure 3 111 Acquisition Leng
253. esources online Front panel key descriptions W Online user manual Displaying the Online Help Use the following procedure to show the online help l Press the Help key on the front panel Help key Preset Shows the online help Input Load Cal Save 2 Select the type of online help using the side keys m View Front Panel Button Help Provides descriptions of the front panel keys m View Online User Manual Displays the analyzer user manual formatted for online use RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 245 Using the Online Help 3 Depending on the type of online manual you selected use one of the following two procedures m If you selected View Front Panel Button Help Press the front panel key about which you want to receive information For example press the Measure key to show information about that key see Figure 3 173 Press the front panel key to show the description of that key FrontPanel E e g Locate Back Refresh Print Contents Search E amp 3 Front Panel Key Help E 3 Setting Keys o BlFrequency Channel Ke Span Kev E Amplitude Key E Acquisition Analysis Ke Run Stop Key Trigger Key RBW FFT Key 21 Trace Avg Key E Measure Setup Key E Mode Keys View Keys Marker Keys Utility Keys m Alphanumeric Keypad H E Scroll Knob E Side Keys HELP Cancel B
254. ess the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings The following menu items are identical to those in the spurious measurement Refer to page 3 125 Carrier Threshold Level Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Symmetrical Filter Carrier Tracking Scroll Table The following items are added for the real time measurement They depend on the subview content refer to Selecting the Subview Content on page 3 132 Carrier Bandwidth This value is used to display C N versus Offset frequency in the subview Sets the frequency bandwidth for calculating channel power Setting range Span 100 to Span 2 default Span 100 C N Sideband This value is used to display C N versus Offset frequency in the subview Selects the sideband for measuring phase noise m Upper Default Measures upper sideband half span m Lower Measures lower sideband half span Figure 3 92 shows an example of the real time spurious measurement The main view is the same as the spurious measurement refer to page 3 125 except that this main view is real time RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 131 Time Analysis Time Mode Overview Power versus Time gt Subview C N vs Offset frequency Use View Define Subview Content to 3 132 select the display Spurious measurement gt Measurement table gt Up to 20 spurious signals displayed Tektronix RSA 3408B Frequenc
255. ess the Print key again The screen image data is captured on the internal memory with the background color set in step 1 4 Press the Save screen to file side key The file selection screen appears 5 Doone ofthe following to output the screen image to a specified file m Using a preset file name Press the Save to BitmapA Save to Bit mapB or Save to BitmapC side key The image data is stored to the file BitmapA bmp BitmapB bmp or BitmapC bmp in the C YMy Documents folder respectively m Entering a new file name Enter a file name with the Filename side key referring to Entering a File Name on page 3 262 The file extension BMP is automatically assigned When you have finished entering the name press the Save File Now side key to store the copy in the file After the screen copy is saved in the file the screen returns to the original waveform display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 285 Screen 3 286 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendices Appendix A Menu Tree This section shows the structure of the menus and submenus displayed by pressing the menu keys as illustrated in Figure A 1 The menu keys are divided into the following groups Settings Mode Markers View Utility Some of the submenus are used for programming or servicing information about these submenus is in the programmer or service manual optional See Appendix F for manual part number Setting Frequency Run
256. ession ies socer eee ek e eom p ed oe lee ree eoe 3 200 Setting VIEWS u ne een nme 3 203 View Men anne ea N ten 3 204 Basic Procedures oos rss eee een el 3 205 Spectrum View Setting ee nn 3 206 DPX Spectrum View Setting eee eee ee een 3 207 Spectrogram View Setting 3 208 Time Domain View Setting 3 210 CCDE View Setting xi ves cease na tee ie e RR chan dus 3 212 Constellation View Setting Option 21 Only 3 213 EVM View Setting Option 21 Only sssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeh 3 215 Symbol Table Setting Option 21 Only 3 218 Eye Diagram Setting Option 21 Only 3 219 AM AM View Setting Option 21 Only 3 221 AM PM View Setting Option 21 Only 3 222 PDF View Setting Option 21 Only 3 223 Noisogram View Setting Option 21 Only 3 224 Display Line ea ne 3 227 Display Line Operation Other than Real Time S A 3 228 Multi Display Lines Real Time S A 3 231 Marker Operation and Peak Search 3 235 Markers Menu a ee ORE eR TRUE 3 236 Using Markets vun ab e
257. ety Compliance i2 so eee erem e a eh e bet he bea ehr ect Environmental Considerations Getting Started Product Overview Beat fes 24 eate bet nen era py dotum ara oen dedita PE de Ar DR RR Application peor o em eee eoe o m een Real Time Analysis 0 0 0 0 e Architect re u ees eek tem en BU deine Installation UU UD a Unpacking to Check Contents Applying anhand Setting Up the Stand RR awa Bad dee RR ele Functional Check u eek RR eR EE nt Powering Off the Restarting the Analyzer sise 0 0 cece cece ee eee eens Backing Up User Files 2 2 2 ns ben est aoa na Installing Other Applications Ealibration nase Cal u RP el ss ne d Calibrating Gain cemere eet e er ee Calibrating Center Offset eee ee EAE Calibrating DC Offset iiec er Rete Waites eo ae Calibrating IFFlatness idee te Re e RR eo s Adjusting Display Brightness sess weeks leen Confirming Performance 0 eee cee Operating Basics Interface Controls and Connectors sosi epi eee eee cee eee nee
258. evel side key 3 To best display the waveform automatically press the Auto Level side key 4 To set the attenuation level or the mixer level manually use the RF Atten Mixer side key to select RF Att or Mixer When you select RF Att Select the attenuation level with the RF Att side key When you select Mixer Select the first mixer input level using the Mixer Level side key 5 S A mode except Real Time only Use the Vertical Scale side key to set the vertical scale per division Use the Vertical Units side key to select the unit 6 To apply amplitude correction press the Corrections side key to set the parameters Refer to Amplitude Correction on page 3 148 for details RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Amplitude Over Voltage Input Set the reference level Ref Level according to the input signal level The default setting is 0 dBm If the signal level gets too high or the reference level is set too low over voltage input may occur If an over voltage input occurs the status indicator Overrange increase RefLev or Atten is displayed in the red box see Figure 3 102 CAUTION If a signal exceeding 30 dBm 1 W is applied it can damage the analyzer Be sure to limit input signals to 30 dBm or below When the input signal level is too high overrange is indicated in the red box Tektronix R Overrange increase ev or Atten 1 INPUT CAL AMPLITUDE D ApA
259. ew Scale Refer to Setting Views on page 3 203 for the details You can save and load a trace in a file with the extension of dpt for the bitmap or trc for other than bitmap using the Save Trace 1 2 and Load Trace 1 2 side keys in the Trace Avg menu Refer to File Operations on page 3 251 for the details Figure 3 19 DPX spectrum display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 19 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Persistence You can select the persistence mode for the Bitmap trace While the screen display is generally updated periodically to rewrite waveforms the persistence mode enables a data point once displayed to remain visible for a decay period This allows you to see the history of occurrence for dynamic signals while still receiving immediate feedback on signal variations over time You can adjust the persistence to optimize display characteristics for varying signal conditions from a live RF view of dynamic signals to the discovery of single occurrences The persistence function facilitates observing single or intermittent events by fading out waveforms gradually You can set a decay period ranging from zero to infinity Figure 3 20 Persistence display Use the following steps to adjust the persistence 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the side key Trace 1 or 2 Type gt Bitmap 3 Press the Dot Persistence side key to select the persistence mode m Off Disables
260. ey A new row is added containing the same frequency and amplitude correction values as the previous row Modify the values appropriately NOTE If you set the same frequency as the previous row the amplitude correc tion value in the previous row will be overwritten the next time you press the Add New Point side key It is not necessary to enter correction data in order by frequency The rows are automatically reordered in ascending order of frequency d Repeat step c to enter the frequency and amplitude correction values for all points e Press the Done Editing Table side key The input is accepted and a new row is added RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Amplitude 5 To add correction data a Press the Select Point To Edit side key and turn the general purpose knob to move the cursor to the last row empty in the table b Perform step 4 to enter the frequency and amplitude correction values Tektronix RSA 3408B Edit Table Frequency 1 5 GHz RBW 50 kHz Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Select Point To Input Atti 20 cB Trace 2 Off Edit lt Select Point To Edit Frequency Hz amplitude dB en Selects a line 1 10M 10 Frequency B 2 2M 12 Hz Frequency 3 30M 14 a Inputs frequency ofthe point Amplitude b 1 lt Amplitude u Inputs correction value Frequency Amplitude correction value Delete Point Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Frequency
261. f the data in the frame is invalid for the calculation The analyzer discards invalid data and displays only valid data Valid data are placed into bins The number of bins depends on the span as shown in Table 3 34 Table 3 34 Number of bins FFT points 1024 Span Number of bins 20 MHz or less 801 36 MHz 721 40 MHz Baseband only 801 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function The number of bins is valid in all modes except Scalar mode The number of bins is meaningless in Scalar mode because it uses several physical frames to display data Generally the following calculations are used Frequency bandwidth of one bin Sampling rate Number of FFT points Number of bins Specified span Frequency bandwidth of one bin 1 The sampling rate varies depending on span Refer to Specifications in the RSA3408B Technical Reference for more details Compression Method Generally because the number of horizontal pixels on screen is smaller than the number of bins bin data is compressed according to the number of pixels on screen when they are displayed see Figure 3 138 Data displayed on screen C O0 0 0 0 0 0 corresponds to each pixel A A Compress DAEA AAA 0 Frame C 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Invalid data Valid data lt Invalid data Figure 3 138
262. for center frequency Center Freq Al Hz x XXX Indicates that the general purpose knob is available Numeric value input field Figure 2 31 Menu items for numeric value input You can change the value using the general purpose knob or enter the value using the numeric value entry keypad shown in Figure 2 32 2 Enter the new center frequency at 100 MHz Because the interval between 1 5 GHz current setting and 100 MHz is wide it is more convenient to use the keypad here Press 1 0 0 MHz in order on the keypad The GHz MHz kHz and Hz keys also function as enter keys When you press any of these keys the numeric value you enter will be set immediately If you enter incorrect values clear them using the BKSP back space key and then enter the correct digit BKSP lt Clears the character preceding the cursor The unit keys also function as enter keys When you press any of these keys the numeric value you enter will be set immediately Accepts the inputs ABC DEF S Unlock 7 8 9 GHz GHI JKL MNO ms 4 5 6 MHz PQRS TUV WXYZ us 1 2 3 kHz amp Caps Lock ns dBm Next 0 v Hz Numeric keys Figure 2 32 Numeric value entry keypad 2 34 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial The spectrum waveform is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 2 33 The current
263. form DPX spectrum display Persistence display Concurrent display of spectrum and spectrogram Tall display of spectrum and spectrogram Spectrogram view Channel power measurement 2 16 2 18 2 19 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 21 2 22 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 28 2 30 2 31 2 31 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 34 2 35 2 36 2 37 2 38 2 39 2 40 2 41 2 43 2 44 2 45 2 46 2 47 2 48 2 49 2 50 2 51 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Table of Contents Figure 2 49 Channel power measurement Channel Bandwidth 40 gt 2 52 Figure 2 50 Carrier frequency measurement 2 52 Figure 2 51 AM signal measurement 2 54 Figure 2 52 Analysis range settings 2 55 Figure 2 53 Frame and block 2 56 Figure 2 54 Changing the acquisition length 2 57 Figure 2 55 Single view display 2 58 Figure 2 56 Scale settings 2 59 Figure 3 1 S A menu structure 3 1 Figure 3 2 S A measurement screen 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flex grid style 3 3 Figure 3 4 Channel power 3 5 Figure 3 5 ACPR measurement band power markers 3 6 Figure 3 6 Example of ACPR measurement 3 7 Figure
264. frame FramePeriod Shows the frame period setting in seconds The actual period is obtained by multiplying UnitPeriod by the difference of time stamp ticks of each frame in the data block UnitPeriod Shows the unit time in seconds of time stamp Ticks of each frame in the data block FrameLength Shows the time in second necessary to acquire one frame DateTime Shows the time when the analyzer acquired the last frame in a data block You can change to space for display because files may have many characters GainOffset Shows the gain offset It is used for calculating the amplitude refer to page 3 272 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 269 File Format MultiFrames Shows the number of frames in multi frame mode For example when MultiFrames 20 scanning 20 times with a span of 5 MHz makes a span of 100 MHz MultiAddr Shows the last frame address in the multi frame mode The range is 0 to MultiFrames 1 MultiFrames 1 indicates that the data ends just at the end of scans IOffset Shows the offset value of I data It is used for calculating the data value refer to page 3 272 QOffset Shows the offset value of Q data It is used for calculating the data value refer to page 3 272 Data Block Each data block contains several pairs of frame header and frame data see Figure 3 187 The number of pairs in a block is indicated by ValidFrames in the file header The frame order is determined by
265. ft portion of the screen Delta marker readout Marker 1 readout Marker 2 readout Delta marker measurement value Minus dira Marker 1 readout Marker 2 readout Readout ofthe selected marker Sancel Select Marker lt Select Marker 1 2 4 kHz aker 99 997 MHz 1 2 i 40 018 dB 162 41 dBrn 85 42 dBm H2 mum Selects the active marker Marker X Positic Hz s Markers 1 Markers Off Single Here selects Delta to enable Marker 1 and 2 Reference Cursor to Marker X 10 dB Marker 2 Reference Cursor A off Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X 4 15 625 100 ALT A MS dem Center 100 MHz Span 15 kHz Go to page 2 of 2 Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 997 Figure 3 166 Using the delta marker to take measurements RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 239 Marker Operation and Peak Search Measuring with the The reference cursor is another way to measure relative amplitude or frequency Reference Cursor The reference cursor is positioned with the marker and fixed on the screen l Press the Maker Setup key on the front panel 2 Press the Makers side key to select Single or Delta 3 Press the Marker X Position side key and rotate the general purpose knob or enter the value using the keypad to move the marker to the refer
266. g BPSK QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM and 64QAM RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual B 1 Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping 256QAM Left Right ZERCHCHCRERERERERERERERERERERE DODODODDDODODODDODOOOE EIENEIEZEIESEIEIEIEIEIEIEIEIE DODDDBDOODODODOOOHO DODODDDODDODODOD DOES EICIREREREREREREREIERERERERERER DODGDODDDDODODBDONOODEOD DDODDBDODDDDODOODOENES DODDODDDODODDODOOODEDEOD DODDODDODOOODDDODODNE DOEDDDRDBDOBPEADEDEO DODDODDODOOUODDOOOUNEEEO DIODGDDDODODODODODOODOBEO GFSK 4FSK 8FSK Left Right Left Right Left Right 16FSK Left Right w Figure B 2 Symbol mapping 256QAM GFSK 4FSK 8FSK and 16FSK B 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping Table B 1 1 4 shift DAPSK Rotation angle degree Table B 2 GMSK Rotation direction Left Right RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual B 3 Appendix B Digital Demodulation Symbol Mapping B 4 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual eee Appendix C Digital IQ Output Connector Pin Assignment Option 05 This section shows the pin assignment of the digital IO output connectors I OUTPUT and OUTPUT on the rear panel of the analyzer with Option 05 For details on the specifications refer to the RSA3408B Technical Reference 25 1 Y
267. g controls see Figure 3 144 Auto Scale Sets the starting value and the scale of the vertical axis automatical ly to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Range Twice of Vertical Start value to 10046 in a 1 2 5 sequence Vertical Start Sets the minimum value bottom of the vertical axis Range 107 to 1 2 of Vertical Stop value in a 1 2 5 sequence Full Scale Sets the scale of the vertical axis to the default full scale value Sub Grid Time mode only Determines whether to display the sub grid Vertical Stop gt ipo decade f 1 008 Vertical Start Seale 5 Stop 37546 lt Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 144 Setting the scale in CCDF view 3 212 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views Constellation View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu The constellation view shows the signal represented by phase and amplitude in polar coordinate or IO diagram You can display it in the constellation analysis of the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 56 The constellation displays I and components of the signal in two dimensions As the overall signal level changes both I and Q are automatically sc
268. g the and Peak Search You can position the on the peak spectrum using the search function to set the frequency at the position to the center frequency In Mode You can set the peak spectrum to the center frequency with using the 200 and search functions when the measurement mode is S A 1 Display the spectrum on the screen 2 Press the Peak key on the front panel The maximum peak spectrum is detected and the mm positioned at the point Use the arrow s move the to another peak Press the PERGI key and then Center Freq Freq side key The center frequency is set to the frequency at the position Go The frequency set in this procedure may not take effect with certain setting of the span Refer to the following Setting Range Figure 3 175 Word search using the keyboard 3 248 Cancel Back View Front Panel Button Help View Online User Manual RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual C ASS Selecting Input Source You can select from three input sources in the Input menu RF IO and Cal C Input Signal Input Port 1Q Cal100M Cal25M Reference Source Int Ext Figure 3 176 Input menu structure Input Menu The Input menu contains the following controls Signal Input Port Selects which input is used for signal connection m Default Uses the signal from the INPUT connector on the front pa
269. ged value Setting range 1 to 100 000 default 20 Averaging is controlled in two ways as shown in Table 3 33 Table 3 33 Averaging method Data acquisition Average type Number of Averages Free run Continues the average with an exponential Continuous mode only weighting applied to old values using Number of Averages as the weighting factor Triggered and Single mode Averages traces accumulating up to Number of Averages then stops the acquisition until the next trigger event occurs Intensity DPX spectrum only Sets the display intensity for the Bitmap trace An increased intensity level allows a single short event to be seen This also allows the effect of variable persistence to be seen on infrequent events Range 1 to 10046 default 2596 Dot Persistence DPX spectrum only Selects the persistence mode for the Bitmap trace m Off Turns off the persistence mode points are reset every screen update m Variable Selects the variable persistence mode Set a persistence time that is how long a point in the display is visible before fading using the Persistence Value side key Infinite Selects the infinite persistence mode that prevents a point in the display from fading Once a point in the display has been written to it will remain visible indefinitely Persistence Value DPX spectrum only Sets the persistence time for the variable persistence mode Range 1 to 1000 no unit default 10 Rese
270. gnal within 10 MHz of the center frequency may cause Auto Level to choose the wrong reference level even if the span setting does not make the signal appear on sereen To prevent nonlinear operation the reference level may need to be adjusted manually Auto Level will force the analyzer to acquire new data which will overwrite the existing data To scale the existing displayed waveform do not use Auto Level Instead use the View Scale menu Figure 3 101 Setting the amplitude RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Amplitude RF Atten Mixer Input signals are attenuated through the attenuator and converted to IF signals through the mixer in the down converter refer to Architecture on page 1 7 The attenuation level and the mixer level are normally set automatically Select RF Att or Mixer to manually set either parameter if necessary m Auto Sets the mixer level and the RF attenuation level automatically m RF Att Sets the RF attenuation level with RF Att described below m Mixer Sets the mixer level using the Mixer Level setting NOTE RF Atten Mixer is set to Auto by default In this setting the mixer level is fixed to 15 dBm RF Att Changes the RF attenuation level when RF Att is selected in RF Atten Mixer above Range 0 to 55 dB in 5 dB steps default 15 dB Reducing the attenuation may increase the signal level compared to the noise f
271. gt Figure 3 81 Definition of pulse characteristics Definition of Pulse On Off The pulse on and off times are fundamental parameters for pulse measurements Time These parameters are defined in Figure 3 82 The threshold is a level to detect a pulse relative to the maximum peak in the acquired data You can set it by using Detection Threshold in the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 116 Pulse on The maximum Threshold Pulse off _ gt Figure 3 82 Definition of pulse on off 3 110 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode The Lo L4 La and Lg lines represent the following Lo Tangent line through the threshold point on the rising edge m 11 Tangent line through the threshold point on the falling edge 14 Regression line calculated on the pulse top W Lp Regression line calculated on the pulse bottom These lines are displayed in red in the subview The pulse on and off times are determined by the nodes of these lines as shown in Figure 3 82 Basic Measurement Use this procedure to perform the pulse measurements Procedure Press the Time key on the front panel 2 Press the side key Pulse Measurement Pulse Characteristics 3 Display the measurement waveform a Press the Frequency Channel key on the front panel to set the frequency b Press the Span key on the front panel to set the span c Press the Amplit
272. he Option Key field tells you the following information m Present Indicates that you can use the option m Not Present Indicates that you cannot use the option For information about how to remove the protection and use the option refer to Enabling the Option To exit the version display press any front panel key RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Functional Overview Using Windows XP Displaying the Windows Desktop Starting Windows XP Applications Setting Date and Time Enabling the Option 1 Contact your local Tektronix office to order the option You will receive an option key alphanumeric code 2 Press the Option Key side key see Figure 2 24 and enter the option key using the alphanumeric keypad on the front panel NOTE To input hyphen press the period key 3 Press the Change Option Key side key to accept the input Now you can use the option on the analyzer This analyzer operates under Windows XP You can switch to a Windows XP desktop screen or execute a Windows XP application program To display the Windows desktop screen follow these steps 1 Connect a USB mouse and keyboard to the analyzer For the USB connectors on the side panel see Figure 2 3 on page 2 6 2 Usea mouse to move the pointer to the bottom of screen see Figure 2 25 The task bar appears 3 Locate the pointer on the RSA3408B icon in the task bar and right click A menu appears 4
273. he Trace 1 or 2 Type side key to select the trace type Normal Average MaxHold or MinHold refer to Trace 1 2 Type on page 3 193 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for Trace 1 and 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Averaging the Waveform The averaging technique is generally used to average and reduce the noise of the waveform The average function includes the peak hold which maintains the maximum and minimum values as well as the averaging process Average Type There are four averaging types as follows where these variables are used X p Display data for the nt frame x p n Active data for the nt frame P Frame point N Value of Number of Averages RMS Root mean square Used when acquiring data in single mode N frames average then the acquisition stops X P n X P n for n 1 Ko ae for 2 Sn S x p u for n gt N Exponential RMS Exponential root mean square Used when acquiring data in continuous mode Continuous averaging weights older sweeps so that they have a progressively smaller effect on the average X P n X P n for n 1 Xp eee for 2 n S MED toh iring Max Hold Displays only the maximum value at each data point x p n for n 1 max X p r n Min Hold Displays only the minimum value at each data point x p n for n 1 min X p 4 x p for inz2 RSA3408B An
274. he input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard observe all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Power Disconnect The power switch disconnects the product from the power source See instructions for the location Do not block the power switch it must remain accessible to the user at all times Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms A A Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNNG Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this
275. he mean power during the pulse on to that during the pulse off time Pulse Ripple Measures the difference between the maximum and the minimum power during the pulse on m Repetition Interval Measures the time from a pulse rising edge to the next pulse rising edge m Duty Cycle Measures the ratio of the pulse width to the repetition interval m Pulse Pulse Phase Measures the phase difference between the first pulse and the selected pulse in the analysis window Channel Power Measures the channel power for the pulse on spectrum OBW Measures the OBW Occupied Bandwidth for the pulse on spectrum m EBW Measures the EBW Emission Bandwidth for the pulse on spectrum Frequency Deviation Measures the signal frequency change from the center frequency over time during the pulse on For information about Channel Power OBW and EBW measurements refer to the S A Spectrum Analysis mode Channel Power page 3 5 OBW page 3 8 EBW page 3 10 The frequency deviation measurement is based on the Frequency versus Time measurement in the Transient mode Refer to page 3 103 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 109 Time Analysis Time Mode lt Pulse Pulse Phase gt Pulse Ripple lt Pulse on 100 Peak Power Mean power during the pulse on 5096 Pulse Width gt Repetition Interval 7 Pulse off
276. he single display by pressing the Select key in the View area The selected view is surrounded by a white box 3 Press the Show Views side key to select Single Figure 3 38 shows the one view display Marker 3 2 ms Marker 99 9 MHz 11 146 dBm 97 776 dBm 0 Marker 3 2 ms E 39 5179437117 kHz art m Marker 3 2 ms 39 6179437117 kHz iak E AN y Hz Hz NL rj 160k Hz The selected view is surrounded by a white box 157 Start 3 2 ms Scale 320 us div One view display Figure 3 38 One view display 3 40 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Analog Modulation Analysis You can select the following measurement items with the Measure key when you select Analog Demod in the Demod menu AM Demod page 3 43 FM Demod page 3 44 PM Demod page 3 45 IO versus Time page 3 46 Pulse Spectrum page 3 47 Basic Procedure Follow this procedure to perform analog modulation analysis 1 2 3 4 Press the Mode Demod key on the front panel Press the Analog Demod side key Select a measurement item Display the measurement waveform NOTE You should set appropriate frequency and span It is important to set frequency and span as close to the measurement signal band as possible and finely adjust them The modulated signal will not be recognized unless frequency and span are set appropriately For information about setting frequency sp
277. he trigger mask shown in Figure 3 119 is an area created on the graticule of the spectrum view subview in the Demod and Time modes The trigger occurs when the input signal exits or enters the area Real Time S A mode cB Trigger mask 100 B dBm Center 1 5 GHz Span 10 MHz Marker 1 5 GHz 33 369 dBm 400 jus 5 frame frame 0 frame Center 1 5 GHz Demod and Time modes upper screen dBm Trigger mask PE Start 1 04 ms Scale 104 us Center 1 5 GHz Span 10 MHz Figure 3 119 Trigger mask RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 171 Trigger Mask Creation Menu 3 172 Use the Trig gt Define Mask menu and the marker to create the mask Select Next Point Selects the marker to control The active marker is displayed in red Set Selected Point X Sets the horizontal position of the active marker Set Selected Point Y Sets the vertical position of the active marker Delete Selected Point Deletes the point at the active marker position Insert New Point Inserts the new point halfway between the active marker and the next marker on the right side Set Points to Maximum Fills the area below the maximum line the reference level See Figure 3 120 Set Points to Minimum Fills the area below the minimum line the level lower than the reference level by 60 dB See Figure 3 120 Reset Mask to Default Displays the default mask See Figure 3 120 Set
278. he waveform as you turn the general purpose knob m As you turn the knob to the right the amplitude increases and the waveform shifts to a relatively lower position m As you turn the knob to the left the amplitude decreases and the waveform shifts to a relatively higher position In Figure 2 36 the amplitude is set to 10 dBm When the amplitude is set to 0 dBm or higher a blue standard line is displayed indicating 0 dBm 3 Setthe Ref Level back to 0 dBm after confirming the amplitude operation Tekironix RSA 3408B 20 AMPLITUDE D Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200 Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Ref Level E Input Att 25 dB Trace 2 Off dBm z 10 10 dam Auto Level gt RF Atten Mixer Auto RFAtt Mixer RF Att dB 30 10 Mixer Level dB dBm Nominal pras Vertical Scale dB div 10 Vertical Units dBm dBuv v Ww AA A n Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Corrections Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Ref Level dBm 10 Figure 2 36 Reference level of 10 dBm RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Starting and Stopping Use the Run Stop key to start or stop data acquisition There are two acquisition Data Acquisition modes the continuous mode in which data is acquired repeatedly and the single mode in which one waveform is acquired You can
279. i ous As shown in Table 3 43 the second and subsequent fields indicate the setting values of Meas Setup gt Limits Refer to Table 3 3 on page 3 17 for the Limits menu items Table 3 43 Limit mask file format Field Offset From Channel Inband Spurious 1 Offset From Channel Zone number Inband Spurious Zone number Enable setting value Enable setting value Beginning Frequency setting value Beginning Frequency setting value Ending Frequency setting value Ending Frequency setting value Resolution Bandwidth setting value Resolution Bandwidth setting value Offset from Carrier setting value Fail if signal exceeds setting value Fail if signal exceeds setting value Beginning Abs Limit setting value Beginning Abs Limit setting value Ending Abs Limit setting value Ending Abs Limit setting value Beginning Rel Limit setting value NI om a AJ wy m gt Beginning Rel Limit setting value Ending Rel Limit setting value 11 Ending Rel Limit setting value RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 279 File Format NOTE If you omit setting for a field the default value is used If you omit settings for a zone the default value is used for all fields User Filter File Format The user filter file is available in the digital modulation analysis Digital Demod Option 21 only It stores the user defined measurement or reference filter coefficient data in the CSV format Figure 3 192 shows the file structure R
280. i Rev er rer ever Tr e rr Ere vs 3 28 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Zoomed area settings using the marker Demod menu structure Demod mode screen Analysis range setting in the overview eere ern Specifying the range with the marker and the reference Cursor ensure Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 mode Figure 3 58 Figure 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Specifying the analysis range using the mouse FFT processing range setting on the overview Changing the overview and subview One view display AM demod measurement FM demod measurement PM demod measurement main view IQ versus time measurement main view Pulse spectrum measurement Process flow for digitally modulated signals Constellation analysis EVM measurement
281. ide panel See Figure 2 3 on page 2 6 Use the following steps to save settings or waveforms to a file There are two ways to save data to a file using the preset file name and entering a new file name To return to the previous menu press the Cancel Back side key at any time 1 Press the Save key on the front panel RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations 2 Press one of the following side keys depending on the type of data to save Table 3 39 File save operation Meas mode Sidekey Save content Extension S A Save State Current instrument settings sta Save Correction Amplitude correction data cor Save SEM Limits CSV Real Time S A Save State sta Mamie 51 08 Aerured dainte domain Current Block Save Data CSV CSV Current Block Save Data MAT mat Current Block 1 dptis only for the Bitmap trace in the DPX spectrum Spectrum emission mask only RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 255 File Operations 3 256 3 To use a preset file name Press the Save to file name side key To enter a new file name skip to step 4 There are three preset names for each file type as shown in Table 3 40 Table 3 40 Preset file names File type Save file name State sta StateA StateB StateC IQ data iqt IQDataA IGDataB IQDataC Trace trc TraceA TraceB TraceC Bitmap trace dpt 1 BitmapA BitmapB BitmapC Correction cor CorrA CorrB CorrC Measurement table csv
282. in time domain in the CSV Comma Sepa Demod and Time modes rated Values format MAT file MAT Real Time S A with Zoom Saves waveform data IQ data in time domain in the MATLAB format Demod and Time modes RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 251 File Operations Load Save Menu Preset Load m Load State Figure 3 177 shows the Load Save menu structure S A mode except Real Time Load Trace 1 Load Trace 2 Load Correction Save Print Load SEM Limits Real Time S A mode Load State Load Data Load SEM Limits Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes Load State Load Data mode except Real Time Load From File Menu Select File Load File Now Folder Load from XXXA Load from XXXB Load from XXXC Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes Save State Save Data All Blocks Current Block Current Area 71 Save Data CSV Current Block Current Area Save Data MAT Current Block Current Area 1 Spectrum Emission Mask only Figure 3 177 Load Save menu structure 3 252 Save State gt Save To File Menu Save Trace 1 Filename Save Trace 2 Save File Now Save Correction Overwrite Save SEM Limits 1 Folder Save to XXXA Real Time S A mode Save to XXXB Save State Save to XXXC Save Data Where XXX State for a state file
283. ion cards Contactless integrated circuit s cards Vicinity cards Part 2 Air interface and initialization EPC Radio Frequency Identity Protocols Class 1 Generation 2 UHF RFID Protocol for Communications at 860 MHz 960 MHz Version 1 0 9 ISO IEC 18000 6 Type C Auto ID Center Draft protocol specification for a 900 MHz Class 0 Radio Frequency Identification Tag Auto ID Center TECHNICAL REPORT 860MHz 930MHz Class 1 Radio Frequency Identification Tag Radio Frequency amp Logical Communication Interface Specification Candidate Recommenda tion Version 1 0 1 This instrument does not support ISO IEC 18000 4 Mode 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 77 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Measurement Items Table 3 16 shows the measurement items in the RFID analysis Select the items using the Measure key Table 3 16 Measurement items for RFID analysis Measure menu Carrier Spurious ACPR Power On Down RF Envelope FSK Pulse Constellation Eye Diagram Symbol Table Power Power on poma REIR na nn Sey Se A Se Sse ah ae Measurement items m Carrier frequency m OBW Occupied Bandwidth m EBW Emission Bandwidth Maximum EIRP Effective Isotropically Radiated Power m Spurious m ACPR Adjacent Channel Leak Power Ratio m Transmission Power on down rise fall time m Settling time m Overshoot m Undershoot m On Off width m Duty cycle m On Off ripple m Rise Fall time m
284. ith blue on the graticule RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 173 Trigger 6 Press the Reset Mask to Default side key The default mask appears see Figure 3 122 A Point A Point B Figure 3 122 Default mask NOTE In the following steps use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad to move the points 7 Change the position of Point A a Press the Select Next Point side key until Point A is selected b Press the Set Selected Point X side key and set the horizontal position of Point A to two divisions from the left edge see Figure 3 123 Figure 3 123 Changing the position of Point A 3 174 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger 8 Change the position of Point B a Press the Select Next Point side key to select Point B b Press the Set Selected Point X side key and set the horizontal position of Point B to three divisions from the left edge see Figure 3 124 Figure 3 124 Changing the position of Point B 9 Add Point C a Press the Insert New Point side key with Point B active The new point appears halfway between Point B and the next point in the right side b Press the Set Selected Point X side key and set the horizontal position of Point C to five divisions from th
285. key on the front panel and select Audio Measurement using the side key 2 Press the Measure key and select a measurement item For example press the Signal Noise amp Distortion side key to perform the S N measurement 3 Press the Meas Setup key and then press the Demod Type side key to select the input signal type Baseband for a non modulated signal AM or FM RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 67 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 4 Adjust the amplitude and frequency to display the spectrum waveform Refer to page 3 135 for setting frequency and span Refer to page 3 143 for setting amplitude NOTE A reference level that is too high will cause a higher noise level in the resulting audio spectrum Set the reference level to the minimum value that does not cause overrange refer to page 3 147 Easy setting of the center frequency in baseband When you select Baseband for Demod Type in the Meas Setup menu enter 0 zero for Center Freq in the Frequency Channel menu Afterward the center frequency is set to half a span automatically 5 Press the Meas Setup key and set the measurement parameters as needed For details refer to Meas Setup Menu in each measurement section beginning on page 3 69 Measurement with Higher Resolution To enhance measurement resolution you can use the waveform averaging and the high resolution FFT 1 Press the Trace Avg key 2 Press the Trace Type side key to select one of the fo
286. l provides operating basics for the WLAN analysis m RSA3303B RSA3308B amp RSA3408B Option 30 User Manual provides operating basics for the 3GPP Release 99 and Release 5 uplink and downlink analysis m RSA3303B RSA3308B amp RSA3408B Option 40 User Manual provides operating basics for the 3GPP Release 6 analysis xxii RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Preface Conventions This manual uses the following conventions m Front panel key and control labels are printed in boldface For example Press Span To identify keys on the front panel the area name label precedes the key For example Press the Mode Demod key m Menu and on screen form titles are printed in the manual in the same case initial capitals as they appear on the analyzer screen such as Span Source and Channel Power If it is part of a procedure the menu title is shown in boldface For example Press the Source side key m series of keys controls and or menu items separated by an arrow symbol gt indicates the order in which to perform the listed tasks For example Select RBW FFT gt Filter Shape gt Gaussian RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual xxiii Preface xxiv RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Getting Started Product Overview The RSA3408B is a portable real time spectrum analyzer having RF measure ment capability up to 8 GHz with wide vector span of 36 MHz The real time spectrum analyzer has a different architecture from
287. l property laws and treaties The SOFTWARE is licensed not sold All rights reserved IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT EULA DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE INSTEAD PROMPTLY CONTACT TJ FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE S FOR A REFUND ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE This EULA grants you the following license You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE NOT FAULT TOLERANT THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT TJ HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE AND MS HAS RELIED UPON TJ TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY PERFORMANCE ACCURACY AND EFFORT INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE IS WITH YOU ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM AND ARE NOT BINDING ON MS NOTE ON JAVA SUPPORT The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use or resale as onli
288. lative to the mean value at the center Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the PDF measurement contains the following controls On the common controls for the digital modulation analysis refer to Meas Setup Menu page 3 49 Linear Signal Region Unit Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 61 Linear Signal Region Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 61 Horizontal Division Sets the horizontal interval between display points Range 0 01 to 1 dB the default is 0 1 dB PAUSE MEAS SETUP a Tekironix RSA 3408B Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 40 ps Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets Marker 3 180078125 ms Off 5 15 dBm Overview Power versus Time Modulation dem Type 15QAM Subview AM AM TIA Use View Define gt Subview Content to dB bacca uh select the display SEGETES 90 Auto Carrier En _ m Peak amplitude Start 10 ms Scale 1 ms REED RN m Average amplitude Ref RETESET OF Hz Peak 1 97 dBm MM Average 3 80 dem E 77 2724213991 Measurement data Data B Linear Signal m Peak amplitude Peak 0 79 dm inear Signa Average 4 75 dam Region Unit m Average amplitude as dB dBm Linear Signal Region dB 10 0 n 95 Horizontal Start 15 dB Stop 15 db Division 0 1
289. ledge that SOFTWARE is of US origin You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE including the U S Export Administration Regulations as well as end user end use and country destination restrictions issued by U S and other governments For additional information on exporting the SOFTWARE see http www microsoft com exporting LIMITATION ON SOFTWARE PROGRAMS USED ON THE DEVICE The combination of software programs you use on the DEVICE shall address not more than two 2 general office automation or consumer computing functions Such functions include but are not limited to email word processing spreadsheets database network browsing scheduling and personal finance STORAGE NETWORK USE The SOFTWARE may not be installed accessed displayed run shared or used concurrently on or from different computers including a workstation terminal or other digital electronic device Computing System Notwithstanding the foregoing and except as otherwise provided below any number of Computing Systems may access or otherwise utilize the file and print services and internet information services of the SOFTWARE if included You may use the SOFTWARE on a single DEVICE as interactive workstation software but not as server software However you may permit a maximum of ten 10 Computing Systems to connect to the DEVICE to access and use services of the SOFTWARE such as file and print servi
290. llowing items m Normal Default Displays the normal spectrum m Average Averages the spectrum traces to reduce noise in the waveform Use the Number Of Averages side key to set the number of traces to combine ranging from 1 to 1000 m Hi Res Allows you to set the number of FFT points from the basic 1024 1024x1 up to 65536 1024x64 Use the Extended Resolution side key to select the number of points x1 x2 x4 x8 x16 x32 or x64 The frames used for averaging or high resolution FFT are surrounded by a green box on the spectrogram see Figure 3 57 fra The frames used for averaging or high resolution FFT are surrounded by a green box fram Marker 250 kHz 79 94 dem 2 4 ms 0 frame 57 me Center 125 kHz Span 250 kHz Figure 3 57 Spectrogram display in the average or high resolution mode 3 68 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Signal Noise and Measures audio quality such as S N Signal to Noise ratio and THD Total Distortion Harmonic Distortion Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the Signal Noise and Distortion measurement contains the following controls Demod Type Specifies the modulation scheme of the input signal m Baseband Directly input a non modulated audio signal to measure m AM Demodulates the AM signal to measure m FM Default Demodulates the FM signal to measure Audio LPF Selects the audio lo
291. loor because the noise is generated after the RF attenuator Mixer Level Selects the input level of the primary mixer when Mixer is selected in RF Atten Mixer Range 25 to 0 dBm in 5 dB steps default 15 dBm Select the level according to measurement type The default value is 15 dBm Use the default value in most cases This level can be increased up to 0 dBm when a high dynamic range is required for measurements such as the ACPR Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ratio measurement NOTE As the mixer level increases the distortion also increases RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 145 Setting Amplitude Basic Setting Procedure 3 146 Vertical Scale S A mode only except Real Time S A with Zoom Sets the vertical scale per division The setting range depends on Vertical Units described below as shown in Table 3 27 Table 3 27 Vertical scale setting range Vertical units Scale setting dBm dBuV 1to 10 V 223 6 n to 22 36 m uV 223 6 m to 22 36 k 100 p to 100 u 1 2 5 sequence with the general purpose knob Arbitrary value with the numeric keypad Vertical Units S A mode only except Real Time S A with Zoom Selects the unit of amplitude scale dBm dBuV V uV or W Corrections Sets amplitude correction Refer to page 3 148 for details of amplitude correction To set amplitude follow these steps 1 Press the Amplitude key on the front panel 2 Set the reference level using the Ref L
292. ls Press the Amplitude key on the front panel 2 Press the Corrections side key 3 Do either of these two steps W Press the Edit Table side key to create an amplitude correction file Refer to page 3 150 for creating the correction file Press the Load Table side key to specify an amplitude correction file Refer to page 3 251 for file operation 4 Press the Amplitude Offset side key to set the amplitude offset if necessary 5 Press the Frequency Offset side key to set the frequency offset if necessary 6 Press the Interpolation side key to select scaling for the interpolation a Press the Freq Interpolation side key to select the scale for frequency interpolation Lin linear or Log logarithmic b Press the Ampl Interpolation side key to select the scale for amplitude interpolation Lin linear or dB logarithmic 7 Press the Amplitude Table side key to select On The amplitude correction is now applied to the waveform The amplitude correction is applied to the acquired data and the corrected waveform is shown When the amplitude correction is turned on Correc tion is displayed in the setup display area at the upper right of the screen as shown in Figure 3 108 Tekironix RSA 3408B 20 Corrections SSS M Frequency 800 MHz RBW 50 kHz Correction gt ancel Back Span 10 MHz Trace 1 Normal Amplitude Offset Input Att 20 dB Trace2 Off dB Frequency Offset Hz
293. lyzer cannot distinguish between the rising edge of the power on CW and that of the RF envelope pulse In the measurement setup enter the bit rate or Tari and perform the analysis using the following steps 1 Press the Meas Setup key on the front panel Press the Standard Type side key and select the standard Select Link Modulation Type and Decoding Format as appropriate Select Off in the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari side key a YS N Press the Bit Rate side key and set the bit rate or press the Tari side key and set the Tari Enter a value near the true value within about 20 of the true value 6 Press the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari side key to select On NOTE When you set Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari to On the analyzer estimates the bit rate or Tari from your input value and performs measurements based on the estimate If you want to use your input value directly in measurements without using an estimate leave the Auto Bit Rate or Auto Tari setting Off 7 Press the Analyze side key to perform the analysis The analysis is performed based on the bit rate or Tari set value After the analysis has been completed the estimated bit rate or Tari is displayed in the Bit Rate side key In the constellation eye diagram and symbol table measurements the calculated bit rate or Tari is also displayed in the main view see Figure 3 72 on page 3 96 3 90 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod
294. m edge of the vertical axis 3 274 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Format XLeftLabel Represents the label on the left of the horizontal axis Center center frequency when XLeftLabel is Span span or Start start frequency when XLeftLabel is Stop stop frequency UpdateAreas Internal use only YUnit Represents the unit of the vertical axis dBm dBuV V or W NBW Specifies NBW Noise Bandwidth when setting FFT parameters or RBW Resolution Bandwidth when setting RBW parameters YMiddleUnit Represents the unit of the vertical axis scale Specify dB when YUnit is dBm For all other values of YUnit the YUnit value is used YScale Required Represents the scale of the vertical axis UpdatePosition Internal use only Data Block Pairs of a power value and a mask value are written in order with a tab between the power and the mask see the figure below The number of lines is indicated by XNum in the file header Power1 tab Mask 1 Power2 tab Mask2 Power3 tab Mask 3 Number indicated by XNum PowerN tab Mask N Part of the data block might look like this 100 875531204 0 111 253515034 101 342080442 96 7588947616 98 5946571418 oO For example the first line indicates that the power is 100 875531204 dBm the mask value is 0 Mask Value The mask value represents whether to display the data m 0 Indicates that the data is displayed m 1 Indicates that th
295. me modes only Sets the minimum horizontal jump that will be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down For example when Peak Search Freq Threshold is set to 1 kHz the next peak is recognized only if it is 1 kHz or more distant from the first peak see Figure 3 172 Example Peak Search Freq Threshold 1 kHz The marker moves higher in Bad to the next signal Not recognized as a peak 1kHz Figure 3 172 Setting the minimum frequency jump Use the following steps to set the minimum jump 1 Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel 2 Press the Go to page 2 of 2 bottom side key to show the next menu page 3 Press either of the following side keys depending on the measurement mode and then set the minimum jump Peak Search Freq Threshold in the S A mode Peak Search Hor Threshold in the Demod and Time modes RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Using the Online Help This section describes the analyzer help system and how to access it The online help system is integrated as part of the analyzer user interface using the Windows help system You can use the front panel arrow keys as in the following procedure a mouse or a keyboard to navigate through the help system See page 3 248 for information about using a mouse or keyboard to navigate through the online help The help system provides information about operating this analyzer providing the following help r
296. measurement Measurement result display items Symbol value definition eee Signal source measurement items Phase noise measurement frequency band Bin width for each decade The number of waveform points Frequency and span setting range Reference level setting range 2 8 2 11 2 13 2 16 2 23 xiii Table of Contents xiv Table 3 27 Vertical scale setting range 3 146 Table 3 28 How to acquire a waveform 3 165 Table 3 29 Trigger level setting range 3 167 Table 3 30 Characteristics and usage of windows 3 185 Table 3 31 FFT window and bandpass filter 3 187 Table 3 32 Trace 2 2 o Rn 3 193 Table 3 33 Averaging method 3 194 Table 3 34 Number of bins FFT points 1024 3 200 Table 3 35 Bitmap color scheme 3 207 Table 3 36 Symbol value of CPM 3 219 Table 3 37 Front panel keys for online help 3 247 Table 3 38 Type of files used in theanalyzer 3 251 Table 3 39 File save operation 3 255 Table 3 40 Preset file names 3 256 Table 3 41 File load operation 3 259 Table 3 42 Combinations of valid A P Q 3 271
297. ments If the subview displays nothing check the following Subview Random Jitter vs Time or Integrated Phase Noise vs Time Make sure that the jitter measurement range set by Rj Start Stop Offset Fre quency in the Meas Setup menu is within the display range of the C N versus Offset frequency in the main view Subview C N vs Time Make sure that C N Offset Frequency in the Meas Setup menu is within the display range of the C N versus Offset frequency in the main view Error messages m Message No Carrier 3 130 In this case lower Carrier Threshold Level in the Meas Setup menu Message Out of Span In this case decrease Carrier Bandwidth in the Meas Setup menu or match the carrier frequency with the center frequency RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Real Time Spurious Spurious measurements are made in real time The main view shows the Measurement spurious display the same as in the spurious measurement described on page 3 125 except that this spurious display is real time You can observe the noisogram or C N versus offset frequency in the subview NOTE In the real time spurious measurement the number of FFT points is fixed to 1024 Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for the Real Time Spurious measurement Analyze Performs measurement for acquisition data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu pr
298. menu items are available in the S A spectrum analysis mode except Real Time S A Frequency Offset Sets the frequency offset The effective correction range of the amplitude correction table shifts by the offset value Amplitude Table Enables or disables amplitude correction Select On to enable the correction Edit Table Creates a correction table Input pairs of frequency and amplitude correction value m Select Point To Edit Selects a row to be edited Frequency Enters the frequency of a correction point Amplitude Enters an amplitude correction value for the specified frequency m Delete Point Deletes the selected row m Add New Point Adds a row with the values in the previous row copied as initial values m Done Editing Table Confirms the input and adds a new row m Clear Table Deletes the correction data from the memory Interpolation Selects the horizontal and the vertical scale for interpolating correction data Freq Interpolation Selects the horizontal scale for interpolating correction data Linear or Logarithmic m Ampl Interpolation Selects the vertical scale for interpolating correction data Linear or dB Load Table Reads an amplitude correction table from a file Save Table Writes a created correction table to a file RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 149 Setting Amplitude Amplitude Correction File Correction value 3 150 Before performing amplitude correction you
299. mposed from two 40 MHz 20 MHz scans When the span is below 36 MHz in the baseband and RF band one physical frame corresponds to one logical frame this is referred to as Vector mode and the span in vector mode is called the Vector span In the other cases one logical frame is composed of multiple physical frames and this is called Scalar mode Span lt 36 MHz Vector mode Physical frame Scan data Logical frame Display data Frame 0 C Frame0 Frame 1 gt Frame 2 gt Frame2 Frame N gt FrameN Span gt 36 MHz Scalar mode Physical frame Scan data Logical frame Display data Frame 0 gt Frame 1 Frame 2 PC Frame0 Frame 4 Frame 0 N Frame 1 Frame 2 PE Frame 1 Frame N Figure 3 99 Vector mode and scalar mode RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Amplitude This section describes the fundamental amplitude settings for observing a spectrum You can add correction to the waveform display by considering frequency characteristics of external devices such as antennas or preamplifiers Press the Amplitude key to set amplitude Figure 3 100 shows the Amplitude Amplitude Menu menu structure Frequency Channel Span S A mode except Real Time S A with Zoom Amplitude 1 Ref Level Au
300. multiplication display x1 default x2 x4 x8 x16 or x32 The phase multiplication display facilitates observation of noisy CPM signals by multiplying measurement signal phase by the constant to reduce the number of phase states and expand the phase difference between adjacent symbols see Figure 3 146 The phase at a measurement symbol point is expressed by the following formula 0M 0 AO Where Om Phase at the measurement symbol point Phase at the ideal symbol point A0 Phase difference between the measurement and ideal symbol points N Multiplication constant Marker 2 7 ms 0 981 22 82 deg 15 15 2 237 2 237 Marker 2 7 ms 0 981 90 24 deg 15 15 2 237 2 237 Phase Multiplication x1 displaying 32 symbol points Phase Multiplication x4 displaying 8 symbol points Figure 3 146 Phase multiplication display for a CPM signal RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views EVM View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu Vertical axis EVM The horizontal axis indicates time and the vertical axis indicates EVM amplitude or phase in the EVM view You can display this view in EVM analysis of the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 57 The Scale menu for the EVM view contains the following controls see Figure 3 147 Auto Scale Sets the starting value and the scale of the vertical axis automatical
301. must describe the frequency characteristics of the external device in an amplitude correction file cor You can use word processing software to create the file on a computer and then use a disk or network to load the file into the analyzer Alternatively you can create correction data on the analyzer screen The rules for creating an amplitude correction file are given on page 3 151 and the procedures are given on page 3 152 File Format A correction file contains amplitude correction values at each frequency in the following format Frequency 1 Amplitude correction value 1 Frequency 2 Amplitude correction value 2 Frequency 3 Amplitude correction value 3 Example The following amplitude correction file has correction data for three points Correction data Correction file description 10 dB at 10 MHz 10M 10 5 dB at 100 MHz 100M 5 0 dB at 1 GHz 1G 0 In this example only the data from 10MHz to 1GHz is corrected see Figure 3 104 The correction value in the display range is obtained using linear interpolation between input points A waveform obtained by subtracting the correction value from the input waveform is displayed Displayed waveform Input waveform Correction value Display range 10 dB O 5 dB Linear interpolation 0dB 10 MHz 100 MHz 1GHz Frequency Correction range Figure 3 104 Amplitude correction example RSA3408B Analyzer User
302. n m For repair or calibration ship your instrument with the USB flash drive to Tektronix RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual D 1 Appendix D Using the Removable Hard Disk Drive Option 06 W After repair or calibration run the Backup exe program stored in the USB flash drive to back up the USB flash drive contents onto the analyzer s internal hard disk on the Windows desktop of the analyzer display the contents of the USB flash drive and then double click Backup exe 1 Loosen the screws to open the door 1 2 Unplug the connector lt 3 the hard disk cartridge 20000 2000 200000 000 00000 99099 9 00000 22220 2000 20000 Figure D 1 Detaching the removable hard disk drive D 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Sg EEE Appendix E Restoring the Instrument Operating System ZN You can restore the instrument operating system from a file on the instrument hard disk drive CAUTION Using the restore process reformats the hard drive and reinstalls the operating system All saved data will be lost If possible save important files to external media before performing a system restore Restoring the Operating System from the Instrument Hard Disk RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Perform the following steps to restore the operating system 1 Restart the instrument During the boot up process you will see the following message at the bottom of the screen
303. n This product has been classified as Monitoring and Control equipment and is outside the scope of the 2002 95 EC RoHS Directive RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Preface This is the user manual for the RSA3408B 8 GHz Real Time Spectrum Analyzer It covers the following information About This Manual Product features Installation Operation Menu structure Accessories This manual is composed of the following chapters Getting Started describes the functions architecture installation and calibration of the analyzer Operating Basics explains the functions of the front rear and side panels and the menus This section also provides tutorials for beginners It gives step by step procedures for measurement using a signal generator Reference explains the basic concepts of measurement processes and application specific operations It also describes the front panel keys and menus Appendices provide additional information including the menu tree accessories and cleaning information First time users should install the analyzer in Getting Started and then go to Operating Basics and perform the tutorials beginning on Page 2 29 The analyzer uses Microsoft Windows XP as the operating system This manual does not describe common usage of Windows XP Refer to your Windows manuals as necessary RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Preface Related Documents In addition to this user manual the following documentation is a
304. n expands carrier detection range but loses accuracy Narrowing the span increases measurement time The phase noise measurement is performed within one of the four frequency bands listed in Table 3 22 A measurement outside the band is not per formed Table 3 22 Phase noise measurement frequency band Measurement band Frequency range Note Baseband 0 Hz to 40 MHz Set a value of center frequency span 2 within the frequency range RF1 40 MHz to 3 5 GHz RF 3 5 GHz to 6 5 GHz Set a center frequency within the frequency range RF3 5 GHz to 8 GHz m Tables 3 23 and 3 24 show the bin width and the number of waveform points for C N versus Offset frequency measurement Table 3 23 Bin width for each decade Decade Bin width 10 Hz to 100 Hz 0 195 Hz 100 Hz to 1 kHz 1 953 Hz 1 kHz to 10 kHz 1 953 Hz 10 kHz to 100 kHz 15 625 Hz 100 kHz to 1 MHz 156 25 Hz 1 MHz to 10 MHz 1 5625 kHz 10 MHz to 100 MHz 12 5 kHz 3 124 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Table 3 24 The number of waveform points Waveform The number of points Point placement Averaged waveform 100 per decade Linear on the logarithmic frequency axis Max Min waveform 460 per decade Linear on the linear frequency axis Error messages M Message No Carrier In this case lower Carrier Threshold Level in the Meas Setup menu m Message Out of Span In this case decrease Carrier Bandwidth in the Meas Setup menu or match
305. nal audio quality measure ments such as S N Signal to Noise ratio and THD Total Harmonic Distortion The measurement items are divided into three groups as listed in Table 3 9 select the item using the Measure key You can measure burst signals as well as CW Continuous Wave The demodulated signal waveform is displayed in real time in the spectrum and spectrogram You can select the following audio filters CCITT C Message LPF Low Pass Filter and HPF High Pass Filter and de emphasis process The measurement resolution can be enhanced by trace averaging and high resolution FFT NOTE The audio measurements are based on the real time spectrum analysis function in the S A mode Real Time S A Refer to Real Time Analysis on page 3 23 Table 3 9 Audio measurement items Measure menu Measurement items Signal Noise and Distortion m S N Signal to Noise Ratio m SINAD Signal to Noise And Distortion m THD Total Harmonic Distortion m TNHD Total Non Harmonic Distortion m Audio frequency m Audio level m AM modulation depth Maximum Minimum and RMS m FM frequency deviation RMS Peak Peak to Peak and Peak to Peak 2 Harmonics m Harmonic frequency level m Non harmonic frequency level Hum amp Noise Ratio m RMS power ratio Baseband RMS modulation depth ratio AM m RMS frequency deviation ratio FM Basic Procedure Use the following procedure to perform the audio measurements 1 Press the Demod
306. nalyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Meas Setup Menu This subsection describes the Meas Setup menu items common to all the measurements in the digital modulation analysis For the Meas Setup menu items specific to a measurement refer to that measurement description Parameter Presets Selects a communication standard Parameters are set according to the standard you have selected refer to Table 3 7 Table 3 7 Communication standard and preset parameters Modulation Type Selects a modulation method Available measurement items depend on the modulation method as shown in Table 3 8 Table 3 8 Modulation type and available measurement item Messurementitem _ iAxQPSK PSK OAM GMSK ask FSK OOPSK Pas Constellation EVM Le Lf te Y Power versus Time zZ Symbol Table E Eye Diagram a e AMJAM AM PM CCDF PDF pue c exec pe FSK Deviation E d xy Wmeq 1 Includes BPSK QPSK 8PSK D8PSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM and 256QAM 2 ncludes GFSK FSK 4FSK 8FSK and 16FSK RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 49 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 50 Restrictions of Use m When the modulation type is P25 C4FM the analysis is performed only for the span of 20 kHz and 50 kHz For the 50 kHz span Acquisition Length in the Acquisition Analysis menu must be set to greater
307. ncy settling time For the Real Time concept refer to Real Time Analysis page 1 3 Features of the Real Time Mode page 3 23 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 119 Time Analysis Time Mode Basic Procedure Use the following procedure to perform the signal source analysis NOTE If you use a signal input Input Signal Input Port other than RF the measurements are not guaranteed 1 Press the Time key on the front panel 2 Select Signal Source Analysis using the side keys 3 Select a measurement item by pressing the side key For example press the Phase Noise side key to perform the phase noise measurement 4 Adjust the amplitude and frequency to display the measurement waveform Refer to page 3 135 for setting frequency and span Refer to page 3 143 for setting amplitude 5 Setthe analysis range in the overview This is not necessary in the Phase Noise and the Spurious measurements Refer to page 3 34 for details of the analysis range settings If you use the zoom function do these steps m Press the View Define key m Press the Overview Content side key and select Zoom Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 27 for setting the analysis area on the spectrogram with the zoom function 6 Press the Meas Setup key and set the measurement parameters Refer to Meas Setup Menu in each measurement description 7 Press the Analyze side key and carry out the analysis This is for the Real Time Phas
308. nd Ending Relative Limit Rel OR Abs Fail is detected when one of the absolute measurement results is larger than the linearly interpolated value between Beginning Absolute Limit and Ending Absolute Limit OR one of the relative measurement results is larger than the linearly interpolated value between Beginning Relative Limit and Ending Relative Limit Rel AND Abs Fail is detected when one of the absolute measurement results is larger than the linearly interpolated value between Beginning Absolute Limit and Ending Absolute Limit AND one of the relative measurement results is larger than the linearly interpolated value between Beginning Relative Limit and Ending Relative Limit Beginning Absolute Limit 200 to 200 dBm Ending Absolute Limit 200 to 200 dBm Beginning Relative Limit 200 to 200 dBm Ending Relative Limit 200 to 200 dBm 1 Available when Offset From Channel is selected for Measurement in the Meas Setup menu Saving and Loading the Limit Mask The limit mask set in the limits editor can be saved to a CSV file csv by pressing Save gt Save SEM Limits and loaded from the file by pressing Load gt Load SEM Limits Refer to File Operations on page 3 251 and Limit Mask File Format on page 3 279 for details RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 17 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode DPX Spectrum Display DPX Spectrum technology enables you to see how traces change over time displaying transient and intermittent events that c
309. ne control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance such as in the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage Sun Microsystems Inc has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer NO LIABILITY FOR CERTAIN DAMAGES EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U S TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS U S 250 00 LIMITATIONS ON REVERSE ENGINEERING DECOMPILATION AND DISASSEMBLY You may not reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the SOFTWARE except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You acknow
310. nel See Figure 2 1 on page 2 2 for the front panel connectors m IQ Option 03 only Uses the signal from the I INPUT and Q INPUT connectors on the rear panel See Figure 2 2 on page 2 4 for the rear panel connectors NOTE IQ INPUT Option 03 only The IQ input gain of the analyzer is set in 10 dB steps To maximize the dynamic range you may need to adjust the signal level externally or insert attenuators in the I and Q signal paths When you calibrate the IQ offset set the IQ input signal level to zero externally The IQ offset calibration is included in the center offset calibration Refer to Calibrating Center Offset on page 1 26 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 249 Selecting Input Source Call00M Uses the internal calibration signal 100 MHz 20 dBm The signal is connected internally Refer to Functional Check on page 1 16 for using the cal signal to check the system performance Cal25M Uses the internal calibration signal 25 MHz 20 dBm The signal is connected internally Reference Source Selects the source for reference frequency Int Uses the internal clock 10 MHz simulated sine wave m Ext Uses the 10 MHz sine wave of 10 to 6 dBm from the REF IN connector on the rear panel when you want to synchronize the analyzer with other instrument s The reference clock is available from the REF OUT connector on the rear panel 3 250 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual File Operations The inst
311. nel of the analyzer You can use either of two ports Refer to Side Panel Interface on page 2 6 for connecting the USB devices If the analyzer is connected to a network through a LAN interface you can also use a network printer Install the printer driver using the Windows XP printer wizard Refer to the printer manual for the installation method Refer to page 2 27 for using Windows XP To print a copy of the analyzer screen follow these steps 1 Press the Print key on the front panel and select Black or White as the background color with the Background color side key 2 Display the measurement to be printed and stop data acquisition 3 Press the Print key again The screen image data is captured on the internal memory with the background color set in step 1 4 Press the Printer side key and select a destination printer 5 Press the Print now side key to start printing If the printer driver displays a message during printing follow the instructions RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Screen Creating a File You can save a screen image to a file as bitmap data and read the data into a word processor to create a report for example To save the file to a floppy disk insert it to the floppy disk drive 1 Press the Print key on the front panel and select Black or White of the background color with the Background color side key 2 Display the measurement to be copied and stop data acquisition 3 Pr
312. ng exterior cleaning use only enough solution to dampen the cloth or swab There is no periodic lubrication required for this instrument Consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative for cleaning the analyzer interior RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual EEUU EEUU Appendix G Options and Accessories This appendix describes the options and standard and optional accessories that are available for the analyzer Options The following options can be ordered for the analyzer RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Option 1A External preamplifier 20 dB gain to 3 GHz Option L5 Provides Japanese language user manual and programmer manual instead of English manuals Option 02 Option 03 Option 05 Option 06 Option 10 Option 21 Option 24 Option 25 Option 26 Option 28 Option 29 Option 30 software Option 40 Option C3 Option C5 Option D1 Option D3 Option D5 256 MB data memory with frequency mask trigger IO input function Digital IO output function Removable hard disk drive Audio measurement function Advanced measurement suite GSM EDGE analysis software cdma2000 analysis software cdma2000 1xEV DO analysis software TD SCDMA analysis software WLAN 802 11a b g n analysis software 3GPP Release 99 and Release 5 uplink and downlink analysis 3GPP Release 6 HSUPA analysis software Calibration service 3 years Calibration service 5 years Calibration data report Calibration data repo
313. ngs in most examples m Preparations Connecting devices and applying the power m Displaying spectrum m Using markers and peak search W Using averaging and comparison displays m Displaying DPX spectrum m Displaying spectrogram W Spectrum analysis m Modulation analysis m Turning off the power NOTE You must complete the installation procedures starting on page 1 11 before performing any of the following steps RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 29 Tutorial Pre 2 30 parations Connecting the Signal Generator This tutorial uses a digitally modulated signal The following equipment is used as a signal source 1 Analog signal generator example HP8657B One 50 coaxial cable Connect the output of the signal generator to the RF INPUT connector on the analyzer front panel using a coaxial cable see Figure 2 26 00000000 I J00C JDOE j80 0000 0000C Ley U U U RF INPUT N type connector Figure 2 26 Cable connection 2 Set the signal generator as follows Center frequency 100 MHz Output level 10 dBm Modulation type AM Modulation source Internal 10 kHz Modulation depth 50 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual
314. ngth larger to increase the amount of data The following pages show examples for each measurement item Refer to page 3 203 for information about setting scale and formatting each view Refer to page 3 38 for information about changing the overview and subview RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 55 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Constellation Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a constellation diagram Measurement Figure 3 45 shows an example The main view displays the measurement results Measurement results from the top EVM RMS Peak Magnitude error RMS Peak Phase error RMS Peak Waveform quality o Symbol length Frequency error Origin offset IQ feedthrough Scale and the constellation diagram When the modulation type Meas Setup gt Modulation Type is P25 C4FM the modulation fidelity is displayed as the measurement result NOTE In the constellation view I and Q signals are normalized to prevent the scale from changing when signal attenuation changes For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 49 For setting views refer to page 3 203 Tekironix RSA 3408B 9 gt PAUSE MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum pee Presets ALR 223 59375 us Marker 1 49885625 GHz Off 2 746 dB 88 317 dBm 5 5 Modulation dBm dBm 128QAM di 10 Modulation cB Parameters peus Auto Carri
315. nt result display items 18000 4 1 18000 6 A B C 14443 2 A B 18092 424k C0G1 and C1G1 standards and Manual Modulation depth Modulation index Frequency error Auto bit rate on off 1 Calculated bit rate 2 Calculated symbol rate 2 Subcarrier jitter rms 3 Frequency offset 3 Calculated Tari data 0 4 duration of a data 0 Calculated Tari data 1 4 duration of a data 1 18000 7 standard 15693 2 standard Frequency deviation Modulation depth Preamble detection Modulation index Interrogator Tag Frequency error Frequency error Calculated bit rate Auto bit rate on off 1 Calculated bit rate Calculated symbol rate 1 Set in the Meas Setup menu 2 For other than PIE decoding 3 For Subcarrier BPSK only For PIE decoding only RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Manual FSK modulation only Frequency deviation Frequency error Auto bit rate on off 1 Calculated bit rate Calculated symbol rate 3 97 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Figure 3 73 shows the definition of the modulation depth and index Voltage A A Modulation depth A B A A Modulation index A B A B B gt 0 Figure 3 73 Definition of the modulation depth and index Table 3 20 shows the definition of symbol values displayed in the symbol table Table 3 20 Symbol value definition Symbol value Definition 0 1 Don t care Preamble
316. nter Ann MHz Span 15 MHz Center Freq Spectrum Analyzer Measurement OTD j Center Freq MHz 80 Di 200k Figure 2 6 Display screen configuration 7 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 9 Interface Maps Elements of the Display Setup display area Displays the current hardware value Refer to Setup Display on page 2 13 Progress bar Indicates the progress of the acquisition cycle on the left bar and the measurement cycle on the right bar The progress fills up in blue from left to right Date Time display area Shows the current date and time Status display area Shows the trigger status Refer to Status Display on page 2 11 Side menu display area When you press a menu key on the front panel the menu associated with that key is displayed Refer to page 2 15 for details of menu items Menu setting display area Displays the last setting of the menu item that can be set with the general purpose knob View The View window displays the waveform or the measurement results Multiple views can be displayed on one display screen depending on the measurement mode For more information refer to Spectrum Analysis S A mode page 3 1 Modulation Analysis Demod mode page 3 31 Time Analysis Time mode page 3 99 Setting Views page 3 203 Measurement function display area Displays the measurement function currently in use the settings of the Mode and Measure menus RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual I
317. nterface Maps Status Display status display area in the upper right side of the screen see Figure 2 7 shows the instrument status as listed in Table 2 2 Status display Tekironix RSA 3408B 9 2 m Y a PEEL Frequency 800 MHz RBW 80 kHz Cancel Back Span 15 MHz Trace 1 Normal Center Freq 4 Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Hz Boom 0 Start Freq dBm Hz SM Figure 2 7 Status display Table 2 2 Status display Item Description ARM The pre trigger portion of the acquisition record is filling A trigger event occurring during this state will not be recognized READY Pre trigger data has been acquired and the instrument is waiting for a trigger event TRIG D Pre trigger data has been acquired and a trigger event has been detected The instrument is now acquiring post trigger data FREE RUN The instrument acquires and measures without waiting for a trigger event PAUSE The user has temporarily stopped acquisition measurement cycling The acquired data is stored in the data memory from address zero in order of acquisition When you set a trigger condition the acquired data is stored in the pre trigger region until the trigger event occurs Thereafter it is stored in the post trigger region see Figure 2 8 Data memory Pre trigger region Post trigger region A Time gt Trigger poin
318. nu 3 252 Main view modulation analysis screen 3 33 Manuals list xxii PDF xxii Map interface 2 1 Marker Bitmap trace 3 242 menu 3 236 operation 3 235 Marker Setup 3 237 MAT file format 3 278 Max Hold description 3 197 Meas Setup menu digital modulation analysis 3 49 FM Demod measurement 3 43 3 44 PM Demod measurement 3 45 pulse measurement 3 116 Measurement mode 2 23 Measurements ACPR 3 6 AM demod 3 43 AM AM 3 61 AM PM 3 63 analog modulation analysis 3 41 C N 3 7 carrier frequency 3 10 CCDF 3 64 3 104 channel power 3 5 constellation 3 56 digital modulation analysis Option 21 only 3 48 EBW 3 10 Index 3 Index EVM 3 57 eye diagram 3 60 FM demod 3 44 frequency versus time 3 103 FSK deviations 3 66 IO versus time 3 46 3 101 IO frequency versus time 3 58 modulation analysis Demod mode 3 31 OBW 3 8 PDF 3 65 PM demod 3 45 power versus time 3 59 3 102 pulse 3 109 pulse spectrum 3 47 real time analysis 3 23 spectrum analysis S A mode 3 1 spurious signal 3 12 symbol table 3 60 time analysis Time mode 3 99 Menu Acquisition Analysis 3 157 Amplitude 3 143 amplitude correction 3 149 Average 3 192 basic operation 2 18 FFT 3 180 Frequency 3 136 front panel keys 2 3 Help 3 245 Input 3 249 Lines 3 228 Lines Real Time S A 3 232 Load 3 252 Markers 3 236 Print 3 283 RBW 3 180 Save 3 252 Span 3 136 Sy
319. ny traces are accumulated 10 dB Reset Average Reset Average Restart averaging Display Detection Max 100 Fee dem Center 100 MHz Span 100 kHz Save Trace Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Number Of Averages 64 Figure 3 136 Displaying an averaged waveform 3 198 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Compared Display Display Trace 1 as a normal spectrum and Trace 2 as the averaged waveform concurrently and compare them l Display the spectrum of the measurement signal 2 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 3 Display Trace 1 as a normal spectrum a Press the Select Trace side key to select 1 b Press the Trace 1 Type side key and select Normal 4 Display Trace 2 as the averaged waveform a Press the Select Trace side key to select 2 b Press the Trace 2 Type side key and select Average Max Hold or Min Hold The waveform currently being acquired trace 1 in yellow and the averaged waveform trace 2 in green are displayed together Figure 3 137 shows an example of the concurrent display of the ordinal spectrum and its Max Hold waveform dBm Trace 2 averaged waveform This figure shows an example of Max Hold Trace 1 ordinary spectrum waveform This figure shows an example of a digitally modulated signal dB pu Pri ARRA Bm Center 800 MHz Span 200 kHz Figure 3 13
320. odulated signal process in the analyzer Figure 3 44 Signals outlines the process Digitally modulated signal process mechanism Digital data Measurement Demodulating Modulating Reference 9 filter mechanism mechanism filter Analysis information Measurement data Reference data Compare Display Display Constellation m EVM m CCDF m Symbol table m AM AM wm PDF m Eye diagram m AM PM FSK deviations Figure 3 44 Process flow for digitally modulated signals The input signal goes through the measurement filter after being converted into a digital signal and then is stored as measurement data and is concurrently demodulated The demodulated signal is modulated again goes through the reference filter and is stored as reference data The displays of Constellation Symbol table and Eye diagram are created based on measurement data and those of the EVM AM AM AM PM CCDF PDF and FSK deviations based on the comparison of the measurement data and the reference data 3 54 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Basic Procedure perform digital modulation analysis follow these steps 1 Press the Mode Demod key on the front panel 2 Press the Digital Demod side key and then select the measurement item 3 Display the measurement waveform NOTE You should set appropriate frequency and span
321. of the selected marker Markers Selects the marker mode m Displays no marker m Single Displays one marker Marker 1 m Delta Displays two markers Marker 1 and 2 Reference Cursor to Marker X Enables the Reference Cursor at the same position as the selected marker Only available when the selected view can contain a reference cursor Reference Cursor Off Turns off the Reference Cursor Only available when the selected view can contain a reference marker Selected Marker Off Turns off the selected marker Markers Off Turns off both markers the reference cursor and all their readouts Assign Marker X to Trace When two traces are being displayed moves the selected marker to another trace with the same horizontal position Available only if two traces are being displayed Peak Search Freq Threshold S A mode only Sets the minimum frequency jump that should be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down Peak Search Hor Threshold Demod and Time modes only Selects the minimum horizontal jump that should be made when selecting the next signal to the left right up down Marker X Vertical Spectrogram view in the Real Time S A mode only Specifies the number of the frame in the spectrogram to display the spectrum The latest frame is number zero Older frames have larger negative numbers Same as Spectrum Offset in the Acquisition Analysis menu Reference Cursor to Trigger Demod and Time
322. oll Table Spurious marker 10 dB Measurement result 153 125 200k 200k 400 400k 5 44 75 76 75 8 774 7795 Spectrum Analyzer Spurious Search Signal Threshold dBm 20 Figure 3 15 Example of spurious signal measurement Detected spurious signals are assigned markers numbered in descending order by amplitude The frequency difference deltaF and the amplitude ratio Ratio in relation to the standard signal are shown in the table in the lower part of the screen RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 13 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spectrum Emission Mask Measurement The spectrum emission mask measurement performs a pass fail test displaying the limit mask to verify that excessive power is not transmitted outside of the designated channel Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the spectrum emission mask measurement contains the following controls Measurement Selects how to specify frequency zones for the limit mask Offset From Channel Specifies frequency zones by the offset from the center frequency m Spurious Specifies frequency zones by the absolute frequency values Ref Channel Select Selects the method to determine the reference channel level Auto Sets the level automatically evaluating the spectrum trace m Man Sets the level manually using the Ref Channel Level side key Ref Channel Level Sets the reference channel level when Ref
323. olor scheme Color scheme Description Temperature Temperature color low density in blue and high in red Spectral Spectral color low density in red and high in blue Gray Gray scale low density in black and high in white Binary Cyan Binary de lower density than the minimum value in black and higher in cyan Maximum Sets the histogram value represented by the top color in the selected palette Range 1 to 100 in 1 steps default 100 The Maximum value must be greater than Minimim Minimum Sets the histogram value represented by the bottom color in the selected palette Range 0 to 99 in 1 steps default 0 The Minimum value must be less than Maximum Full Scale Sets Vertical Scale Maximum and Minimum to default values RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 207 Setting Views Vertical Stop p gt Vertical Scale 0 dem dB 100 dBm Hz Signal Density O 96 100 96 Minimum Maximum Bitmap Color Figure 3 141 Setting the scale in spectrum view Spectrogram View Setting 3 208 View Scale Menu The spectrogram view shows time varying spectrum three dimensionally It indicates frequency along the horizontal axis frame number along the vertical axis and power level by using color This view is used in the S A with Spectro gram and Real Time S A modes or the Demod and Time modes as the overview content NOTE When you select S A with Spectrogram in the S A mode you canno
324. on within a product Typically the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same as the external Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated m Pollution Degree 1 No pollution or only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Products in this category are generally encapsulated hermetically sealed or located in clean rooms m Pollution Degree 2 Normally only dry nonconductive pollution occurs Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by condensation must be expected This location is a typical office home environment Temporary condensation occurs only when the product is out of service m Pollution Degree 3 Conductive pollution or dry nonconductive pollution that becomes conductive due to condensation These are sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is controlled The area is protected from direct sunshine rain or direct wind m Pollution Degree 4 Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through conductive dust rain or snow Typical outdoor locations Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 61010 1 Note Rated for indoor use only RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual xix Compliance Information Environmental Considerations Product End of Life Handling Restriction of Hazardous Substances This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product Observe the following guidelines when recycling
325. one block contains N frames The acquisition length for a block is calculated using this equation One block acquisition length N One frame acquisition length One block acquisition length is set using Acquisition Length in the Acquisition Analysis menu One frame acquisition length is set internally depending on span and displayed in Spectrum Length in the Acquisition Analysis menu To set the acquisition length perform the following steps 1 Press the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel By default Acquisition Length is set to 64 ms and Spectrum Length 32 ms The number of frames in a block is 64 32 2 2 Press the Acquisition Length side key to change the value For example set 256 ms by turning the knob see Figure 2 54 In this case Acquisition Length is 256 ms and Spectrum Length 32 ms so the data is displayed in the overview for 256 32 8 frames 8192 points The green underline indicating the analysis range gets narrower than the previous setting one block 2 frames 2 56 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Tektronix RSA 3408B 20 2 TIMING SSS C ea c M X Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 255 ms Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Acquisition E Input Att 15 dB Length s Acquisition Length 226 Sets the time length to 0 0 Acquisition acquire one block dBm dBm History Q 10 Spectrum Length 8 frames dy s
326. ove the lines 3 Perform one of the following options m To display one horizontal line Press the Number Of Line side key to select 1 Press the Line 1 side key and move the line m To display two horizontal lines Press the Number Of Line side key to select 2 Press the Line 1 side key and move line 1 Line 2 moves in parallel Press the Line 2 side key and move line 2 Press the Delta side key and move line 2 The delta value indicates the following value value of Delta value of line 2 value of line 1 m To turn off the horizontal line Press the Number Of Line side key to select None dBm ee Values at line positions By Horizontal line Dual Mas Pas erg M Kyle v unu dem Center 800 MHz Span 35 MHz Figure 3 159 Two horizontal lines RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 229 Display Line Vertical Display Line 1 Press the Scale Lines key on the front panel and then press the View Lines side key 2 Press the Show Line side key to select Vertical NOTE In the following steps use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad to move the lines 3 Perform one of the following options m To display one vertical line Press the Number Of Line side key to select 1 Press the Line 1 side key and move the line m To display two vertical lines Press the Number Of Line side key to select 2 Press the Line 1 side key and move line 1 Line 2 move
327. ower side key A band power marker indicating measurement range is displayed on the spectrum waveform The measurement result is displayed below the waveform see Figure 2 48 Tektronix RSA 3408B MEASURE a P Ms Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Normal Input 15 dB 2 Off Channel Power Select Channel Power here F 0 B b V4 Band power marker an C N 10 OBW dB Carrier N Frequency EBW 100 Ve TAA dem Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Spurious Measurement gt Channel Power 9 81 dBm results Density 45 83 dBm Hz Channel Bandwidth 4kHz Measurement Off Figure 2 48 Channel power measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 51 Tutorial Changing a Measurement Change a measurement parameter Parameter Press the Meas Setup key on the front panel 2 The Channel Bandwidth menu item is selected Using the general purpose knob set the measurement range to 40 kHz for example See the display in Figure 2 49 Tekironix RSA 3408B MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz RBW 200Hz Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Trace 1 Mormal Channel E Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 Off Bandwidth Hz Channel Bandwidth EK Sets the measurement bandwidth 0 gt Measurement sem Channel Bandwidth Filter Snap Si 40 kHz bien Rolloff Ratio
328. p to 20 spurious signals deltaF Hz displayed Ratio dBc 1 525 4 728M 4 725M 7 925M 7 925M 11 125M 11 125Iv 14 325Iv 14 34 82 34 84 44 52 L44 58 4877 48 82 5138 4 51 41 5317 53 4 RFID 18000 4 6 Spurious Search Figure 3 65 Spurious measurement 3 82 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu of the spurious measurement is same as that of the S A mode Refer to page 3 12 Figure 3 65 on page 3 82 shows an example of the spurious measurement For the detected spurious signals the spurious marker is displayed on the waveform by assigning the numbers from 1 in the maximum order of amplitude Furthermore the frequency difference deltaF and amplitude ratio Ratio with the carrier is displayed in the table in the lower part of the screen Using Video Filter The spurious measurement in the RFID analysis has a video filter function for compatibility with measurement data from conventional swept spectrum analyzers Normally swept spectrum analyzers smooth the detected signal with a video filter having a bandwidth equal to the resolution bandwidth However you can set the bandwidth and sweep time on this analyzer When you use the video filter press the RBW FFT key on the front panel to set the following items Video Filter Determines whether to use the video filter When you use the filter select On Then the following items appear VBW Sets
329. parated Values format allowing you to export the file into Microsoft Excel or other database systems m Current Block Saves the block currently displayed Current Area Saves the data displayed in the main view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 253 File Operations Save Data MAT Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes only Saves waveform data IO data in the time domain to a file in the MATLAB format allowing you to export the file into the MATLAB technical computing environment Current Block Saves the block currently displayed W Current Area Saves the data displayed in the main view NOTE The data capacity for the CSV and MAT files is 256 MB maximum If exceeding 256 MB the Save Data side key is greyed out to disable saving data NOTE The following menu items Save Trace 1 Save Trace 2 and Save Correction are available in the S A mode except Real Time S A Save Trace 1 Saves data for Trace 1 of a graph Save Trace 2 Saves data for Trace 2 of a graph Save Correction Saves a correction table of Frequency Amplitude pairs used for adjusting amplitude values Save SEM Limits Spectrum Emission Mask in the S A mode only Saves a limit mask Saving and Loading Files Using a Disk Saving a File 3 254 The following procedures show how to save and load files You can use a 2HD 1 44 M bytes or 2DD 720 K bytes 3 5 inch disk formatted for MS DOS The disk drive is on the s
330. ple select MaxHold and observe the waveform The MaxHold trace holds the maximum amplitude for each frequency Persistence Display When persistence is enabled signal events fade gradually from the display You can limit how long a point will be displayed by adjusting the Variable Persistence control selecting Infinite Persistence or turning Persistence off The persistence controls are valid for the Bitmap trace l Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel 2 Press the Trace 1 Type side key to select Bitmap 3 Press the Dot Persistence side key to select Variable variable persistence display 4 Press the Persistence Value side key and set the value ranging from 1 to 1000 no unit For example set 20 5 Slowly change the amplitude or frequency of the signal generator to vary the output waveform and observe the transient on the DPX display Change the persistence value several times and observe how the waveform fades out Use the Reset Bitmap side key to restart the display 0 dem 10 dB 100 dem Signal Density 0 i 100 Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Figure 2 44 Persistence display 6 Reset the signal generator to the original setting for the next step Amplitude 10 dBm Frequency 100 MHz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 47 Tutorial Displaying a Spectrogram The spectrogram view is a useful tool to observe spectrum changes in time series in a three dimensional view The horizontal and verti
331. pleOfLongName WithSpaces Inserted iqt iqt Only the part within the allowable range is displayed with line feed inserted at space The third and the subsequent lines are omitted Load Data ExampleOfLongN WithSpaces Figure 3 183 Displaying the file name on the Load Data side key RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 261 File Operations Entering a File Name This section shows how to enter a file name in the Filename side key for saving the file using the Save menu NOTE You can overwrite an existing file after entering the file name press Save File Now Overwrite Use the keypad on the front panel to input a file name see Figure 3 184 m to9 and keys are used to enter alphabetic characters numbers punctuation and special characters indicated above each key For example the 8 key inputs A B and C as well as 8 Each time you press the key the selected character moves through the list gt B C gt 8 m Caps Lock key toggles a character between uppercase and lowercase m backspace key deletes the character just before the cursor m Enter Next key accepts the input character Alphanumeric keys Select a character BKSP lt Backspace key Deletes a character just before the cursor These keys are not available for entering a file name Enter lt Enter Next key Accepts the input ch
332. plication native FFT Time The length of time covered by one frame whether or not an RBW filter is applied to the FFT This was previously called a multi frame Filter A circuit which separates electrical signals or signal components based on their frequencies Frame A series of time contiguous samples long enough in duration and at a sufficient sample rate to produce a spectrum view of a specified span and RBW Frequency The rate at which a signal oscillates or changes polarity expressed as hertz or number of cycles per second Frequency Band The continuous range of frequencies extending between two limiting frequencies expressed in hertz Frequency Domain Representation The portrayal of a signal in the frequency domain representing a signal by displaying its sine wave components the signal spectrum Frequency Drift Gradual shift or change in displayed frequency over the specified time due to internal changes in the spectrum analyzer where other conditions remain constant Expressed in hertz per second Frequency Modulation FM The process or result of a process in which the frequency of an electrical signal the carrier is varied in accordance with some characteristic of a second electrical signal the modulating signal or modulation RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 Frequency Range The range of frequencies over which the performance of the instrument is specified
333. present Open Recall Restore Bring data into the application from a file of application native format OQPSK Acronym for Offset OPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying PDF Acronym for Probability Distribution Function RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Peak Detection A detection scheme wherein the peak amplitude of a signal is measured and displayed In spectrum analysis 20 log peak is often displayed Platform Utility User available software applications provided with the instrument Primary Marker The marker displayed in the Single Marker mode whose frequency and or position is changed when tuning with the general purpose knob PSK Acronym for Phase Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the carrier phase is varied discretely in accordance with a digital code QAM Acronym for Quadrature Amplitude Modulation The process or result of a process in which the amplitude and phase of the carrier are varied concur rently by synthesizing two orthogonal ASK waves see ASK Reference Level The signal level required to deflect the CRT display to the top graticule line Residual FM Incidental FM Short term displayed frequency instability or jitter due to instability in the spectrum analyzer local oscillators Given in terms of peak to peak frequency deviation and expressed in hertz or percent of the displayed frequency Residual Response A spurious response in the
334. product or other property Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A O Protective Ground CAUTION Mains Disconnected Mains Connected Earth Terminal Refer to Manual OFF Power ON Power RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual REE ET Compliance Information This section lists the EMC electromagnetic compliance safety and environ mental standards with which the instrument complies EMC Compliance EC Declaration of Meets intent of Directive 2004 108 EC for Electromagnetic Compatibility Conformity EMC Compliance was demonstrated to the following specifications as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities EN 61326 1 2006 EN 61326 2 1 2006 EMC requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use 1 2 34 CISPR 11 2003 Radiated and conducted emissions Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 2001 Electrostatic discharge immunity 61000 4 3 2002 RF electromagnetic field immunity 5 IEC 61000 4 4 2004 Electrical fast transient burst immunity IEC 61000 4 5 2001 Power line surge immunity IEC 61000 4 6 2003 Conducted RF immunity 9 61000 4 11 20
335. quisition Use the acquisition history control to view alternate In Out blocks Trigger level P Trigger occurs Rise Fall Figure 3 117 Trigger level and slope 3 168 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Free Run Continuous Data j Data j Data j acquisition Display acquisition Display acquisition Display gt Time Free Run Single Data Data Data f acquisition Display acquisition Display acquisition Display jj jj gt Time Press the Run Stop key Press the Run Stop key Press the Run Stop key Data acquisition Triggered Continuous Display Display Display Time Trigger Trigger Trigger Triggered Single Data acquisition Display Data acquisition Display NE d Time Press the Trigger Press the Trigger Run Stop key Run Stop key Figure 3 118 Acquiring and displaying data by Trigger and Repeat modes RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 169 Trigger Data Saving on Trigger A Save on Trigger function is provided to save one block of input data to the IOT file each time a trigger occurs This function is enabled when the trigger mode is set to Triggered For details of file operations refer to page 3 251 The file name and location are as follows m File name yyyymmdd hhmmss ticks IQT Where yyyy is the year mm the month and dd the date hh is the hour mm the minutes and ss the seconds ticks is the time stamp of the final frame Refer to unsigned long
336. quisition Length 4 ms Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Input Att 15 dB Analyze NOTE The overview and subview ALR 51 875 n Marker 32 8015625 ms i 89 919 dB 14 519 dBm contents can be selected using the Sa nee faire ET Counter View Define menu 87 dBm Resolution Hz frame E dem Power Ratio Unit ab for OBW S dB B Power Ratio for 1 Jii OBW dB frame dBm 7 20 Center 1 GH Span 500 Start 117 i enter z pan z M Ee Pod Scale 3 2 msf Amplitude Offset Measurement results gt Carrier Frequency 1 000 077 818 GHz 45 15 d 23 12 dB dB from the top Occupied Band Width 1 0 OBW 172 968 Hz dBm Carrier frequency EBW 149 064 Hz Channel OBW Maximum EIRP 30 dBm Bandwidth Hz EBW 10 5M Maximum EIRP dB 111 dem Center 1 000081 GHz Span 105 kHz RFID 18000 4 6 Carrier Main view Spectrum Figure 3 64 Carrier measurement Changing the View The view contents can be changed in the next item by pressing the View Define key Show Views Select whether to display a single view or multiple views m Single Only displays the view selected using the View Select key m Multi Displays the overview sub view and main view Overview Content Selects the overview information Spectrogram m Waveform Power versus Time waveform Zoom Spectrogram with the zoom function Selects Waveform or Zoom while selecting the analysis range Refer to Zoom Function on page 3 27 fo
337. r Enter key The confirmed value is immediately reflected to the analyzer settings and display Press the Cancel Back side key to cancel the change RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 21 Functional Overview Changing the Step Size Measurement Basics 2 22 Selecting the Measurement Mode When using the up and down AW keys to increase or decrease a setting value you can change the step size the amount per press by which the up or down key changes the setting value with the Step Size side key The step size cannot be changed for menu items that do not display Step Size In the example shown in Figure 2 18 the step size for the center frequency is set to 100 kHz the displayed frequency set value changes by 100 kHz step for each press of the up or down key Step Size E Center Freq Step size Figure 2 18 Step size for the center frequency Step Size for Center Frequency The step size is set with the Step Size side key The center frequency step size can be also set with two side keys in the Frequency Channel menu see Figure 2 19 below Center Freq Step Same As C F Useful for quickly locating harmonics of a signal seen at the center frequency Center Freq Step Same As Span Useful for quickly analyzing a larger frequency area without overlapping span windows Center Freq Step lt Sets the center frequency step size to the Same As C F same value as the center f
338. r Frequency side key and the frequency offset in the Frequency Error side key m Off Sets the carrier frequency using Carrier Frequency or Frequency Offset described below Carrier Frequency and Frequency Offset are interlocked Carrier Frequency Sets the carrier frequency when Off is selected in Auto Carrier Range Center frequency Span 2 Pressing Marker gt CarrierFreq MarkerFreq sets the carrier frequency to the value at the Marker 1 position Frequency Offset Sets the frequency offset when Off is selected in Auto Carrier Range Span 2 to Span 2 Auto Phase Determines whether to set the phase offset automatically m On Default Automatically sets the phase offset to fit the waveform to the screen centering 0 phase on the vertical axis The phase offset is indicated on the Phase Offset side key m Off Sets the phase offset using Phase Offset described below Phase Offset Sets the phase offset when Off is selected in Auto Phase For example when setting 10 the waveform shifts upward by 10 on screen Range 180 to 180 Pressing Marker gt MarkerPhase to Zero puts the center 0 phase of the vertical axis at the Marker 1 position Threshold Sets the threshold level above which the input signal is determined to be a burst in time domain The burst detected first is used for the measure ment Range 100 0 to 0 0 dBfs default 35 dBfs RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 45 Modulation Analysis
339. r Results On Off Menu OBW Results On Off EBW Results On Off Freq Deviation Results Off Max Adaptive RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Utility Menu Help View Front Panel Button Help View Online User Manual E View Online Programmer Manual Input Signal Input Port RF IQ Cal100M Cal25M Option 03 only Reference Source Int Ext Cal All Calibrate Gain Calibrate Center Offset Calibrate DC Offset Calibrate IF Flatness Auto Calibration Yes No Service Refer to the Service Manual System Display Brightness r Scroll Reset All to Factory Defaults Option Key Remote Setup Refer to the Programmer Manual Change Option Key Version and Installed Options Instrument Setup Angular Units Phase Degrees Radians Digital IQ Output Off RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual A 13 Appendix A Menu Tree Preset Load Save Print S A mode except Real Time Load State Load Trace 1 Load Trace 2 Load Correction Load SEM Limits Spectrum Emission Mask Real Time S A mode Load State Load Data Load SEM Limits Spectrum Emission Mask Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time
340. r of points from which the running average is calculated Setting range 1 to analysis range 2 or 9999 points default 1 Frequency Frequency settling time Y Mean value Mean value Freq Settling Threshold on the bottom on the top Threshold gt Settling time from trigger gt Trigger Time Figure 3 93 Frequency versus Time measurement parameters RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 133 Time Analysis Time Mode NOTE In the frequency versus time measurement the analysis range is approxi mately 500 frames 512 000 points maximum For example it is about 40 ms for the span of 10 MHz Figure 3 94 shows an example of the frequency versus time measurement The subview displays only spectrum The frequency settling time is indicated on the bottom of the screen The value from trigger is also indicated when the trigger occurs during or before the frequency settling time in the analysis range Tekironix RSA 3408B 200 99 30 02 PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 2 4453 GHz Acquisition Length 40 ms Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Freq Settling Input Att OdB Threshold Hz Marker 4 490 p 13 ms Marker 2 4424 ae 300k iew i 23 006 dB 26 274 Overview Power versus Time umet m EM Smoothing dem dBm E 10 EI B Subview S 119 ubview Spectrum gt Em Ais ren E Start 9 993125 ms Scale 1 ms Center
341. r otherwise abused should be checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and perfor mance Immediately repair defects that could cause personal injury or lead to further damage to the instrument Table F 1 External inspection checklist Cabinet front panel Cracks scratches deformations damaged Contact your local and cover hardware or gaskets Tektronix distributor or les office Front panel knobs Missing damaged or loose knobs Connectors Broken shells cracked insulation and deformed contacts Dirt in connectors Carrying handle Correct operation Accessories Missing items or parts of items bent pins broken or frayed cables and damaged connectors RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual F 1 Appendix F Inspection and Cleaning AN Cleaning the Exterior A Lubrication Cleaning the Interior F 2 CAUTION Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents that might damage the plastics used in this instrument Organic solvents such as benzene and acetone must never be used Remove the power cord before cleaning the instrument Clean the exterior surfaces of the instrument with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If dirt remains use a cloth or swab dampened with a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution A swab is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces around the controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the instrument CAUTION Do not allow moisture inside the instrument Duri
342. r page 3 5 Carrier Frequency page 3 10 Spectrum Emission Mask page 3 14 1 Not available S A with Spectrogram Pressing the Measurement Off side key stops the measurement and returns to the original spectral display 1 Press the S A key and then the Spectrum Analyzer side key 2 Select the measurement item refer to Table 3 2 3 Display the spectrum waveform of the measurement signal a Press the Run Stop key on the front panel to start data acquisition NOTE For details on setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 b Setthe frequency by pressing the Frequency Channel key on the front panel Setthe span by pressing the Span key on the front panel d Setthe amplitude by pressing the Amplitude key on the front panel 4 Setthe following Measurement Setup controls by pressing the Meas Setup key on the front panel RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Channel Power This measurement calculates power in the range specified using a band power Measurement marker shown in Figure 3 4 Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the channel power measurement contains the following controls Integration Bandwidth Sets frequency range for power measurement see Figure 3 4 Measurement Filter Shape Selects a filter shape from these types Rect Rectangular Gaussian Nyquist Root Nyquist
343. r setting the analysis area on the spectrogram with the zoom function RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 81 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Subview Content Selects the subview information Spectrum W Power versus Time m Frequency versus Time m Zoomed Spectrum Spectrum of a zoomed area in the Zoom display Setting the View Scale Refer to page 3 203 for information on setting the scale for each view Note that when the subview is Power versus Time or Frequency versus Time Default Scale is used instead of Full Scale in the View Scale menu The time domain waveform is processed in units of 256K data points When the number of points equivalent to the analysis length Acquisition Analysis Analysis Length is 256K or less pressing the Default Scale side key sets the horizontal scale so that the whole waveform is displayed in the analysis range When it is greater than 256K the horizontal full scale is set to the time equiva lent of 256K points displaying part of the waveform in the analysis range Spurious Measurement Measures the spurious level of the RF signal It is the same as the spurious measurement in the S A mode refer to page 3 12
344. r to Windows documentation for additional information about operating Windows Making Deleting a Directory You can make or delete a directory using Windows but not using the analyzer menu Refer to page 2 27 for information about using Windows on the analyzer Refer to Windows documentation for additional information about operating Windows 3 264 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual E File Format This section describes the structure of the following files m Data file IOT m Trace file m DPX Bitmap trace DPT m CSV Comma Separated Values file CSV m MAT MATLAB file MAT m Limit mask file CSV m User filter file CSV RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 265 File Format Data File Format 3 266 File Structure The data file normally consists of five blocks The date and time may be added to the end for data logging see Figure 3 185 Data file IQT File header text format Data block binary format Correction data block binary format Dummy header text format Extended correction data block binary format Date and time text format Figure 3 185 Data file structure The file is normally created after data acquisition is complete When logging data is acquired continuously a data block is added each time the data is acquired In data logging since the internal program adds data blocks while acquiring data when the program creates the file
345. r to page 3 49 For setting views refer to page 3 203 Overview Power versus Time Subview Spectrum X M Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 40 Is S en Back Span 36 MHz Parameter Input Att 20 dB Presets Marker 33 10578125 ms Off 4526 dBm 10 10 Modulation dBm dBm Type ASK dij 10 Modulation dB Parameters 90 Auto Carrier r Er 90 Timingi T dBm Start 60 294531 ms Scale 6 ms Center 13 608527 MHz Span 5 Lena Marker 33 675 ms TSQUENEy ENE Oh 5 178 dBm Hz 3 8 515 9271807584 Lu 0 2 dB 5 8 dam Start 33 737188 ms Scale 9 921875 Lig Digital Demod Power versus Time Main view Power versus Time Figure 3 48 Power variance measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 59 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Symbol Table Analysis Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a symbol table in the main view Figure 3 49 shows an example For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 49 For setting views refer to page 3 203 Marker 199sym 01 0 10001010 10010001 11000110 11010101 11000100 11000100 01000000 00100001 32 00011000 01001110 01010101 10000110 11110100 11011100 10001010 00010101 64 10100111 11101100 10010010 11011111 10010011 01010011 00110000 00011000 96 11001010 00110100 10111111 10100010 11000111
346. ram with the zoom function display the zoomed area is set by the Menu following Acquisition Analysis menu see Figure 3 28 The area is the analysis range Acquisition Length Sets the capture time of one block Acquisition History A block number that analyzes displays data is specified The latest block number is 0 Older blocks have larger negative numbers Analysis Length Sets the time length of the zoomed area in the block set in the Acquisition History Analysis Offset Sets the starting point of the zoomed area by considering the trigger output point as the reference Frequency Center Sets the frequency of the center of zoomed area Frequency Width Sets the frequency width of the zoomed area Refer to Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters on page 3 157 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 27 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Trigger output point Frequency Analysis Offset Time Analysis Length gt Frequency Width Frequency Center Figure 3 28 Zoom domain settings using the acquisition and analysis menu Setting a Zoomed Area The zoomed area can be set by using the marker and reference cursor instead of Using the Marker entering a numeric value in the Acquisition Analysis menu see Figure 3 29 The mouse can also be used in the marker operation refer to USB connectors on page 2 7 for connecting the mouse In the following procedure Mouse indicates an operation where the mouse is used 1 P
347. ration screen hard copy and miscellaneous other functions Functional Overview Settings group View group Utility group Mode group Mode Frequency Run Ly Channel Stop SIA DPX Select Help Preset Span Trig Demod Define Input Load ES Markers Amplitude PDW Time Select Cal Save b b 4 Acquisition Trace fi Analysis Avg Peak gt System Print 4 Meas Marker Marker __ Macro Measure Setup gt v Setup Macro Setup Markers group Figure 2 11 Menu keys Table 2 4 summarizes the front panel menu key functions For details refer to each section listed in the Reference column Table 2 4 Menu key summary Settings Setting Frequency and Span iili Setting Amplitude page 3 143 Acquisition Analysis Sets acquisition and analysis parameters Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters page 3 157 Run Stop Start or stop data acquisition Starting Stopping Data Acquisition page 2 24 Controls trigger Trigger page 3 163 RBW FFT Sets RBW and FFT parameters FFT and RBW page 3 179 Trace Avg Controls trace display and average function Trace Comparison Display and Average Function page 3 191 2 16 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Functional Overview Table 2 4 Menu key summary Cont Menu group Settings Mode View Markers Utility Spectrum Analysis S A Mod
348. re 2 14 In this type of field you can change the numeric value by turning the general purpose knob by pressing the up down AW keys or by entering a value using the keypad Center Freq Hz 156 7 Numeric input field Figure 2 14 Numeric setting menu RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 19 Functional Overview Changing a Setting Using the General Purpose Knob or the Up Down Keys 1 Press the side key for setting a numeric value For example press Frequency Channel Center Freq to set a center frequency The menu item changes to the display shown in Figure 2 15 um Freq 4 Indicates that numeric values can be changed Es with the general purpose knob Numeric input field Figure 2 15 Changing value with the knob 2 Turn the general purpose knob to increase or decrease the value You can also use the up and down AW keys to increase or decrease a setting value respectively Down key Up key Decreases the value Increases the value N General purpose knob Rotate clockwise to increase the value and counterclockwise to decrease the value The up and down keys have the same functions as the general purpose knob except the step size the amount per click by which the general purpose knob changes a setting value or the amount per press for the up and down keys as follows m For the general purpose knob the step size is determined internally You cannot change the
349. re 3 2 S A measurement screen Channel Bandwidth 4 kHz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Changing the Grid Style The graticule is a 10 x 10 grid by default You can select a different grid style by pressing View Define Grid Style as follows NOTE The Grid Style menu item is available only in the S A mode except Real Time S A Off Turns off the graticule Fix Always displays a 10 x 10 grid Flex Displays the graticule with the horizontal scale per division in a 1 2 5 sequence Tektronix RSA 3408B VIEW DEFINE H H m uM Frequency 800 MHz RBW 12kHz Cancel Back Span 300 kHz Trace 1 Normal Grid Style Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Off Fix Flex 0 dBm 10 dB Scale 50 kHz Span 300 kHz Menu Off 100 dem Center 800 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off The horizontal scale is set to 50 kHz div for a span of 300 kHz in the Flex grid style Figure 3 3 Flex grid style RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 3 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spectrum Analysis 3 4 Basic Procedure You can select the following measurement items with the Measure key when you select Spectrum Analyzer S A with Spectrogram or Real Time S A in the S A mode Table 3 2 Measurement items in the S A mode Measure menu Refer to Channel Powe
350. rectories 3 264 files 3 264 How to display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Index averaged waveforms 3 198 data by trigger and repeat modes 3 169 DPX spectrum 2 46 horizontal display line 3 229 multiple views 3 205 online help 3 245 options 2 26 spectrogram 2 48 spectrum 2 33 trace 1 and 2 3 196 trigger point 3 177 versions 2 26 vertical display line 3 230 Windows desktop 2 27 How to enter file name 3 262 numeric data 2 19 How to install keyboard 2 7 mouse 2 7 printer driver 3 284 USB printer connection 3 284 How to load files 3 254 menu settings 3 254 trace 3 200 How to save amplitude correction table 3 148 3 251 data to a PC via a network 1 22 2 6 files 3 254 menu settings 3 254 preset files 3 256 screen copy to a disk 3 285 trace 3 200 How to set zoomed area 3 28 Hum and Noise Ratio 3 75 IF flatness calibration 1 27 Input menu 3 249 over voltage 3 147 source 3 249 Inspection F 1 Installation 1 11 Integrated phase noise description 3 123 Interface maps 2 1 IO digital IO output Option 05 2 5 input note 3 249 IQ versus Time measurement 3 46 3 101 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual IO Frequency versus Time measurement 3 58 K Key lock 2 12 Keyboard operation 2 8 Keypad 2 3 entering a file name 3 262 using 2 21 L LAN Ethernet connector side panel 2 6 Limit mask file format 3 279 Lines menu 3 228 menu Real Time S A 3 232 Load me
351. red at the moment of pressing the key is discarded and the measurement results are shown for the previous block of data Pressing Trig gt Stop and Show Results to stop data acquisition Shows measurement results even for the block of data acquired at the moment of pressing the side key which might not fill a whole block In either case press Run Stop again to restart acquisition Source Selects a trigger source when the trigger mode is Triggered Power Span BW Default Uses time domain I Q data of the input signal as the trigger source You can set the trigger level slope and position Freq Mask Option 02 only Uses a trigger mask as the trigger source Refer to page 3 171 for information about creating the trigger mask External Uses the external signal input from the TRIG IN connector on the rear panel as the trigger source You can set the trigger level slope and position For specifications of the external trigger refer to the RSA3408B Technical Reference Position Available when the trigger mode is set to Triggered Specifies the position of the trigger in a block as a percentage of all the frames in the block For example if you set the trigger position to 50 the trigger occurs at the center of the block as shown in Figure 3 115 Range 0 to 10046 in 146 step 1 block gt Time pam Position setting Trigger occurs Acquisition completed Figure 3 115 Trigger position
352. reen the O symbol represents the active marker and lt gt represents the fixed marker You can operate only the active marker l Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel 2 Press the Markers side key to select Delta The fixed marker appears at the active marker position 3 Make sure that 1 Marker 1 is selected in the Select Marker menu item This means that Marker 1 is the active marker 4 The Marker X Position menu item is selected Using the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad move the marker to a reference point see Figure 2 39 Tekironix RSA 3408B 20 2 PAUSE MARKER SETUP Frequency 100 MHz Readout of the selected marker _ 5 20 kHz in Select Marker Input Att 15 dB Trace 2 lt Select Marker rer 99 998 MHz 1 2 j OE ul a Selects the active marker 7 dem Hz E Delta marker measurement value Marker 1 Marker 2 Markers Markeri Markers arf Singe Delta Delta is selected here to show Marker 1 and 2 Reference Cursor to Marker X dy Reference Qu eference Cursor Marker 2 gt Off N Selected Marker Off Step Size Marker X 20 100 VK dim Y Go to page 2 Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz of 2 Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Marker X Position MHz 99 998 Figure 2
353. rement Screen Figure 3 62 shows an example of the Hum and Noise Ratio measurement result displayed on the bottom of the screen Demodulation type Baseband AM or FM Hum and Noise Current value Current value Reference value dB Reference value Refer to Table 3 14 for the definition Current RMS F Dev 7 0849 kHz Demod Type FM Ref RMS F Dev 7 08 kHz Hum and Noise 0 01 dB Audio Measurements Hum amp Noise Figure 3 62 Hum and Noise Ratio measurement result bottom of the screen RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 75 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 76 The result indicates the hum and noise dB with current and reference values for the selected modulation method The definition of the hum and noise ratio is shown in Table 3 14 Table 3 14 Definition of the hum and noise ratio Modulation method Definition Baseband Hum and Noise Current RMS power Reference RMS power AM Hum and Noise Current RMS modulation depth Reference maximum modulation depth FM Hum and Noise Current RMS frequency deviation Reference RMS frequency deviation RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode RFID Analysis Option 21 Only This section describes the method of RFID Radio Frequency Identification analysis RFID is an automatic individual identification technology that uses a radio The IC microprocessors in which data is recorded and the antenna module are
354. requency Center Freq Step Same As Span Sets the center frequency step size to the same value as the span Figure 2 19 Changing the step size to the predetermined values When you start a measurement first select the measurement mode For details on each mode refer to the section shown in Table 2 5 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Functional Overview Mode Spectrum Analyzer mE DPX Spectrum S A Spectrum analysis S A with Spectrogram Real Time S A Real Time S A with Zoom Modulation analysis Standard Demod Analog Demod Digital Demod Option 21 Ti g Time Audio Measurements Option 10 Standard Transient CCDF Pulse Measurements Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Figure 2 20 Selecting the measurement mode Table 2 5 Measurement modes Spectrum analysis S A Spectrum Analysis Modulation analysis Demod Modulation Analysis pue Time analysis Time Time characteristics analysis Time Analysis Time Mode CCDF CCDF analysis page 3 99 Pulse Measurements Pulse characteristics analysis Signal Source Analysis Signal source analysis Option 21 Contains optional analysis functions Refer to Appendix G Options and Accessories for optional software RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 23 Functional Overview Starting Stopping Data Acquisition Restoring Default Settings 2 24
355. reshold A 10 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Display View Menu 1 of 2 DPX Spectrum view Spectrogram view DPX Spectrum view Auto Scale Auto Scale Vertical Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Scale Bitmap Color Temperature Scale Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Maximum Spectral Lines Vertical Scale Vertical Size Minimum Gray Vertical Stop Vertical Start Full Scale Binary Cyan Full Scale Color Scale Blanked Spectral Color Stop Blanked Temperature Full Scale Blanked Binary Cyan HIN Soale CCDF view Time domain view View Lines 1 Auto Scale Auto Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Scale Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Vertical Stop Vertical Scale Vertical Start Vertical Stop Full Scale Vertical Offset for zero centered vertical axis Sub Grid Off On Time mode only Full Scale Constellation view AM AM views Measurement Content Vector Constellation Meas rement Content Vector Dot Horizontal Start EVM view Vertical Start Auto Scale rnm AMPM vin Verti Measurement Content Vector Dot ertical Scale Hori Start Vertical Start An sta Full Scale Vertical Scale Measurement Content EVM Mag Error Phase Error PDF view Noisogram view Auto Scale Auto Scale m Table Hex Oct Bin Horizontal Scale Horizontal Stop Rotate Horizontal Start Horizontal Start Vertical Scale Vertical Size Eye Diagram Heh Stop Vertical Start ull Scale Color
356. ress the View Select key on the front panel and select the spectrogram with zoom function Mouse Click on the spectrogram to select it and then go to step 4 2 Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel 3 Press the Markers side key and select Single to display the marker 4 Move the marker to the upper left point of the zoomed area using the Marker X Position and the Marker X Vertical side keys Mouse Move the mouse pointer to the upper left point of the zoomed area and left click to put the marker on it 5 Press the Reference Cursor to the Marker X side key to display the reference cursor on the marker position Mouse Right click to display the reference cursor 6 Move the marker to the lower right point of the zoomed area using the Marker X Position and Marker X Vertical side keys Mouse Move the mouse pointer to the lower right point of the zoomed area and left click to put the marker on it 3 28 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 7 Press the Marker key on the front panel and then press the Analysis Time Marker Time side key The zoomed area is enclosed in a green frame 8 When you shift the zoomed area to the left or right on the frequency axis perform these steps a Select Marker Setup Marker X Position and set the new frequency center to put the marker on it Mouse Move the mouse pointer to the new frequency center and then left click to put the marker on i
357. rms time characteristic analysis including CCDF measurement The measurement procedures for modulation analysis and the time analysis are similar Select the analog modulation analysis as follows 1 Press the Demod key on the front panel 2 Press the Analog Demod side key RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 53 Tutorial Selecting a Measurement Observe an AM signal change in time series as an example Item 1 Press the AM Demod side key 2 Press the Run Stop key to acquire the signal see Figure 2 51 Tektronix RSA 3408B 20 MEASURE mc U r a r m L Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 64 ms Cancel Back Span 20 kHz Input Att 15 dB Subview AM Demod 0 0 REB YA dBm Demod Overview 40 The data in the range indicated by dB the pink underline is FFT processed ai PM Demod and displayed in the subview 100 dem 106 IQ versus Time m Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Start 64 ms Scale 6 The data in the range indicated by the green underline is analyzed and displayed in the main view Mainviow 5 ERR PREDA muonen enoni Start 54 ms Scale 6 4 ms Measurement Off Analog Demod AM Demod Figure 2 51 AM signal measurement Three views are displayed on the screen in the Demod mode m Overview Displays all data of the specified block in the time domain Th
358. rs roll off ratio when RBW Filter Shape is set to Nyquist or Root Nyquist Range 0 0001 to 1 the default is 0 5 Extended Res The FFT point number is normally limited internally You can eliminate the limit using the On setting Refer to Limit on the FFT Points on page 3 184 for detail NOTE It is recommended to keep Extended Res Off as its default condition In the spectrum emission mask measurement the menu items of RBW Filter Shape and Rolloff Ratio are available The RBW is set for each zone Refer to page 3 14 for details RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 181 FFT and RBW DPX Spectrum Mode 3 182 When RBWIFFT is set to FFT FFT Points Selects FFT sample point numbers per frame when RBW FFT is set to FFT Range 64 to 65536 in increments of 2 Higher numbers provide higher resolution and lower numbers provide faster measurements FFT Window Selects the FFT window window function when RBW FFT is set to FFT For the window type refer to Table 3 31 on page 3 187 The default is Blackman Harris 4B Extended Res Same as when RBW FFT is set to Man When RBW FFT is set to FFT the waveform without RBW processing is displayed on screen see Figure 3 130 Frequency domain Time domain data data after A D conversion Measurement and displ When RBW FFT is setto FFT 810 display Figure 3 130 Process flow when RBW FFT FFT In the DPX spectrum mode FFT is performed by the dedicated
359. rt 3 years requires Option C3 Calibration data report 5 years requires Option C5 G 1 Appendix G Options and Accessories m Option R3 Repair service 3 years m Option R5 Repair service 5 years m Power cord options listed in Table G 1 Table G 1 Power cord identification Plug configuration Option number North America 120 V Universal Euro 230 V United Kingdom 230 V Australia 240 V North America 240 V Switzerland 220 V Japan A6 100 V China A10 240 V No power cord supplied A99 G 2 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix G Options and Accessories Standard Accessories analyzers in this series are shipped with the accessories listed in Table G 2 Table G 2 Standard accessories Accessory Part number English language user manual 071 2364 XX English language programmer manual PDF only 1 077 0111 XX English language technical reference PDF only 1 077 0113 XX U S power cord 161 0066 XX USB mouse 119 6936 XX USB keyboard 119 B146 XX BNC N adapter 103 0045 XX Front cover 200 A524 50 Documents CD 063 4089 XX 1 PDF documents are stored on the Documents CD Optional Accessories You can order the accessories listed in Table G 3 to use with your analyzer Table G 3 Optional accessories Accessory Part number Japanese language user manual 071 2365 XX Japanese language programmer manual PDF 077 0112 XX English language service manual 071 2366 XX Accessory bag 0
360. rt is automatically set so that the frame at the trigger position appears on the spectrogram A 207 Color Stop EU Vertical Size Color Scale 100 dem Y Vertical Start Center 800 MHz Span 10 kHz Horizontal Scale gt Horizontal Start Figure 3 142 Scale and format settings in spectrogram view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 209 Setting Views Time Domain View Setting 3 210 View Scale Menu The time domain view includes the following displays shown on the overview or the main view in the Demod and the Time modes m Power versus Time AM demodulation display modulation factor versus time m FM demodulation display frequency deviation versus time m PM demodulation display phase deviation versus time m O level versus Time For Option 21 only m Random jitter versus Time Integrated phase noise versus Time WB C N versus Time The Scale menu for the time domain view contains the following controls see Figure 3 143 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the vertical axis automatically to fit the waveform to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis Vertical Scale Sets the range of the vertical axis Vertical Stop Sets the maximum value top of the vertical axis Available when the vertical axis represents Power Random
361. rument settings and waveform data can be saved in or loaded from files on the hard disk or 3 5 inch disk This section contains the following topics File Type File Type Load Save Menu Saving and Loading Files Entering a File Name Deleting a File Making Deleting a Directory The analyzer uses files listed in Table 3 38 to save and load measurement data and settings Table 3 38 Type of files used in the analyzer File Measurement Description Status file STA All Saves all the current menu settings You can save the settings you use frequently and reset the analyzer any time by loading the settings from this file Data file IQT Demod and Time modes Saves time domain waveform data acquired on the data memory 1 and T stand for in phase quadrature phase and time domain respectively Trace file TRC S A mode Saves Trace 1 or 2 The data in this file is loaded for example as the reference waveform in comparison displays between Trace 1 and 2 Bitmap trace file DPT DPX spectrum Saves the Bitmap trace in the display Amplitude correction file S A mode Saves an amplitude correction table COR The data in this file is loaded when the amplitude correction is performed Refer to page 3 148 for the amplitude correction Digital Demod mode Saves a measurement or reference filter that user defined Spectrum emission mask Saves a limit mask CSV file CSV Real Time S A with Zoom Saves waveform data IQ data
362. s Home Caret move Moves the caret to the beginning of an input field End Caret move Moves the caret to the end of an input field Backspace Alphanumeric input Deletes the character before the caret Delete Alphanumeric input Deletes the character after the caret ESC Alphanumeric input Aborts a numeric entry and restores the original value ENTER Alphanumeric input Accepts a value in the input field K or k key Alphanumeric input Kilo 103 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value M key Alphanumeric input Mega 109 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value G or g key Alphanumeric input Giga 109 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value m key Alphanumeric input milli 1073 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value U or u key Alphanumeric input micro 10 6 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value N or n key Alphanumeric input nano 1079 Press ENTER to complete entry of the value RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Interface Maps Figure 2 6 shows the elements of the display screen 3 4 Tektronix RSA 3408B 599300 REQ CHAN 2 nn qm 1 Frequency 800 MHz RBW 80kHz Cancel Back 1 Span 15 MHz Trace 1 Normal Center Freq E Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Hz E 0 Start Freq dem Hz 792 SIM Stop Freq Hz 807 SIM Channel 10 Channel Table dB None Center Freq Step Same As C F vl IV Center Freq Step Same As Span Hore Step Size Ce
363. s in parallel Press the Line 2 side key and move line 2 Press the Delta side key and move line 2 The delta value indicates the following value value of Delta value of line 2 value of line 1 m To turn off the vertical line Press the Number Of Line side key to select None dBm 795MHz 80SMH2 20dBm nyt a 10 dB agli EEE Center 800 MHz Span 36 MHz 100 dem Figure 3 160 Two horizontal and two vertical lines 3 230 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Display Line Multi Display Lines Real Time S A Only The Real Time S A mode has the multi display lines function that shows multiple horizontal and vertical lines as shown in Figure 3 161 The spectrum view uses the amplitude and frequency lines The spectrogram uses the time and frequency lines The display lines are placed at regular intervals from the reference line Frequency display lines blue Frequency reference line red m 26441 dBm 75 45 dBm Hz Amplitude reference line red qu Amplitude display lines blue Lines readout Center 0 Hz Span 30 MHz Marker 3 56 MHz 26 414 dBm 1 15 ms 46 frame Time display lines blue Time reference line red Center 0 Hz Span 30 MHz Frequency reference line red Frequency display lines blue Figure 3 161 Multi display lines Real Time S A mode RSA3408B Analyzer
364. s marker Measurement table Up to 20 spurious signals displayed Figure 3 88 shows an example of the spurious measurement Detected spurious signals are numbered sequentially from No 1 in descending order of amplitude and spurious markers are displayed on the waveform A maximum of 20 spurious signals are displayed In addition frequency difference deltaF and amplitude ratio Ratio in relation to the carrier are displayed in the measurement table at the bottom of the screen You can save the table to a file csv by Save Save Table For file operations refer to page 3 251
365. s test Performance degradation information for the IEC 61000 4 6 test Residual spurious signals can increase to the worse of either 60 dB below reference level or 60 dBm with exposure to the disturbance levels of this test Performance Criterion C applied at the 7095 25 cycle Voltage Dip and the 096 250 cycle Voltage Interruption test levels IEC 61000 4 11 Complies with the EMC provision of the Radiocommunications Act per the following standard in accordance with ACMA CISPR 11 2003 Radiated and Conducted Emissions Group 1 Class A in accordance with EN 61326 1 2006 and EN 61326 2 1 2006 Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal of the European Communities Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC EN 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use UL 61010 1 2004 2 d Edition Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment CAN CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 2004 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Part 1 IEC 61010 1 2001 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Compliance Information Equipment Type Test and measuring equipment Safety Class Class 1 grounded product Pollution Degree measure of the contaminants that could occur in the environment around and Descripti
366. setting is displayed on the bottom of the screen Center Freq MHz 100 in this example Tektronix RSA 3408B 20 FREQ CHAN Frequency 100 MHz RBW 100 kHz Cancel Back Span 36 MHz Trace 1 Normal Center Freq 4 Input At 15 dB Trace2 Off Hz E 0 Start Freq dem Hz 82M Stop Freq Hz 118M Channel 10 Channel Table dB None Center Freq Step Same As A wp PI VA Center Freq Step Same As Span The current setting is 2 displayed in this field e Step Size Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Center Freq Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Center Freq MHz 100 500k Figure 2 33 Center frequency of 100 MHz span of 36 MHz The next step is to set the span It is currently set to 36 MHz as the default value Change the setting to 20 kHz 3 Press the Span key on the front panel g Frequency Run Channel Stop Span key gt Span Trig Amplitude REWI RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 35 Tutorial 2 36 The Span menu item is selected Span Indicates that the general purpose knob is available Hz Y XXX amp Numeric value input field 4 Turn the general purpose knob to the left to select 20k The hardware is set with the selected value immediately The spectrum waveform is displayed on the screen as shown in Figure 2 34 Tekironix RSA 3408B 2007 06 19 9 30 02
367. shold Meas Setup Detection Threshold On Off ratio 1 On Off Ratio mW 100 Jw 19 400234 ms Duty cycle 17 048281 ms OBW 0 dBm Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz 19 377578 ms 17 025625 ms 100 0 dBm Pulse width 19 400234 ms Pulse ripple 19 400234 ms Pulse pulse phase 17 048281 ms EBW Center 2 GHz Figure 3 85 Waveform display in the subview 3 118 Peak power zo 19 400234 ms 19 393594 ms Repetition interval 1 Repetition Interval mW 17 048281 ms Channel power 0 Channel Power dBm Center 2 GHz Span 10 MHz Frequency deviation 17 047266 ms 17 042891 ms RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Signal Source Analysis Option 21 Only The signal source analysis function allows you to measure phase noise jitter and settling time in a signal source such as a PLL Phase Locked Loop system Measurement Items The following items are measured in the signal source analysis Select the items using the Measure key Table 3 21 Signal source measurement items Measure menu Measurement items Phase Noise m Carrier frequency m Channel power m Phase noise m Random jitter m Periodic jitter Real Time Phase Noise Spurious Spurious Real Time Spurious Frequency versus Time Freque
368. sition when the trigger does not occur press the Run Stop key again Repeat Selects whether to acquire data continuously or singly Continuous Repeatedly acquires and displays the waveform Acquisition data will be overwritten while waiting for a new trigger event Use the Single setting if you will need to examine or reanalyze the measurement results m Single Acquires and displays one waveform After the first waveform display you must press Run Stop to acquire and display each waveform Table 3 28 shows the acquisition method with the trigger and repeat modes The concept is illustrated in Figure 3 118 on page 3 169 Table 3 28 How to acquire a waveform Trigger mode Repeat mode Trig Mode Trig gt Repeat Description Free run Continuous Press Run Stop to acquire data repeatedly Press this key again to stop acquisition Press Run Stop to acquire one waveform Triggered Press Run Stop to acquire data every trigger event Single Press Run Stop to acquire one waveform every trigger event RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 165 Trigger 3 166 Stop and Show Results Stops data acquisition and shows measurement results Instead of the Run Stop key you can stop data acquisition by pressing the Stop and Show Results side key when the measurement mode is Real Time S A Demod or Time However there is the following difference in function Pressing the Run Stop key to stop data acquisition The block data acqui
369. splay a spectrum and no input signal is present a spurious emission may appear at the center frequency regardless of frequency settings The center offset calibration cancels those spurious emissions If the spurious emission is too obvious when you narrow the span run the calibration NOTE Option 03 only When you input I and Q signals from the rear panel connectors set the IQ input signal level to zero externally When a spurious emission appears at the center of the screen with no input signal run the center offset calibration Figure 1 21 Center offset To run the center offset calibration do the following 1 Press the Cal key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate Center Offset side key The calibration runs It takes several seconds to complete the process 1 26 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Calibration Calibrating DC Offset The DC offset calibration cancels DC offset that appears at 0 Hz in the baseband DC to 40 MHz When you change the amplitude setting and the DC offset is too obvious run the DC offset calibration When DC offset appears at 0 Hz in va the baseband run the calibration Figure 1 22 DC offset To run the DC offset calibration do the following 1 Press the Cal key on the front panel 2 Press the Calibrate DC Offset sid
370. st of files in the selected folder appears displaying only files with the same extension as the file to be stored 3 257 File Operations Press the Filename side key see Figure 3 180 and enter a file name using the front panel keypad The file extension is automatically added Refer to Entering a File Name on page 3 262 for details about how to enter the name Here are instructions to input TRACE1 for example using the front panel keypad Press the TUV number 2 key once to select the letter and then press the Enter key Press the number 1 key three times to select the letter R and then press the Enter key m Press the ABC number 8 key once to select the letter A and then press the Enter key Press the ABC number 8 key three times to select the letter and then press the Enter key m Press the DEF number 9 key twice to select the letter E and then press the Enter key m Press the number 1 key five times to select the letter 1 and then press the Enter key Tekironix RSA 3408B 2007 06 19 2 PAUSE Save ToFile mmm M M mM ip HT M M Mf Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 320 us Cancel Back Span 5 MHz Filename i Input Att 15 dB Filename Fie name TRACE Enters a file name a iqt 389KB IQT 27 Jb 07 07 13 09 43 sl b iqt 87KB IQT 27 Jb 07 07 13 0
371. stem 2 25 Trace 3 192 tree A 1 Trigger 3 164 View 3 204 Min Hold description 3 197 Minimum jump setting 3 244 Mode selecting 2 22 Modulation analysis Demod mode 3 31 Mouse operation 2 8 Mult display lines Real Time S A only 3 231 Index 4 NBW setup display 2 13 Noisogram Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 127 view setting 3 224 Numeric input 2 19 0 OBW measurement 3 8 Online help using 3 245 Option displaying 2 26 Option key 2 27 Optional accessories G 3 Options G 1 OOPSK shifting data 3 53 Overlap FFT 3 183 Overrange 3 147 Overview changing 3 38 modulation analysis screen 3 33 Over voltage input 3 147 P P25 CAFM 3 49 PDF measurement 3 65 view setting 3 223 PDF manuals xxii Peak 3 236 Peak search 3 235 operation 3 243 setting minimum jump 3 244 Phase noise measurement Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 121 Pin assignment digital IQ output connectors Option 05 C 1 Pixel relation between frame bin and pixel 3 200 PM signal measurement 3 45 Power AC requirements 1 12 applying 1 12 connecting the cord 1 12 powering off 1 20 principal power switch 1 13 switch 1 13 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Index Power on down measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 85 Power versus Time measurement 3 102 Demod mode 3 59 Preset 2 24 Principal power switch 1 13 Print menu 3 283 screen copy 3 283 Product descrip
372. step size m For the up and down keys the step size is set with the Step Size side key Refer to Changing the Step Size on page 2 22 for the detail The changed value is immediately reflected on the analyzer settings and displays 2 20 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Functional Overview Entering a Value Using the Keypad You can enter values using the front panel keypad shown in Figure 2 17 1 Press the side key for setting a numeric value For example press Frequency Channel Center Freq to set a center frequency The menu item changes to the display shown in Figure 2 16 on Freq E Indicates that numeric values can be changed with the general purpose knob Numeric input field Figure 2 16 Changing value with the keypad 2 Press the keys required to enter the desired numeric value For example to enter the frequency 123 45 MHz press 123 45 MHz To delete an entered number press the BKSP Backspace key ABC DEF S Unlock BKSP 7 8 9 GHz pol lt Deletes a character before the cursor GHI JKL MNO ms 4 5 6 MHz PQRS TUV WXYZ us p 1 2 3 kHz amp Caps Lock ns dBm Next p 0 pd Hz Enter Accepts the input Numeric value keys The unit keys also function as the Enter key Input is immediately accepted when one of those keys is pressed Figure 2 17 Numeric keypad 3 Confirm the input by pressing the unit key o
373. t b Select Marker gt Center Zoom Marker Freq The zoomed area shifts to the specified frequency Zoomed area shifted by Reference cursor Zoomed area Center Zoom Marker Freq Marker Marker on frequency center Figure 3 29 Zoomed area settings using the marker NOTE The zoomed spectrum is calculated based on time domain data acquired with a higher sampling rate than for obtaining a normal spectrum So a large zoom ratio may cause the skirt shape of the spectrum to differ from that of the spectrum without zoom However it does not affect carrier power measurement results RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 29 Spectrum Analysis S A Mode 3 30 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Ray SSS Modulation Analysis Demod Mode This section describes how to perform measurements in the modulation analysis Demod mode Mode S A Demod Time Measure menu Analog Demod gt AM Demod Digital Demod Audio Measurements Standard FM Demod PM Demod IQ versus Time Pulse Spectrum gt Constellation EVM IQ Frequency versus Time Power versus Time Symbol Table Eye Diagram CCDF PDF Figure 3 30 Demod menu structure Signal Noise amp Distortion Harmonics Hum amp Noise Ratio There are four items in the Demod menu m Analog Demod Performs analog modulation analysis Refer to page 3 41 for details m
374. t Figure 2 8 Pre and post trigger regions RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 11 Interface Maps Front Panel Key Lock When controlling this instrument through GPIB you can disable all the keys on the front panel except the power switch using the SYSTEM KLOCK command At this time the message PANEL LOCK is displayed on the top side key see Figure 2 9 PANEL LOCK m Front panel key lock display Figure 2 9 Key lock display To cancel the key lock the following two methods can be used Use the SYSTEM KLOCK command to cancel m Turn the power off and then on Refer to the RSA3000B Series Programmer Manual for information about the GPIB commands RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Interface Maps Setup Display Tektronix RSA 3408B Frequency 800 MHz Span 15 MHz Input Att 20 dB Setup apad The setup display area in the upper part of the screen shows the analyzer hardware settings see Figure 2 10 The contents differ depending on the measurement mode spectrum analysis S A modulation analysis Demod or time analysis Time as shown in Table 2 3 80 kHz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off RBW 0 dem Figure 2 10 Setup display Table 2 3 Setup display Item Frequency Span Input Att RBW NBW Trace 1 and 2 Spectrum Length Spectrum Interval Acquisition Length RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Mode
375. t Filter Shape Nyquist A Rolloff Ratio E p dem i Center 1 GHz spam AME Scroll Table Z Main Channel Power 7 8 dBm di 2 3 4 15 6 Z S00 K He imeli s mre 2 Hefe SM E 3845 1505 3843 4411 47 99 Offset Frequency ACPR Upper dB ACPR Lower dB 4 M Hz 4 5 Iv RFID 18000 4 6 Scroll Table Figure 3 66 ACPR measurements RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Table 3 17 Standard settings Modulation type Decoding format Bit rate Tari Standard type 18000 4 1 18000 6 A 18000 6 B 18000 6 C 18000 7 14443 2 A Power On Down Measurement Measures the rise fall time settling time overshoot and undershoot of the transmission power pulse NOTE In the analysis range there must be at least one pulse rise or fall If there is not the analysis is not performed Meas Setup Menu The following menu items are common to the power on down RF envelope FSK pulse constellation eye diagram and symbol table measure ments Analyze Perform measurements for acquired data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings Standard Type Sets the parameters according to the standard as shown in Table 3 17 Interrogator to Tag ASK Man
376. t Frequency Center Frequency Width Demod and Time modes Acquisition Length Acquisition History Spectrum Length Spectrum Offset Analysis Length Analysis Offset Output Trigger Indicator Off On RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Appendix A Menu Tree Run Stop Trig Mode Repeat Stop and Show Results RBW FFT Mode Triggered Source Save on Trigger Trace Avg Save Count Save Count Limit Source Power External Level Slope Position Source Freq Mask Define Mask Slope Position Real Time S A Mode FFT Start Point FFT Overlap FFT Window FFT Window Rolloff Ratio Real Time S A Mode Trace Type Number Of Averages Audio Measurements Option 10 Trace Type Demod and Time Modes Average Average Count Average Term Control RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Free Run Triggered Continuous Single Power Freq Mask External Option 02 only On Off On Off Rise Fall Rise and Fall Fall and Rise Select Next Point Set Selected Point X Set Selected Point Y Delete Selected Point Insert New Point Set All Points to Maximum Set All Points to Minimum Reset Mask to Default In Out In and Out Out and In Same as in the S A mode Refer to page A 3 Pulse Measurements in the Time Mode Nyquist Blackman Harris 4B Normal Average Normal Averag
377. t Average Available when Trace 1 or 2 Type is set to Average Causes trace accumulation to start over for the average process Reset MaxHold Available when Trace 1 or 2 Type is set to MaxHold Causes trace accumulation to start over for the Max Hold process Reset MinHold Available when Trace 1 or 2 Type is set to MinHold Causes trace accumulation to start over for the Min Hold process Reset Bitmap Available when Trace 1 or 2 Type is set to Bitmap Causes trace accumulation to start over for the Bitmap display RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trace Comparison Display and Average Function Display Detection Available in the S A mode except DPX spectrum The bin data is compressed in the display because the number of pixels in the horizontal direction of the screen is generally smaller than the number of bins in the FFT Display Detection selects the method to be used for decimating traces to fit the available space It is related only to the decimation of displayed data m Max Min Draws a line connecting the maximum and the minimum values of data corresponding to each pixel m Max Displays the maximum value of data corresponding to each pixel Min Displays the minimum value of data corresponding to each pixel The analyzer performs RMS detection using the linear A D converter regardless of the Display Detection setting Refer to page 3 200 for details on compression of waveform display data Load Trace 1 2 Loads trace d
378. t LL Span 20 kHz i quisition Tapa 15 dB analysis range Length s 54m 0 Acquisition dem History Acquisition History Specifies the number of the block to Spectrum Length be analyzed 10 s nnd 32m Spectrum Offset 100 s m 0 Start 54 ms Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Analysis Length s Analysis Length E The main view shows the waveform and Specifies the time length of the measurement result for the analysis range Analysis Offset 4 analysis range 5 a _ A i i i S Analysis Offset 90 Specifies the start point of the analysis range E Step Size Start 40 ms Scale 32 ms Analysis Offset Analog Demod AM Demod Analysis Offset ms 24 62 54 Figure 2 52 Analysis range settings RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 55 Tutorial Setting the Acquisition One frame consists of 1024 data points and one block consists of several frames Length Data are acquired in block units in the Demod mode The number of frames in one block is referred to as block size Frame and block size are shown in Figure 2 53 1024 data points A C N OO OO 00020000000 Frame 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Frame 1 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O Frame 2 OO 0000000060 Frame 3 gt 1 block N frames O O 0O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O FrameN 1 Figure 2 53 Frame and block Suppose that
379. t calibration m IF flatness calibration m Display brightness adjustment Each item is explained in this section RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 1 23 Calibration Cal Menu Use the Cal key to calibrate the analyzer NN Input 1 EN Cal Calibrate All Calibrate Gain Calibrate Center Offset System Calibrate DC Offset Calibrate IF Flatness Auto Calibration Yes No Service Figure 1 19 Calibration menu structure The Cal menu contains the following controls Calibrate Performs all possible calibration operations Calibrate Gain Calibrates the internal gain steps Refer to page 1 25 for the gain calibration Calibrate Center Offset This calibration cancels a center offset Refer to page 1 26 for the center offset calibration Calibrate DC Offset This calibration cancels DC offset in baseband Refer to page 1 27 for the DC offset calibration Calibrate IF Flatness Calibrates the IF intermediate frequency flatness Refer to page 1 27 for the IF flatness calibration Auto Calibration Determines whether to automatically perform all possible calibration operations The default setting is On Service This menu item is only to be used by qualified personnel for repair and calibration Refer to the RSA3408B Technical Reference and Service Manual optional accessory for details 1 24 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Calibration Calibrating
380. t set the scale of the spectrogram The Scale menu for the spectrogram view contains the following controls see Figure 3 142 Auto Scale Sets the start value and the scale of the color axis automatically to fit the spectrogram to the screen Horizontal Scale Sets the range of the horizontal axis Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views Vertical Size Sets the range of the vertical axis Range 87 to 89088 frames Vertical Start Sets the start frame number for the vertical axis Color Scale Sets the scale value subtracting the minimum power value from the maximum power value of the color axis The level is represented in 100 steps 100 colors from the minimum value blue to the maximum value red in the default state Color Stop Sets the maximum value top of the color axis Full Scale Sets the maximum value of the color axis to the reference level and the height to 100 dB The following menu items appear when the overview is a spectrogram in the Demod modulation analysis and the Time time analysis modes Step to Spectrum Window Vertical Start is automatically set so that the frame displayed as a spectrum in the subview appears on the spectrogram Step to Analysis Window Vertical Start is automatically set so that the frame analyzed and displayed in the main view appears on the spectrogram Step to Trigger Vertical Sta
381. t to 18000 7 m Standard Type is set to Manual and Decoding Format FSK The vertical axis changes from amplitude in the RF Envelope measurement to frequency in the FSK Pulse Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu of the RF envelope FSK pulse measurement is the same as the power on down measurement Refer to page 3 85 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Sample rate Effective sample rate Refer to Interpolation Points on page 3 89 Measurement table gt On Off time Period Duty cycle Ripple b Rise Fall time Sample Rate 640 kHz Marker 1 us Effective Sample Rate 3 2 M Hz 40 Index On width s Off width s mV pP Pay Coo T 124 7981 25 24 5 74 34 25 24 74 8C my 24 69 25 2624 49 4 24 8034 25 2714 49 5 EE EN eg 74 881 25 1741 74 84 er gt Start 5 004101 ms Scale 7 5 us Each envelope contains Envelope number three slopes selected by View Define gt Envelope Marker 40 925 ms 3 5801173559 kHz 5 kHz FSK pulse measurement The vertical axis represents 1 frequency shift from the kHz carrier frequency Start 42 475 ms Scale 211 25 us Figure 3 70 RF envelope FSK pulse measurement main view Figure 3 70 shows an example of the RF envelope FSK pulse measurement main view The following items are provided in the measurement table
382. tantaneous voltage of a second electrical signal the modulating signal Analysis Time A subset of time contiguous samples from one Block Time used as input to an Analysis View Analysis View Any view which produces measurement results except for Spectrum Power versus Time and Spectrogram ASK Acronym for Amplitude Shift Keying The process or result of a process in which the amplitude of the carrier is varied in accordance with the state of a digital input signal Block See Acquisition Calibrator A signal generator producing a specified output used for calibration purposes Carrier Carrier Signal The electrical signal typically a sine wave upon which modulation is impressed Carrier Frequency The frequency of the carrier signal RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Carrier to Noise Ratio C N The ratio of carrier signal power to average noise power in a given band width surrounding the carrier usually expressed in decibels Center Frequency That frequency which corresponds to the center of a frequency span expressed in hertz Clear Erase Presets memory to a prescribed state usually that denoting zero Controls User accessible mechanisms to modify setup parameters dBm A unit of expressed power level in decibels referenced to 1 milliwatt dBmV A unit to express voltage levels in decibels referenced to 1 millivolt dBuV A unit to express voltage levels in deci
383. te is calculated and interpolated by the spline method Range 0 to 7 default 0 Zero means no interpolation Effective sample rate Actual sample rate x Interpolation Points setting value 1 The actual sample rate and effective sample rate are displayed in the main view of the power on down and RF envelope measurements see Figure 3 69 on page 3 91 and Figure 3 70 on page 3 93 Advanced Parameter For the standard types of 14443 2 A and 14443 2 B only Sets the following three parameters Channel Filter Selects the filter for demodulating an input signal m None no filter default for Interrogator m Raised Cosine default for Tag Preamble Determines whether to search for the preamble Default Searches for the preamble while analyzing data The preamble is displayed in yellow in the symbol table m Off Analyzes data without searching for the preamble Side Band Selects the sideband to analyze m Upper Default Analyzes the upper sideband m Lower Analyzes the lower sideband RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 89 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Setting the Bit Rate Tari You must set the bit rate or Tari near the true value within 20 of the true value approximately depending on waveform to perform the analysis properly in the power on down RF envelope constellation eye diagram and symbol table measurements NOTE If the bit rate or Tari setting value is out of range the ana
384. th Same as in the Demod and Time modes Acquisition History Same as in the Demod and Time modes Analysis Length Same as in the Demod and Time modes Analysis Offset Same as in the Demod and Time modes Frequency Center Sets the frequency of the center of analysis area Frequency Width Sets the frequency width of the analysis area Trigger output point Frequency Analysis Offset Time Analysis area Analysis Length Frequency Width Frequency Center Figure 3 111 Parameters in the zoom mode 3 160 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Acquisition and Analysis Parameters Seamless Acquisition The frame data is acquired every designated time The interval between one acquisition and another is called a frame cycle as shown in Figure 3 112 Frame length A Frame 0 Frame 1 gt Time Frame cycle Figure 3 112 Frame cycle If the frame cycle is longer than the frame length time gaps appear between frames The shorter the frame cycle the more precisely you can observe the spectrum waveform variation in time You can acquire frames without gaps when the span setting is below 36 MHz Acquiring frame data without a gap is called Seamless Acquisition See Figure 3 113 Seamless acquisition Frame 0 Frame 1 Frame 2 Time Figure 3 113 Seamless acquisition When the span is set greater than 36 MHz one display frame is reproduc
385. the FFT Points side key and select the value with the general purpose knob The range extends up to 65536 in powers of 2 The waveform after FFT is displayed with the selected number of points Normal noise floor Increasing the number of FFT points causes the noise floor to go down and Spurious signal occasionally display spurious signals Figure 3 132 Generating spurious signals by increasing the number of FFT points RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual FFT and RBW FFT Window The phase of the waveform processed by FFT analysis is assumed to start at zero and end at zero so the waveform data is an exact multiple of one cycle If the phase at the start and end of the waveform are equal there is no unnatural discontinuity in the signal waveform and the frequency and the amplitude can be accurately calculated If the waveform data is not an exact multiple of one cycle the amplitudes at the start and end of the waveform will be different There will be a discontinuity of the waveform between the beginning and end and a high frequency transient phenomenon occurs When this happens inaccurate frequency information is recorded in the frequency domain If a window function is applied to the waveform the start and end amplitudes will be closer and the discontinuity is reduced The frequency components that are calculated from the signal by FFT also become more accurate Choose the FFT window according to your objective a
386. the carrier frequency with the center frequency Spurious Measurement Spurious measurements are made in the same way as in the S A mode refer to pages 3 12 However for the spurious measurements in the signal source analysis there is a filter function to extract symmetrical spurious signals only Meas Setup Menu The next items are identical to those in the spurious measure ment in the S A mode Refer to pages 3 12 Carrier Threshold Level Signal Threshold in the S A mode Ignore Region Spurious Threshold Excursion Scroll Table The following items are added for the signal source analysis Symmetrical Filter Selects and deselects the filter for extracting symmetrical spurious signals only m On Default Displays symmetrical spurious signals only m Off Displays all spurious signals Carrier Tracking Selects whether carrier tracking is executed or not Carrier tracking ensures that the carrier frequency is always positioned centrally even when the signal drifts it does not affect the waveform display m Default Carrier tracking is executed The measurement is conducted with the carrier frequency always positioned centrally m Off Carrier tracking is not executed The measurement is conducted with the central frequency that was set using Frequency Channel Center Freq RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 125 Time Analysis Time Mode 3 126 Spurious detection range is displayed in blue Spuriou
387. the persistence mode points are reset every screen update m Variable Selects the variable persistence mode Set a persistence time that is how long a point in the display is visible before fading using the Persistence Value side key m Infinite Selects the infinite persistence mode that prevents a point in the display from fading Once a point in the display has been written to it will remain visible until you press the Reset Bitmap side key 4 When selecting the variable persistence mode press the Persistence Value side key to set the persistence time Range 1 to 1000 no unit default 10 5 Press the Intensity side key to control the visibility of events An increased intensity level allows a single short event to be seen This also allows the effect of variable persistence to be seen on infrequent events Range 1 to 100 default 25 3 20 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Spectrogram Display You can display the spectrum of an input signal concurrently with the spectro gram Follow these steps to display the spectrogram l Press the S A key on the front panel 2 Press the S A with Spectrogram side key The spectrum and spectrogram are displayed on the same screen as shown in Figure 3 21 Tekironix RSA 3408B ee Frequency 800 MHz RBW 100 Hz Span 10 kHz Trace 1 Average 64 64 Input Att 20 dB Trace 2 Off Spectrum gt
388. the spectrum trace m Yellow harmonic tag These indicate the order of the harmonic The fundamental wave is tagged as S Signal m Red non harmonic tag These are numbered in descending order of amplitude The measurement results are displayed at the bottom of the screen Refer to Table 3 13 for definitions of the items in the measurement results RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 71 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode 3 72 Table 3 13 Definition of the Signal Noise amp Distortion measurement items Modulation Displayed method item Definition Baseband SIN Signal to Noise ratio an S N SIN amp D Where S Signal Power Spectral Density N amp D Noise and Distortion Power Spectral Density SINAD Signal to Noise And Distortion SINAD S N amp D N amp D Where 5 Signal Power Spectral Density N amp D Noise and Distortion Power Spectral Density THD Total Harmonic Distortion THD vv Vor 2 51 Where Vs Voltage Value of Harmonic Distortion Products SL Signal Level Voltage TNHD Total Non Harmonic Distortion TNHD V4 Vo Vn SL Where Vs Voltage Value of Non Harmonic Distortion Products SL Signal Level Voltage Audio Freq Audio frequency Baseband Audio Level Absolute amplitude dBm AM MS RMS modulation depth Maximum modulation depth Minimum modulation depth FM RMS RMS frequency deviation Peak Peak frequency deviation Peak frequency deviation Pk Pk Peak peak fr
389. three dimensions like a spectrogram called Noisogram the color axis shows the C N dBc Hz the horizontal axis shows the offset frequency Hz and the vertical axis shows the time frame number Jitter equivalent to the RMS value of the phase noise and the settling time of the phase noise and jitter are also calculated from the phase noise data Meas Setup Menu The following items are provided in the Meas Setup menu for the Real Time Phase Noise measurement Analyze Performs measurement for acquisition data in the analysis range NOTE When you change settings in the Meas Setup menu press the Analyze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings The next items are the same as for the phase noise measurement Refer to page 3 121 Carrier Threshold Level Carrier Bandwidth C N Sideband Rj Start Offset Frequency Rj Stop Offset Frequency Max Pj Threshold The following items are added for the real time measurement see Figure 3 89 They depend on the subview content refer to Selecting the Subview Content on page 3 129 Rj Settling Threshold Enabled when Random jitter versus Time is displayed in the subview Sets the threshold value for obtaining the random jitter settling time Setting range 0 to 1 s default 0 s C N Offset Frequency Enabled when C N versus Time is displayed in the subview Sets the value of the frequency displaying the C N versus Time in the subview as the offset from carri
390. ticks on page 3 271 Example 20050721 140120 0000154761 IOT m Directory C Documents and Settings lt username gt My DocumentsYSave on TriggerY Use the following Trigger menu items to control the Save on Trigger function Save On Trigger Enables and disables the Save on Trigger function On Enables the Save on Trigger function m Off Default Disables the Save on Trigger function Save Count Selects whether to set a limit on the number of times that data is saved On Default When the number of data save operations reaches the Save Count Limit indicated below data saving is halted Off No limit on data save operations is set In this case data saving is halted using the Run Stop key on the front panel or the GPIB command NOTE When the internal hard disk becomes full data saving is halted and the Media full error message appears For deleting a file refer to page 3 264 Save Count Limit Sets a limit on the number of times that data is saved This setting is enabled when the above mentioned Save Count is On Setting range 1 to 16383 default 100 3 170 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Trigger Creating a Trigger Mask Option 02 Only NOTE The trigger mask function is available for Option 02 in the measurement mode Mode of the real time spectrum analysis Real Time S A the modulation analysis Demod and the time analysis Time Trigger masks are limited to 60 dBfs T
391. tion 1 1 Programmer Manual related documents xxii Pulse measurements 3 109 Pulse spectrum 3 47 Q Data Half Symbol Shift 3 53 R Random jitter description 3 123 RBW description 3 179 menu 3 180 Real Time S A operation 3 23 Real time phase noise measurement Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 127 Real time spurious measurement Signal source analysis Option 21 only 3 131 Real time analysis 1 3 S A mode 3 23 Rear panel 2 4 Removable hard disk drive Option 06 using D 1 Repeat trigger 3 165 Restart 1 21 Restoring the operating system E 1 RF envelope measurement RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 92 RF INPUT Caution 1 14 RFID analysis Option 21 only 3 77 ACPR measurement 3 84 carrier measurement 3 80 constellation 3 96 eye diagram 3 96 Power on down measurement 3 85 RF envelope measurement 3 92 spurious measurement 3 82 symbol table 3 96 RMS description 3 197 RMSExpo description 3 197 Run Stop key 2 24 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual S A mode 3 1 S A with Spectrogram operation 3 21 Save menu 3 252 Save on trigger 3 170 Scalar mode span 3 142 Scale menu AM AM 3 221 AM PM 3 222 CCDF 3 212 Constellation 3 213 DPX spectrum 3 207 EVM 3 215 eye diagram 3 219 noisogram 3 224 PDF 3 223 spectrogram 3 208 spectrum 3 206 symbol table 3 218 time domain view 3 210 Scan Disk 1 21 Screen elements 2 9 Screen copy 3 283 Seamless acquisition 3 16
392. to Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RfAtt Mixer Acquisition RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Analysis Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Vertical Scale Vertical Units dBm dBuV V uV W Corrections Amplitude Offset Frequency Offset Amplitude Table Edit Table Interpolation Load Table Save Table Real Time S A with Zoom Demod and Time modes Ref Level Auto Level RF Atten Mixer Auto RfAtt Mixer RF Att RF Atten Mixer Rf Att Mixer Level RF Atten Mixer Mixer Corrections Amplitude Offset Figure 3 100 Amplitude menu structure RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Off On Select Point To Edit Frequency Amplitude Delete Point Add New Point Done Editing Table Clear Table Freq Interpolation Ampl Interpolation 3 143 Setting Amplitude 3 144 Amplitude Ref Level Vertical Scale Sets the scale of the amplitude of the displayed waveform Ref Level Sets the maximum top edge of the vertical axis The available range depends on the measurement frequency band as shown in Table 3 26 Table 3 26 Reference level setting range Frequency band Setting range Baseband DC to 40 MHz 30 to 20 dBm 5 dB step RF 40 MHz to 8 GHz 50 to 30 dBm 1 dB step IQ Option 03 only 10 to 20 dBm 5 dB step Auto Level Automatically adjusts reference level for the best system perfor mance based on power measurement within the set span NOTE An input si
393. to set span in the specified sequence In the S A mode except real time you can set an arbitrary span within the limit using the numeric keypad Start Freq Same as Start Freq on page 3 136 Stop Freq Same as Stop Freq on page 3 136 lt Span gt Start Freq Center Freq Stop Freq Figure 3 96 Setting frequency and span RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 137 Setting Frequency and Span Using the Channel Table 3 138 The channel table contains channel numbers and the corresponding frequencies for a communication system When you use W CDMA standard signals for example you can set a center frequency by selecting a channel number from the W CDMA table 1 Press the Frequency Channel key on the front panel 2 Press the Channel Table side key and select one of these items None selects no channel table You can select one of the following communication standards CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR400 RL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 FL CDMA2000 EU PAMR800 RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 FL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 1 RL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k FL CDMA2000 NMT450 25k RL CDMA2000 SMR800 FL CDMA2000 SMR800 RL CDMA2000 TACS BAND FL CDMA2000 TACS BAND RL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 FL DCS1800 DL CDMA2000 GSM BAND 2 RL DCS1800 UL CDMA2000 IMT2000 FL GSM850 DL CDMA2000 IMT2000 RL GSM850 UL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND FL GSM900 DL CDMA2000 JTACS BAND RL GSM900 UL CDMA2000 KOREA PCS FL IE
394. tortion graph for measuring non linearity characteristics of a DUT device under test such as an RF amplifier Figure 3 53 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of recovered reference amplitude versus measured phase error and the table of AM PM coefficients extracted from curve fitting Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the AM PM measurement has the same controls as in the AM AM measurement except for the Linear Signal Region Mask Refer to page 3 61 Overview Power versus Time Subview Constellation Mm M ge E 8 Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 1 6 ns Cancel Back Span 1 MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets NOTE Constellation is selected for the subview by View Define gt 6 Modulation Subview Content S ay 160M Modulation Parameters 94 Auto Carrier dBm Timing p 2 AR on Off Start 240 Lis Scale 24 us 1 454 1 454 Frequency Error Hz v 396 5957681689m Coefficient table gt index AM AM Coeff AM PM Coeff Maximum 8 304 001 1 214e 001 Coefficients 3 249e 001 2 692 002 8 2 125 001 1 959e 002 3 378e 002 3 225e 003 Scroll Table 2 996e 003 2 5528 004 1 534 004 1 246e 005 3 3808 007 500987 ii Brn os 2 Order in best fit curve polynomial AM AM AM PM AM PM distortion graph Refer to Ma
395. tting Views AM PM View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu The AM PM view shows non linearity characteristics of a device under test DUT such as RF amplifier representing reference amplitude along the horizontal axis and phase error along the vertical axis Refer to AM PM Measurement on page 3 63 The Scale menu for the AM PM view contains the following controls Measurement Content Selects a vector or dot display see Figure 3 154 Vector Displays yellow lines between the dots default m Dot Displays the calculated result as a series of red dots By default the measurement results are displayed with the horizontal and vertical axes scaled automatically to fit the graph to the screen Horizontal Start Sets the minimum value left edge of the horizontal axis to expand the graph horizontally Range The initial minimum value left edge to the maximum value right edge Vertical Scale Sets the vertical full scale value to expand the graph vertically Range The initial maximum value x 0 05 to the maximum value Vector display Dot display Vertical Scale 150 150 deg deg 150 150 de deg 3 222 g 25 dBm 5 dBm 55 dBm 5 dBm Horizontal Start Figure 3 154 Vector and dot displays for AM PM view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Views PDF View Setting Option 21 Only View Scale Menu Vertical Stop
396. ttings as they were when it was shut down This tutorial starts with the factory default settings Perform the following steps to restore the factory default settings 1 Press the System key System key gt Cal System Macro Save Print Macro Setup 2 Press the Reset All to Factory Defaults side key The instrument is now ready to take measurements 2 32 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Displaying Spectrum This section describes how to set the frequency span and amplitude and then appropriately display the spectrum Figure 2 30 shows the settings Frequency Center frequency Amplitude Y gt Figure 2 30 Frequency span and amplitude settings Setting Center Frequency The center frequency is set to 1 5 GHz and span is set to 36 MHz when you and Span power on the analyzer Change the settings of center frequency and span to display the waveform around 100 MHz 1 Press the Frequency Channel key on the front panel Frequency Run Frequency Channel key gt Channel Stop Span Trig Amplitude jou RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 2 33 Tutorial The Frequency Channel menu shown in Figure 2 31 is displayed on the right side of the screen Notice that the Frequency menu item is available for entering the numeric value
397. two blocks black and white reversed in this figure Span 100 kHz Spectrum Offset frame 48 RealTime leasurement Off Figure 3 25 Real time mode Trace Averaging You can use the averaging to reduce noise on the spectrum trace 1 Press the Trace Avg key on the front panel to select Trace Type gt Average 2 Press the Number Of Averages side key and set the average count For each acquisition of a block of data the analyzer takes traces as many as specified by Number Of Averages from the trigger point to perform averaging The frames used for averaging are surrounded by a green box on the spectrogram see Figure 3 26 Marker 1 MHz 0 92 dBm 1 4288 s 0 frame en The frames used for averaging 2 fram are surrounded by a green box omg Center 1 MHz Span 500 I Figure 3 26 Spectrogram display in averaging 3 26 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Zoom Function When you select S A Real Time S A with Zoom the real time analysis area can be specified on the spectrogram Even though frequency hopping occurs measurement can only be made by clipping the optional burst see Figure 3 27 Spectrogram with the zoom function me Center 1 GHz Span 500 kHz 11 dim Spectrum the zoomed area 111 dem Center 1 00008 GHz Span 80 625 kHz Figure 3 27 Zoom function Acquisition Analysis In the spectrog
398. ual 3 147 Setting Amplitude Amplitude Correction If an external device such as an antenna or preamplifier is connected to the analyzer you can amplitude correct the waveform by considering the amplitude characteristics of the external device NOTE The amplitude correction function is fully controlled only in the S A mode except real time mode In the other modes Real Time S A Demod and Time amplitude offset control is available Refer to page 3 155 for setting the offset Figure 3 103 shows the concept of amplitude correction In this example a signal with 80 dBm is sent to a preamplifier with a gain of 20 dB around 1 GHz In the normal display without any amplitude correction the signal peak becomes 80 20 60 dBm If amplitude correction is performed the peak becomes 60 20 80 dBm to obtain the original peak value of the input signal Normal display Corrected display 420 dB 60dBm Amplitude Input signal correction 80 dBm 20 dB 1 GHz um OD Preamplifier Ey 80dBm 1 GHz 1 GHz Figure 3 103 The amplitude correction concept 3 148 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Amplitude Amplitude Correction Press Amplitude gt Corrections to set the correction parameters Menu The correction menu has the following controls Amplitude Offset Sets the amplitude offset The amplitude of an entire waveform decreases by the offset value NOTE The following Corrections
399. ude key on the front panel to set the amplitude For information about setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 4 For the channel power OBW and EBW measurements only You can select an FFT window for the measurement Refer to RBW FFT Menu on page 3 113 5 Press the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel to set the analysis range Refer to page 3 34 for details on setting analysis range 6 Press the View Define key on the front panel to select the measurement item s for display Refer to page 3 113 for the View Define menu By default only the pulse width measurement result is displayed on screen 7 Press the Meas Setup key on the front panel to set the measurement parameters Refer to page 3 116 for the Meas Setup menu RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 111 Time Analysis Time Mode 3 112 10 After you capture a measurement waveform stop the data acquisition If you are acquiring data in the continuous mode press the Run Stop key Press the Meas Setup key and then Analyze side key to start the analysis of the acquired data Press the View Define key to select a pulse to observe from the measure ment results Hints for Taking Measurements It takes longer to detect pulses when the analysis length in the Acquisition Analysis menu is set to a larger value The results are not displayed in the Channel Power OBW or E
400. uisition before it is completed such as in a trigger armed state the last data block is empty Therefore when you save all the blocks to a file and then load the file the waveform does not appear at first If you have acquired multiple blocks select an old block to display the waveform 3 To select the preset file To select a file by name skip to step 4 To select the preset file to which you have saved data in step 3 on page 3 256 press the Load from file name to load the data see Figure 3 181 NOTE The preset file must be in the My Documents folder on the C drive If you have not saved any data to the preset file that you select the error message File name not found appears on the bottom left of the screen RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 259 File Operations Load from TraceA Load from TraceB gt Loads data from the preset file trace file in this example Load from Trace SelectFile 2 Figure 3 181 Load from the preset file lower right of the screen 4 To select an existing file a Press the Folder side key Select the folder containing the file to load For a file select procedure see step 4 on page 3 257 b After selecting the folder press the Done side key to accept it The list of files in the selected folder appears displaying only files with the same extension as the file to be loaded Press the Select File side key and then select the file from the list using
401. ular basis in case of system failures The Backup tool is located in the System Tool folder in the Windows Accessory folder Start this tool to select the files and folders to back up For more information use Windows online help For more information about access to Windows on the analyzer refer to Using Windows XP on page 2 27 The following files should be backed up frequently m Status files sta m Data files iqt m Trace files trc W Correction files cor Refer to page 3 251 for details on file operations The analyzer is equipped with a LAN Ethernet interface as standard allowing you to save data in peripheral devices such as other PCs hard disks and MO via a network Refer to page 2 6 for connecting to LAN Installing Other Applications 1 22 The analyzer incorporates Windows XP as the operating system Some combina tions of internal measurement applications and external applications may cause deterioration in the basic performance or conflicts between these applications It is not recommended that you install other applications including Micro soft Word Excel and Outlook on the analyzer If you install an external application you do so at your own risk keeping in mind that it may lower the performance of the analyzer RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual IEEE Calibration Perform these routines to optimize the analyzer performance Gain calibration m Center offset calibration m DC offse
402. ulation or Type 1 4PI QPSK P Modulation E Parameters 100 Auto Carrier dem lt m 100 oe On Off Start 12 8 ms Scale 1 28 ms Center 800 MHz Span 100 kHz Carrier EVM 05 RMS Frequency Hz 1 32 96 Peak sym 165 100 45 MagErr 0 22 96RIMIS 96 Lon _ 0 57 Peak sym 10 Phase Err 0 26 deg m 0 74 de Peak sym 165 Main view Rho a i n a Measurement results left Length 201 symbols i EVM right FreqErr 45 446 Hz Origin Offset 46 dB 0 Start 11 12125 me Seale Q53 1295 rief Digital Delhoasevm S EVM Measurement results from the top EVM RMS Peak Magnitude error RMS Peak Phase error RMS Peak Waveform quality Symbol length Frequency error Origin offset NOTE Origin offset is also called IQ feedthrough Figure 3 46 EVM measurement You can select degree or radian for the angular unit by pressing System gt Instrument Setup gt Angular Units RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 57 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode IQ Frequency versus Time Observes I O signal voltage change over time When the modulation type Measurement Meas Setup gt Modulation Type is FSK GFSK or P25 it displays frequency change over time Figure 3 47 shows an example The main view shows I Q voltage versus time graph where I and are indicated in yellow and green respectively or shows frequency de
403. ute value only Marker 1 is used and that is called single marker mode To measure a relative value Markers 1 and 2 are used and that is called delta marker mode To position the markers use the general purpose knob or the numeric input keypad l Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel Marker Setup Marker Setup key Selects the behavior of the markers 2 Press the Markers side key to select Single The marker appears at center on the waveform 3 The Marker X Position menu item is selected by default Turn the general purpose knob to move the marker to a measurement point see Figure 2 38 Frequency 100 MHz Span 20 kHz Input Att 15 dB RBW 200 Hz Trace 1 Normal Trace 2 Off amarker 99 999 MHz 21 85 dBm 44 86 ddm Hz uU dem Marker readout Marker 1 dB Figure 2 38 Measurement with a single marker 2 40 MARKER SETUP Cancel Back Select Marker Marker X Positic Neck er iti Markers Off Single Delta Reference Cursor to Marker X Reference Cursor lt Marker X Position Sets the horizontal position of the marker using the general purpose knob or numeric input keypad RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Measuring Difference with Turn on Marker 1 and 2 to measure the difference in amplitude and frequency Delta Marker the sc
404. vailable for your analyzer Tektronix part numbers are supplied in Appendix G Options and Accessories m RSA3000B Series Programmer Manual standard accessory PDF contains the programming commands and other information related to controlling the analyzer over the GPIB interface m RSA3408B Technical Reference standard accessory PDF provides specifications and performance verification procedures m RSA3408B Service Manual optional accessory describes how to verify the characteristics of adjust disassemble assemble and troubleshoot the analyzer and contains the information required for repair including module replacement and calibration PDF Manuals The Programmer Manual and Technical Reference described above PDF only are included in the Documents CD Tektronix part number 063 4089 X X Optional Software When using the optional software refer to the following manuals User Manuals RSA3303B RSA3308B amp RSA3408B Option 24 User Manual provides operating basics for the GSM EDGE analysis m RSA3303B RSA3308B amp RSA3408B Option 25 User Manual provides operating basics for the cdma2000 forward and reverse link analysis m RSA3303B RSA3308B amp RSA3408B Option 26 User Manual provides operating basics for the cdma2000 1xEV DO forward and reverse link analysis m RSA3303B RSA3308B amp RSA3408B Option 28 User Manual provides operating basics for the TD SCDMA analysis m RSA3408B Option 29 User Manua
405. viation versus time graph for the FSK GFSK or P25 C4FM modulation For the P25 CAFM modulation the main view also shows the modulation fidelity measurement results and the waveforms with the red dots indicating the symbol points For the Meas Setup menu refer to page 3 49 For setting views refer to page 3 203 Main view I Q voltage versus Time are indicated in yellow and green respectively mV Start 11 175 ms Scale 948 125 us Main view Frequency deviation versus Time Aon FSK and GFSK modulation only E 10 i MAN Pa d anna kHz 50 Hz Start 11 175 ms Scale 948 125 us Main view Measurement results and Modulation Fidelity Marker ae Frequency deviation versus Time RMS Error Magnitude 0 274 96 s P25 C4FM modulation only Carrier Frequency Offset 21 12 Hz kHz dd Deviation 1 808 kHz Modulation fidelity Length 1227 symbols measurement results from the top T EH RMS error magnitude normalized by the deviation Carrier frequency offset Frequency deviation Symbol length 5 The red dots indicate the symbol points kHz 2 40349 s 6 387153 ms Figure 3 47 IQ Frequency versus time measurement 3 58 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Power versus Time Measurement Observes signal power change over time Figure 3 48 shows an example The main view displays a power versus time graph For the Meas Setup menu refe
406. w functions setting an analysis range and changing the view content RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 99 Time Analysis Time Mode Time Variation Measurement You can select the following time variation measurement items using the Measure key when you select Transient in the Time menu versus Time m Power versus Time Frequency versus Time The time variation measurements have no Meas Setup menu items Basic Procedure Follow these steps to perform the time variation measurement 1 Press the Mode Time key on the front panel 2 Press the Transient side key and select a measurement item 3 Display the measurement waveform NOTE You should set appropriate frequency and span It is important to set frequency and span as close to the measurement signal band as possible and finely adjust them The modulated signal will not be recognized unless frequency and span are set appropriately For details on setting frequency span and amplitude refer to Setting Frequency and Span on page 3 135 and Setting Amplitude on page 3 143 a Setthe frequency by pressing the Frequency Channel key on the front panel b Setthe span by pressing the Span key on the front panel c Setthe amplitude by pressing the Amplitude key on the front panel 4 Setthe analysis range by pressing the Acquisition Analysis key on the front panel Refer to page 3 34 for details about setting analysis range The following pages show the exampl
407. w pass filter to apply to the acquired audio sig nal before the measurements are performed Table 3 10 Audio LPF Menu item Order None default com Demebwe T 3 kHz 5 15 kHz 5 30 KHz Butterworth 3 1 ITU T 0 41 TABLE A 1 0 41 Refer to http www itu int rec T REC 0 41 199410 I en TU T 0 41 TABLE 1 0 41 Refer to the above site Audio HPF Selects the audio high pass filter to apply to the acquired audio sig nal before the measurements are performed Table 3 11 Audio HPF Menu item Filter type None default No filter 50 Hz 300 Hz Butterworth 400 Hz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 69 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode De emphasis Selects the de emphasis time constant Table 3 12 Audio de emphasis filter Menu item Filter type None default No filter 25 us 50 us De emphasis 75 us 750 us Harmonics Sets the maximum number of harmonics and non harmonics to detect The detected harmonics and non harmonics are tagged with a number on the spectrum trace see Figure 3 58 Range 1 to 12 default 12 NOTE The Harmonics setting affects only the THD Total Harmonic Distor tion and TNHD Total Non Harmonic Distortion calculation results The following items are used for detecting only non harmonics Their functions are the same as the Spurious measurement in the S A mode refer to page 3 12 Ignore Region Non Harmonics Threshold Spurious Threshold in the Spurious m
408. wer Both Rel OR Abs Rel OR Abs Rel OR Abs Rel OR Abs Fail if signal 14 dBm 13 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm ee 26 dBm 13 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm Rel OR Abs 53 dBc 52 dBc 0 dBc 0 dBc 65 dBc 52 dBc 0 dBc 0 dBc Go to page 2 of 2 Spectrum Analyzer SEM Select column to edit Figure 3 17 Measurement limits editor 3 16 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Analysis S A Mode Table 3 3 Limits Setting Menu Items Begining Fequncy Sets the beginning oftnezone ansor Resolution Bandwidth Sets the resolution bandwidth RBW 10 Hz to 10 MHz Select the RBW filter shape by pressing RBW FFT gt RBW Filter Shape Rect Rectangular Gaussian Nyquist or RootNyquist For Nyquist and RootNyquist set the rolloff ratio Refer to FFT and RBW on page 3 179 for details Note that the measurement filter shape can be selected by pressing Meas Setup gt Measurement Filter Shape Offset from Carrier 1 Specifies which offset side is to be measured Upper positive Lower negative or Both Fail if signal exceeds Selects the method to detect fail in the pass fail test The choices are m Absolute Fail is detected when one of the absolute measurement results is larger than the linearly interpolated value between Beginning Absolute Limit and Ending Absolute Limit Relative Fail is detected when one of the relative measurement results is larger than the linearly interpolated value between Beginning Relative Limit a
409. wer points the faster the measurement Figure 3 90 shows an example of the real time phase noise measurement The subview displays the noisogram Color axis C N in dBc Hz Horizontal axis Frequency in Hz Vertical axis Time in frame number selected in View Define Subview Content The main view is the same as in the phase noise measure ment see Figure 3 87 on page 3 123 except that this main view is real time RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Overview Power versus Time Subview Noisogram Use View Define Subview Content to select the display C N versus Offset frequency Measurement results Carrier frequency Channel power Integrated phase noise Random Jitter Maximum periodic jitter Signal Source Analysis RT Phase Noise Tekironix RSA 3408B PAUSE MEAS SETUP Frequency 100 MHz Acquisition Length 400 us Cancel Back Span 10 MHz Carrier Threshold Input At 10 dB Level dBm Marker 3 715582031 ms Marker 100kHz 30 9 631 dBm 55 816 dBc Hz 5 rr 3 716582031 ms 38 Carrier dBm 40 TE Bandwidth Hz 10 360k C N Sideband dem 7 m TP Lenar Upper Start 9 992617 ms Scale 1 Start 100kHz End 18MiHz Rj Start Offset A2 OHz Ref 100kHz Frequency Hz 144 184 dB 200 dB 100k 10 ZZ dBc Hz Rj Stop Offset i Frequency Hz 15 2M dB Rj Settling 160 Threshold 5 dBe Hz Sn Start 100kH
410. wing controls Display Gaussian Line Determines whether to display Gaussian line on screen Display Reference Line Determines whether to display the most recently stored reference line on screen Store Reference Line Stores the current CCDF curve as a new reference line Automatically enables the reference line display Reset Measurement Performs the CCDF calculation again from the beginning The calculation is performed accumulatively until this side key is pressed CCDF Auto Scaling Selects whether to fix the scale of the horizontal axis amplitude of CCDF graph display m Off Default The scale of the horizontal axis is set to a fixed value using CCDF Scale On Displays the graph with the signal peak value as the maximum value right edge of the horizontal axis CCDF Scale Sets the full scale of the horizontal axis of CCDF graph display when CCDF Auto Scaling is Off Range 1 to 100 dB Threshold Sets the threshold which defines the samples to be included in the CCDF calculation Range 250 to 130 dBm 3 106 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Time Analysis Time Mode Measurement Display Figure 3 79 shows an example of the CCDF measurement Total number of power samples used to calculate the CCDF curve Tektronix RSA 3408B MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Frequency 1 5 GHz Acquisition Length 80 ps Span 15 MHz Display Input Att 20 dB Accumulation
411. ximum Coefficient on page 3 61 coefficient coefficient Red points Measurement points Yellow lines Measurement lines Blue line Reference line Pink line Best fit line Figure 3 53 AM PM measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 63 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode CCDF Measurement Performs digital demodulation processing and displays a CCDF graph Figure 3 54 shows an example The main view displays the XY graph of power level versus the probability that the instantaneous power of the input is above that power level For the CCDF measurement refer to page 3 104 in the Time mode Meas Setup Menu The Meas Setup menu for the CCDF measurement contains the following controls For information about the common controls for the digital modulation analysis refer to page 3 49 Linear Signal Region Unit Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 61 Linear Signal Region Display only You can set it in the AM AM or AM PM measurement refer to page 3 61 Horizontal Division Sets the horizontal interval between display points Range 0 01 to 1 dB the default is 0 1 dB Display Gaussian Line Determines whether to display the Gaussian line PAUSE MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Tekironix RSA 3408B Frequency 1 5 GHz Span 15 MHz Parameter Input Att 15 dB Presets Marker 3 180078125 ms Off
412. y 100 MHz Span 36 MHz Input Att 10 dB Acquisition Length 100 us Carrier Threshold Marker 5 165039062 ms 10 037 dBm 8 dBm 10 dB 108 Marker 1MHz 124 498 dBc Hz dBm Timing Start 9 992617 ms Marker 100 0006162205 m Hz 10 097 O 0 dem dela tH Ratio dBc 566 65 69 38 Scale 1 ms 5 35M 569 31 Signal Source Analysis RealTime Spurious Start 1MHz 5 35M 71 67 16M 69 61 15 95M 74 74 Figure 3 92 Real time spurious measurement 12 2M 59 75 Hz MEAS SETUP Cancel Back Level dBm 30 Ignore Region Hz 3M Spurious Threshold dBc 70 Excursion dB 3 Symmetrical Filter On Off Go to page 2 of 2 The main view displays the spurious measurement results when the carrier level exceeds Carrier Threshold Level in the Meas Setup menu The subview displays the measurement results in C N versus Offset frequency and Noisogram when the carrier channel power exceeds Carrier Threshold Level Selecting the Subview Content The real time spurious measurement subview includes displays specific to the signal source analysis The subview is selected by pressing View Define Subview Content Subview Content Selects the information displayed in the subview Spectrum W Noisogram Color axis C N Horizontal
413. y Deviation Sets the frequency deviation when Auto Frequency Deviation is Off Range 0 to Span 2 Hz RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual 3 51 Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Symbol Timing Search Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the symbol rate On Automatically detects the symbol rate to perform analysis The calculated symbol rate is displayed in the main view Also from the difference between the calculated rate C and the set rate S the symbol timing error C S S is indicated The S is the value specified by the Symbol Rate side key refer to page 3 50 NOTE The automatic detection of symbol rate is performed within 5 of the Symbol Rate setting value The detection fails outside the range m Off Default Performs analysis with the symbol rate set by the Symbol Rate side key The parameters valid for the modulation type refer to page 3 49 of CPM Auto Modulation Index Detection Determines whether to automatically detect or manually set the modulation index m On Default Automatically detects the modulation index and displays the value in the Modulation Index side key m Off Sets the modulation index using the Modulation Index side key Modulation Index Selects the modulation index when Auto Modulation Index Detection is Off 4 16 5 16 default 5 16 6 16 6 16 7 16 7 16 10 16 12 16 13 16 or 8 16 8 16 Auto Carrier Determines
414. y field Range 0 Hz to 8 GHz Stop Freq Sets the maximum value right edge of the horizontal axis Numeric entry field Range 0 Hz to 8 GHz NOTE Start Freq and Stop Freq are available when the measurement mode Mode is set to spectrum analysis S A except real time The values of Center Freq Start Freq Stop Freq and Span are set in conjunction with each other The relationship is described as Stop Freq Start Freq Span When one value is set the other values are automatically changed accordingly Channel Selects a channel number to set the center frequency from a channel table specified with the Channel Table menu item Channel Table Selects a communication standard to load the channel table Select a channel number with the Channel menu item For using the channel tables refer to page 3 138 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Setting Frequency and Span Center Freq Step Same As C F Sets the center frequency step size equal to the center frequency Center Freq Step Same As Span Sets the center frequency step size equal to the span Step Size Sets the step size amount per press by which the up or down key AV changes the setting value for setting frequency Span Controls span Span and frequency settings are shown in Figure 3 96 Span Sets span The available range depends on the measurement frequency band and mode as shown in Table 3 25 on page 3 140 Turn the general purpose knob
415. y to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary Compliance Information EMC Compliance ist oto bed Ue e oe be e ete ee sets Saf
416. yzer User Manual 2 49 Tutorial 5 Display spectrogram only a Press the View Select key and then select the spectrogram on the display The selected view is framed in white on screen View Select key Selects a view to operate The selected view is surrounded by a white frame Lines b Press the View Define key and then press the Show Views side key to select Single Only the spectrogram is displayed see Figure 2 47 The new frame is displayed in order from the bottom Amplitude is represented in color Default scale is from Red 0dBm to Blue 100dBm Center 100 MHz Span 20 kHz gt Frequency Figure 2 47 Spectrogram view c Press the Show Views side key again to return to Multi 2 50 RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Tutorial Spectrum Analysis There are several measurement items in the spectrum analysis such as ACPR Adjacent Channel Leak Power Ratio C N Carrier vs Noise Power Ratio and OBW Occupied Band Width These items enable you to perform measurements using simple key operations Here you will measure channel power and carrier frequency as examples Measuring Channel Power 1 Press the Measure key on the front panel Acquisition Analysis Avg Measure key Measure yon Selects a measurement item Measurement items are displayed in the menu on the right side of the screen 2 Press the Channel P
417. z End 13MH EE Carrier Frequency 108 923919463 MHz hrec Pj Threshold Channel Power 9 455 dBm B Integrated Phase Noise 51 43 deg RMS 10 Random Jitter 1 312 ns RMS 2 o to page Max Periodic Jitter 0 919 ps of 2 Figure 3 90 Real time phase noise measurement Selecting the Subview Content The real time phase noise measurement subview has displays that are specific to the signal source analysis The subview is selected by pressing View Define Subview Content Subview Content Selects the information that is displayed in the subview Refer to Setting Views on page 3 203 for scaling a view RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Spectrum Noisogram Color axis C N Horizontal axis Frequency Vertical axis Time Frame No It is like a spectrogram but the color axis represents C N in dBc Hz Random Jitter vs Time See Figure 3 91 The random jitter settling time is also indicated Integrated Phase Noise vs Time C N vs Time See Figure 3 91 The C N settling time is also indicated 3 129 Time Analysis Time Mode Random jitter settling time C N settling time Marker 3 716582031 ms 1 3116555033 ns E Settling Time 640us Setting Time 740us 1 In k 15 ns dB 5 58 2 160 ns dBc Hz 5 196582 ms 2 936582 ms z Random jitter versus Time C N versus Time Figure 3 91 Settling time displayed in the subview Hints for Taking Measure
418. z Trace 1 Normal Signal Input Input Att 15 de Trace 2 Off ae Port aker 100 Status indicator 10 21 13 dBm 71 13 dB m mite Reference Source dem Int Ext Marker readout Marker 10 dB 100 dem Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure V d amir ew Pme ea Center 100 MHz Span 36 MHz 1 15 Spectrum of the calibration signal 100 MHz about 20 dBm RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Installation 3 Check the center frequency and peak amplitude using the marker a Press the Peak key on the front panel to place the marker on the peak see Figure 1 15 b Check the marker readouts on screen The frequency should be 100 MHz and the amplitude should be approximately 20 dBm c Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel and then the Markers side key to select Off Check that the marker disappears 4 Check the RBW Resolution Bandwidth while changing the span setting a Press the Span key on the front panel b Confirm that the span is 36 MHz and the RBW is 100 kHz in the setup display on the upper part of the screen see Figure 1 16 Span RBW Span setting RSA 3408B 2007 06 19 9 30 02 INPUT CAL SF AN X M ee e E Freauand n inc MHZ ABW SOkHz Cancel Back Setup display 5 15 db Trace 2 Off Hz Marker 100 Mg 15M 21 18 dBm 70 21 dB 0 mH Start Fr
419. ze side key to perform the measurement for the modified settings Counter Resolution Sets the resolution of the carrier frequency measurement Setting range 1 mHz to 1 MHz switching by 10 times default 1 Hz Refer to page 3 10 for the carrier frequency measurement in the S A mode Power Ratio Unit for OBW or EBW Selects the unit for the OBW or EBW measurement or dB Refer to OBW Measurement page 3 8 and EBW Measurement page 3 10 in the spectrum analysis S A mode Power Ratio for OBW 40 Valid when is selected for the unit Sets the power ratio of the carrier and span region of the OBW measurement Range 80 to 10046 default 9996 Power Ratio for EBW dB Valid when dB is selected for the unit Sets the power ratio of the carrier and span region of the EBW measurement Range 80 to 100 dB default 20 dB Antenna Gain Sets the amplitude offset for the maximum EIRP measurement The maximum EIRP value to which the amplitude offset value is added is displayed as the measurement result Range 100 to 100 dB default 0 dB Channel Bandwidth Sets the channel bandwidth for the maximum EIRP measurement Range 0 to Span default 0 Hz Figure 3 64 shows an example of the carrier measurement RSA3408B Analyzer User Manual Modulation Analysis Demod Mode Overview Zoom Subview Power vs Time 25 0 19 153820 zea essere EENEEESESNLLES a Frequency 1 5 GHz Ac
420. zer User Manual Marker Operation and Peak Search Changing the Trace Tekironix RSA 3408B As shown in Figure 3 167 the marker readout relative to the reference cursor is shown in the top left portion of the screen for the active marker selected using the Select Marker side key To turn off the reference cursor press the Reference Cursor Off side key Use the following steps to change the trace on which you operate the marker when displaying two traces on a view Trace 1 is displayed in yellow and Trace 2 in green In the S A spectrum analysis mode two traces are shown when Trace 2 is turned on using the Trace Avg menu In Demod modulation analysis mode and Time time analysis mode two traces are shown in IO vs Time view I level vs time and level vs time l Press the Marker Setup key on the front panel 2 Press the Go to page 2 of 2 bottom side key to show the next menu page 3 Press the Assign Marker X to Trace side key to select Trace 1 or 2 as shown in Figure 3 168 The marker moves to another trace with the same horizontal position PAUSE JIMARKER SETUP Frequency 800 MHz Span 100 kHz Input Att 20 dB TB GEL EN RBW 500 Hz Cancel Back Trace 1 Freeze Trace 2 Normal All Markers Off Marker 992734375 MHz 85 dBm 63 84 dBm Hz 0 dBm The marker moves ers 850 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Off Figure 3 168 Changing the Trace with the sam

RSA3408B 8 GHz Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents